X

Inspiring Ideas for Modern Home

Air blowers can suck in air and drag it outside. They are similar to reverse windmills and contain a number of blades attached to an impeller. These blades keep spinning, leading to the drawing of polluted air and replacing it. 

Do you need to purchase the best blower fan for your workspace? Let us help you decide on one by telling you all about the functions of such devices and how they work. 

There are two types of air blowers, and they include axial fans and industrial centrifugal fans. These are both used in commercial setups as well as in homes. Often large machines have centrifugal blowers attached to them to remove hot air. 

How Does A Industrial Centrifugal Fan Work?

air turbine fan for ventilation and air conditioning isolated on white background. How Does A Industrial Centrifugal Fan Work.

Industrial centrifugal fans allow high pressure of air to build up, which is then released through the other side of the unit. This is perfect for large-scale applications like the cement industry, where pollutants need to be removed continuously. The air blower will blow the contaminants outside and keep the air clean inside. 

Now typical centrifugal fans contain: 

1. Centrifugal Fan Casing

This is an essential part of the centrifugal fan system as it consists of the main fanning gears. The centrifugal force of the fan is generated here as well, and this section is well-protected. You will find a hard casing being used which does not break easily. 

2. Outlet And Inlet Ducts

The inlet ducts control the movement of air inside the centrifugal fans. They are usually attached to the air blowers in the front. The outlet ducts on the other side are connected to the rear end. These ducts assist the air that is leaving the air blower. 

3. Fan Blades

Fan blades are responsible for transferring the air through the fans. These blades are curved in shape, and you will find a number of aerodynamic designs on the market. Fan blades aid the drying process by moving air quickly from the inner area to outside.  

4. Motor

The motor uses electrical energy to put more pressure on the incoming air that the air blower sends. It is responsible for the high airflow and is crucial to the fan. 

5. Impeller

Impellers contain numerous fan blades, and they allow the air to circulate properly. The shape of the air blades may vary on the basis of the fan shape. 

6. Rotor Shaft

This shaft connects the motor with the blades, and it regulates the fan speed. Hence, blowing air would not be possible without a rotor shaft.  

How Can You Differentiate Between An Air Blower And A Fan?

Fans are responsible for air circulation over a specific area. They work in a simple manner and push air around to keep the atmosphere cooler. Now, you might be thinking, why is my ceiling fan not blowing air? This happens if the fan blade rotation is incorrect. If your fan is moving in a clockwise direction, you may not be able to feel the airflow too much. 

Moving on, air blowers ensure direct air movement towards a certain area. 

These are more controlled and have great suction pressure. They use spinning blades to pull in the air and then remove it through the back. Hence, these are used for ventilation systems where air needs to be discharged. 

Common Factors Between Fans And Blowers

1. Drying

If you are looking to move the air in a wet space and ensure quick drying, then air blowers should work well. You will find exhaust fans in bathrooms which are used to dry up the surrounding area. 

Now for those wondering how exhaust systems or air blowers work, let us tell you that moisture is captured by air, but only a certain amount can be held. If you keep an air blower fan switched on at high speed, it will remove the moisture-laden air from the space. It will then be replaced by clean air that can absorb more moisture. 

2. Cooling

Having an extremely hot day and wanting some respite from it? A fan is your best bet. It can ensure the cooling of a large area, and you can now get modern features with it. Remote control can be used to control the fan and change the speed from where you are seated. 

Now, if you are wondering what direction do fans blow, let us tell you that fans are supposed to move counterclockwise. This helps in creating a downdraft that leads to a cooling breeze. On the other hand, in winter, you will need the fans to move in a clockwise direction. This leads to an updraft that will circulate warm air in the room. 

3. Workshops

Air blowers are perfect for use in workshops. You will mostly be working with different materials, and you can expect a lot of dust, dirt, and wood dust to be in the air. An air blower can be used to increase the airflow in the area and remove the pollutant-laden air inside. You can use this for commercial applications as well, where large-scale work is happening. 

4. Barbeque

If you are in charge of a fire pit or barbeque, then it is best to get air blowers for the place. Barbeques require more oxygen, and air blower fans can direct the airflow better. In fact, modern barbeques contain small air blowers that can help in lighting up the grill. 

5. Kitchens

A hot kitchen can feel very suffocating to work in, but blower fans can help improve the air quality. They can remove the hot and humid air inside the kitchens, along with the smoke rising up from the food. 

How Does A Blower Fan Work Frequently Asked Questions ?

Is a fan less efficient than a blower fan?

Blowers are less energy efficient when compared to fans but are hugely used in industrial equipment and for industrial applications. A fan is cheaper, but it does not create any suction pressure. On the other hand, a blower is often used by mechanical engineers to discharge polluted air. 

What does a blower motor do?

If you can attach blower motors to fans, then they will convert the fans into HVAC systems. This will lead the air into the rooms after the air leaves the systems. The blower motor is responsible for controlling the temperature that is set on the thermostat in your house. 

Also, blower motors are present inside air conditioning systems. These have rotating fan wheels, which remove warm air from inside the room. Go through our other article on how to test ac blower fan motor to know more on blower motors. 

air turbine fan for ventilation and air conditioning isolated on white background. How Does A Blower Fan Work Final Words.

How Does A Blower Fan Work Final Words

You will find centrifugal fans in most blowers, and they are quite powerful. They are often attached to a belt which means you can operate at higher and lower speeds. Plus, you can then get higher efficiency for lower operations. 

On the other hand, for fans that are typically driven by motors, you can get higher power at greater strain. These fans are highly efficient and are made with top-quality materials. Also, the impellers rotate faster, which leads to higher pressures. 

This can move air at high speeds, making it very important for industries and commercial hubs for high-pressure applications. 

And almost all blowers have centrifugal fans that are optimized depending on the specific usage. A centrifugal blower fan can be used for drying, getting fresh air, cooling, inflating, etc.

Just make sure you choose the right option for the job at hand. 

Imagine having guests over for a special occasion, and you have no time to buy new furniture. In such a situation, you should use the best paint for furniture to restore its original look. 

Buying new furniture can be a costly ordeal altogether, and modern furniture is fragile compared to old and antique furniture. But nowadays, you can use different types of paints to restore the look of your old furniture without paying a high cost. 

Do keep in mind, though, that there are a few factors you need to consider while painting wood furniture. For instance, you need to choose the right painting technique since the adhesion of the paint may differ based on the texture of the surface. 

Similarly, you need to have all the necessary painting supplies so that you don’t encounter any hurdles while painting. Hence, we have compiled this article to help you find the right solution for your antique furniture. 

So, let’s dive in. 

Best Paint For Antique Furniture

Best Paint For Antique Furniture

When it comes to painting wooden furniture, you need to ensure that you use paint that is formulated for wooden surfaces. Using the wrong paint can have an adverse effect on the wooden surface, which might cost you a lot of money to fix. On that note, here are a few things that can happen if you use the wrong paint on wooden furniture: 

  • Can cause paint dents
  • Fades away quickly
  • Doesn’t leave a smooth finish
  • Paint doesn’t cure properly
  • Paint starts to chip and peel off eventually

That said, we recommend using the best paint formulated for wooden surfaces. One prime example is Emerald Trim Enamel which is one of the best paints for painting antique furniture with hard surfaces. Besides this, you can use Vintage Revivals to achieve a more vintage look for your antique furniture. 

However, Emerald Trim Enamel doesn’t require a top finish coat as long as you sand the surface. In some instances, we do recommend priming the raw wood surface to achieve a smooth and clean finish. Therefore, by applying the right paint, you can achieve the following effect: 

  • Provides a durable and hard finish
  • Furniture doesn’t have a dent finish
  • Smooth finish
  • Paint doesn’t chip off easily
  • You can wipe the surfaces without difficulty

Painting Techniques

After you have chosen the right paint for your wooden furniture, the next step would be to choose the appropriate painting technique for the furniture. Most professionals prefer to use three types of painting techniques. Each of these techniques comes with its own advantages and disadvantages; therefore, you need to choose wisely when comparing the different paint techniques for furniture

Notably, spray paint, brushing paint, and rolling are the three techniques you must use to achieve the best results. However, we have decided to only talk about brushing and rolling techniques since they are easy to apply and extremely reliable. 

1. Paint Brush Technique

In this technique, you will be required to invest in a good brush since quality plays a critical role in achieving a perfect finish. 

Using a cheap brush for $2 will not only waste your money, but it will also waste your time since it won't get the job done. Instead, we recommend using a high-quality paintbrush, albeit a bit pricey, since it will provide a smooth, refined finish to your furniture. 

The only drawback of this technique is that it takes a longer time to complete the paint job since it covers less surface area of the solid wood each time you apply a fresh coat. 

2. Rolling Technique

Rollers are the most effective way of applying paint on wooden furniture since it covers a wide surface area without any difficulty. Moreover, different rollers will leave a different texture on the wooden surface.

For instance, lint-free rollers have a lower nap which enables them to provide a smooth finish while applying the furniture paint. 

Painting Supplies

We have now discussed the different types of paint and techniques used for painting antique wood furniture. That said, your next step should be to buy all the necessary painting supplies from the local thrift store. In addition, we highly recommend using good-quality painting supplies since they prolong the durability of your furniture piece. 

Here is a list of essentials you must keep in hand while making the necessary preparation for painting furniture:

  • 220 Grit sanding sponge
  • Paint can opener
  • Painter’s tape
  • Paint stirrers
  • Paintbrush
  • Paint roller
  • Drop cloth
  • Roller tray inserts
  • Paint triangles

Five Easy Steps To Paint Wood Furniture

Portrait of Caucasian woman painting old shabby cupboard with lovely carved ornaments in bright red with brush. Reuse of old. Workshop for old antique furniture restoration at home. Eco-friendly. Easy Steps To Paint Wood Furniture.

In this section, we will discuss five easy steps that will help you achieve the best results while painting antiques. Moreover, most of these steps are easy to follow since they don’t require any prior knowledge or experience. Just follow the steps carefully, and you should be good to go. So, let’s begin!

Step 1: Preparation: Cleaning, Sanding, Stripping, Disassembly, Taping, and Testing

The first step in painting furniture is to ensure that the wooden surface has been prepared properly before you apply the different coats of paint. If you don’t prep the surface properly, the paint will not stick to the surface, and this can cause the paint to peel off easily. When it comes to furniture prep, there are six important areas you must cover, such as cleaning, sanding, stripping, disassembling, taping, and testing. 

A. Cleaning

Before sanding or painting the wooden furniture, you must clean the surface thoroughly since dust and other forms of contamination can interfere with the adhesion of the paint. On that note, you can use a strong cleaning agent such as TSP or a powder cleaner to remove any grime on the surface. 

In addition, you must wear gloves while using such cleaners since the harmful chemical can cause severe skin damage if you are not careful. If you have sanded the surface, we recommend using a tack cloth or a microfiber cloth to gather the dust and remove them. 

B. Sanding

Moving on, your next step should be to sand down the raw wood, especially if old pieces of furniture have imperfections, such as scratches and roughness on the surface. In fact, sanding is one of the most effective ways of restoring the top layer of the furniture and giving it a natural look and even finish. 

Sanders usually comes in different textures, so you must choose wisely while picking the right one. If you prefer a smooth and even finish, we recommend using a light sander to provide a good gripping surface for the paint. 

Nevertheless, you must not sand a wooden surface if it has old paint on the surface. You must remove the paint first using a chemical cleaner and then sand the surface. This will ensure that you don’t encounter any severe health issues caused by the old paint fumes. 

C. Stripping

In certain cases, sanding may not be the best option, especially if you are working with exotic woods or antique pieces since they have a lot of details. Under this situation, we suggest using a stripper to eliminate any uneven surfaces or textures from the wooden surface. 

However, a stripper is not ideal for tough corners and grooves on antique pieces since it can easily get stuck. This complicates the whole prepping process; therefore, we recommend using this as a last resort if you don’t have any other options. 

D. Disassembly

Nowadays, most furniture is designed in a way where you can disassemble them easily. This makes it easy to focus on each piece of furniture so that you can have a uniform and even finish. So, if your furniture can be disassembled, we recommend removing the doors, hardware, and back so that it makes the painting process an easy experience altogether. 

Similarly, if you are working on a china cabinet, we suggest removing the drawers before applying the different coats of paint. On the other hand, new furniture already comes disassembled, so you don’t require any disassembling as long as you remember to piece them together after painting. 

E. Taping

After you have cleaned and sanded the wooden furniture, it is time to apply the painter’s tape on the edges of the furniture piece. You can also use a credit card to smoothen the tape while applying it to the edges of the furniture. This will ensure that the paint doesn’t seep away or leak. 

F. Testing

Before we move on to the main painting process, you must test the paint and see if it adheres well to the primer. You can apply a small amount of primer to a surface and let it dry before testing the adhesion of the paint. If the paint sticks well to the primer, you can repeat the step for the whole furniture. 

Step 2: Cutting In

The next step in the DIY painting process is to cut in any mold or trim on the wooden surface. This ensures that the wooden furniture has no hard paint lines or unwanted textures. Begin the process by gently cutting in the corners of the furniture piece using a brush to paint the edges. 

In certain situations, you might not need to cut in since the piece has no mold growing on the surface. However, you must feather the furniture by painting at the edge of the piece. 

Step 3: Rolling the First Coat Of Paint

From now onwards, things will get interesting since you will actually get to work with the paint. For starters, roll the roller and let it absorb some paint so you can apply it to the wooden surface; however, you should ensure not to absorb too much paint. 

One of the best ways to determine if the roller has absorbed too much paint is by observing the texture of the roller. If you can’t see any texture, then it is a clear indication that the roller has absorbed too much paint. A roller with the right quantity of paint would look full but not saturated, so you must keep this in mind. 

From here on, you can start painting the piece by rolling the roller with even pressure on the surface. In addition, you should ensure that you follow one uniform direction while applying the first coat of paint. After you have applied the first coat of paint, leave the piece alone and let it dry. Fiddling and touching the piece while drying can cause various imperfections to emerge on the surface. 

Step 4: Touch Up - Texture Or Sanding Drips

After the first coat of paint has completely dried up, you might notice a few mistakes or imperfections that might need a minor adjustment or a touch-up. For instance, you can use a 220-grit sanding sponge to eliminate any uneven surfaces formed by the first layer of paint. It is extremely effective in removing texture issues, drips, and hair from the surface. 

Besides this, you can wipe away the dust using a damp microfiber rag. 

Step 5: Roll The Second Coat Of Paint And Do Some Final Touch-Up

Once again, you can repeat the process mentioned in step 2 by applying a second coat of furniture paint. This will serve as the final layer of the furniture, and it will restore the original finish of your piece. However, you will need to let it dry before making final adjustments to the painting. 

The final touch-up shouldn’t be excessive since it can ruin the adhesion of the paint and cause it to chip off easily. Therefore, you should only make the touch-up if you notice any form of imperfections while applying the second coat. 

Woman spackling and leveling antique chair surface getting piece of furniture ready for further coloring in home workshop for renovation. Reuse of old things. Sustainable actions for future. Paint For Antique Furniture Frequently Asked Questions.

Paint For Antique Furniture Frequently Asked Questions ?

What Happens If You Don’t Sand A Wood Furniture Before Applying Paint?

Generally, it is recommended to sand the wooden surface before applying the paint since you might not achieve a smooth finish from the fresh coat of paint. Scrapes and scratches can easily interfere with the adhesion of the paint, which causes it to leave an uneven finish. 

Furthermore, if you apply paint to a wooden surface without sanding it, the paint will not stick well, and this will cause it to peel off easily. 

What Is The Best Finish For Wood Furniture?

Finishes determine how durable and aesthetically pleasing your furniture will look. On that note, milk paint is one of the best paints since it acts as a self-sealer. Once fully cured, it will make the wooden surface extremely durable in water and intense weather conditions. 

Besides this, matt chalk paint will give the wood furniture a slightly cloudy finish, while gloss chalk paint provides a high-end sheen. 

Do You Need To Prime A Wooden Furniture Before Applying Paint?

Normally, you wouldn’t require a separate primer for wooden furniture since most paints come with a primer added to the main formula. For instance, mineral and chalk paint already have primer integrated into the main formula. This enables them to give the wooden furniture a flawless finish. 

However, some furniture paints require a primer before applying a fresh coat. Therefore, we recommend checking the tin of the paint before starting any new project. 

How To Avoid Streaks While Painting A Wooden Furniture?

Two of the best ways to avoid streaks while painting are paint finish and direction. For instance, you should paint along the direction of the grain while using milk paint. In addition, milk paint dries really quickly, but a light sanding will help the coat to achieve a rich and smooth finish.

On the other hand, if you plan to work with mineral or chalk paint, we recommend painting in different directions since it helps to avoid brush marks.  

Is It Important To Paint The Interior Of Wooden Furniture?

It totally depends on the person if he/she wants to paint the interior of the wooden furniture. Simply cleaning and applying wax will be sufficient to clean the interior. But in some cases, you might be required to paint the interior of the furniture if it starts to smell. 

Caucasian woman with smile on face painting wooden ornamented cupboard in red with large paint brush with doors in background. Reuse of old antique things. Home furniture renovation workroom. Paint For Antique Furniture Final Words .

Paint For Antique Furniture Final Words

With that, we have come to the end of our extensive guide on how to paint wooden furniture and the different techniques used for painting antiques.  Before signing off, we would like to share a few tips that will help you achieve a better look for your antique furniture. 

Firstly, you should always prep the antique wood furniture before applying any paint to the surface. For example, smoothing the surface with sandpaper will help the paint to adhere properly to the wooden surface. 

Secondly, if you are planning to use oil-based paint on a wooden surface, we highly recommend getting the surface primed with a primer since oil can spoil the wooden surface. Moreover, it can cause the wooden surface to rot and leave a foul smell. 

That said, we shall sign off. Until next time! 

While working with clay for sculpting is fun, it can be truly disappointing to find your unused clay all dried up. 

Now you need to remember that air-dry clay and water-based clay will easily dry if you leave them exposed to air for a few days. But you may have bought a lot of clay that cannot be used at once. 

So, we are here to tell you the right way to store clay so it stays moist. You will need very basic materials for the job, which will be mentioned below. Just read through this guide carefully, and you’ll be able to store your clay for a long time in the right manner. 

Let’s get started. 

How To Keep Clay Moist

How To Keep Clay Moist 

This section is divided into two parts, the first talks about keeping clay that you have partly molded moist so that it can be worked with later. And the second part talks about how to store clay blocks. 

The materials needed for this job include

  • Small container
  • Water
  • Sponge
  • Paper towels 
  • Sealable plastic bag
  • Lidded bin 

Storing Clay That You Are Working With

1. Keep A Sponge And A Water Spray Bottle

First of all, take a small bowl of water and keep a sponge near you. The water will keep the clay moist as you work with it or store it. 

2. Occasionally Wet The Clay

If you are working with clay, then ensure that you make it moist occasionally. To do that, take the sponge and put it in the water bowl. Then wring out the excess water and gently pat the clay from all sides. Do not use excess water, which may lead to very wet clay. 

You can alternatively use a spray bottle to spray on the clay from all sides. Also, if you wish to store clay that you are molding for a few days, it is essential to spray water once in a while to prevent it from drying. 

3. Wrapping The Clay

Also, when you are not using the clay, you can wrap it in a damp paper towel and store it. Just moisten some paper lightly and ensure that they do not tear. Then use them to wrap the clay piece well. 

You can also follow this process and wrap clay in a wet towel if you are to store clay for some time. This can be while working on other parts of your sculpture. 

4. Storing in a Plastic Container

After you have wrapped the clay in a damp cloth, it needs to be stored in plastic bags. You can use sealable plastic bags or ziplock bags, for that matter. Ensure that the paper is not very wet before putting the clay inside the plastic bag. 

Also, if you are using a ziplock bag, take the air out by gently pressing the sides. Then place the wrapped clay inside and seal it immediately. 

The moisture is then trapped inside the paper towel, and the bag and the clay will remain moist for longer. Also, it will remain moldable until the next time that you find it. 

You can also use plastic cling wrap as an alternative if you do not find a ziplock bag. 

5. Keep In A Cool, Dark Place

The bag needs to be kept away from any sources of light. You can keep it in a cool place, like a dark storage cabinet. Just remember never to store clay pieces inside the freezer. The freezing temperatures can dry clay and remove and freeze all the water in it, which can lead to fracturing or flaking of the clay. 

Similarly, never leave the clay in direct sunlight, as that is detrimental to the clay. It can remove all the moisture content, and the high temperature can lead the clay to crack and dry out completely. 

Now, if you are wondering where to store clay other than a cabinet, the cellars or the basement are good places. They generally have a lower temperature, and the water content of the clay can be preserved. 

However, if you plan to work with clay a lot, keep it inside a clay storage cabinet. These are special pieces of furniture that are made to keep ceramic and art supplies along with the clay. 

Storing Blocks Of Clay

1. Spritz With Water

If you have a block of clay, then spritz some water on it. Ensure that the water is clean and cool before spraying. 

2. Seal The Clay

You will have to take a plastic bag that is bigger than the block of clay. Then place it flat on a surface with the opening facing towards you. Keep the block of clay near this opening, and then roll the clay in the plastic packet. You will need to roll it in the opposite direction from you like a burrito. 

Then you can tuck both the corners towards the bottom and seal the packet. For this job, any kind of plastic can be used, including garbage bags, trash plastics, and yard waste bags. 

3. Place The Clay In A Lidded Container

You can take any lidded container and keep the clay wrapped in plastic. After you keep it inside, the lid should be tightly placed on top. We recommend cutting a large amount of clay into small pieces so that you can only take out the amount needed. 

This will protect the rest of the clay from being exposed to outside conditions. 

4. Store In A Cool, Dark Place

You will have to keep the clay in a dark and cool place away from extreme weather conditions. Heat and extreme cold can be detrimental, and the cellar, basement, and storage cabinets act as the best storage places. 

How To Revive Dried Stored Clay

If you have left clay in the open for a long time, then it can dry up completely, but there is a way to revive it. You can take some water and soak a paper towel in it. 

Then wrap the clay with this towel and store it in a cool and dry place for the next few days. Also, for storing large amounts of clay, you can cut the clay into small bits using a wire cutter. Then wrap them up and store them inside plastic bags, and this should make them moist again. 

Alternatively, you can poke holes in large pieces of dried clay as well. Then pour water into the holes, and that should restore the moisture in the clay block. 

Tips To Remember

1. Storing Air-Dry Clays

If you do not keep air-dry clay and water-based clay moist, then they are susceptible to cracking. That would mean you will have to make the clay moist and start the work all over again. You may also need a new clay block if the previous one is damaged beyond repair. 

2. Modeling Clay And Polymer clay

When considering modeling clay v/s polymer clay, know that modeling clay can be bought if you want to practice sculpting with clay. It is self-hardening and is an air-dry clay that you should not keep exposed outside. It is best to store it in a damp box with plastic wrap, as the process mentioned above. 

Also, you can lightly spritz it with water to help it stay moist and remain in a workable state. However, polymer clay is different as it is made from polyvinyl chloride. This is known to be versatile and can be baked to cure permanently. 

3. Wetting The Clay

When wetting the clay, make sure you do not add too much water, as that can destroy it. Just dampen paper towels or a cloth towel and use it to keep the clay moist. Also, if you are stopping in the middle of clay projects, then store the clay immediately in the same process that we mentioned above. 

How To Store Clay Frequently Asked Questions ?

Can hardened clay be revived and stored?

Yes, you can use a damp piece of napkin to wrap the hardened clay and keep it inside a plastic bag. Leave it for a few days, and then remove this napkin. The clay should have absorbed moisture and softened by then. 

How to store oil-based clay?

There is no need to worry about oil-based clay as it will not dry up with time. You can easily keep it anywhere and mold it as and when needed. Only water-based clays are prone to drying and cannot be exposed to air for long. 

How To Store Clay Final Words 

How To Store Clay Final Words

By now, we hope you have the answer to “how to make modeling clay soft again?” So, you should be able to store all kinds of clay properly. Just remember to keep water-based clay sealed tightly with moisture, and it should be ready for future work sessions. 

Also, we recommend removing the original packaging that the clay comes in to preserve it better. This is because the plastic container/packaging will only keep your clay well until opened. Then you will have to cut it into smaller pieces and store them in containers. 

Now you are ready to be creative and work with clay. If you are just beginning out, know that there are multiple tutorials that you can check out on YouTube. 

Also, if you liked going through this article, watch this space for more informative guides. 

You can also checkout our exclusive article on removing paints from concrete to get an idea on painting on concrete surfaces.

Until next time, bye! 

There are several reasons that can cause the blower fan of your air conditioning unit to malfunction. These can include a lack of electrical power, damaged components, worn-out parts, or even the accumulation of dirt and dust. 

A blower fan is among the most vital components of any air conditioning system. 

It is responsible for ensuring proper air circulation and helps the system function at optimal levels. However, like any other part, it can break down and cause problems. In such situations, the first step to resolving the problem is to find out why the fan has stopped working. 

And this guide will help you do just that. So, let’s begin! 

Reasons Why Your Fan Blower Is Not Working

Large round powerful industrial professional metal iron fan with louvres at garden. Reasons Why Your Fan Blower Is Not Working.

Here are some of the most common reasons that can stop your blower fan from working:

1. Lack Of Power

Your blower fan might not be working due to lack of power to the air conditioning unit. To fix this, check that the circuit breaker or power switch is turned on. The circuit breaker may be located on the main panel, the unit itself, or a nearby wall. 

In case the switch is turned on, check for a blown fuse or a disconnected or loose wire. Alternatively, an electrical connector might have become corroded and may be responsible for the issue.

2. Blocked Air Filter

If you cannot feel any warm air coming out of the air conditioning unit, its filter may have become clogged with dust. A dirty air filter can prevent the blower fan from functioning effectively and in such cases, it is important to clean the filter of the unit to solve the issue. 

3. Frozen Evaporator Coils

A frozen evaporator coil or refrigerant lines may be another reason your blower fan is not working. To check this, turn the unit on, switch to the air conditioning mode, and look for ice near the indoor unit, which may be blocking the passage of air. Until the ice melts, air will not be able to pass through the coils, so you should turn off the air conditioning immediately.

4. Flooded Overflow Pan  

Your HVAC system may have a sensor switch that can detect water in the drain tray. When that happens, the air handler will prevent the heat pumps or the air conditioning from starting to prevent leaks into the ceiling or the building insulation.  

5. Worn Out Or Loose Fan Belt

In the case of a belt-driven blower motor, the belt may be damaged or may have gotten loose. This will result in the fan motor running, but the fan will not work. Fortunately, a loose belt can be tightened using the screws located on the sides of the motor. On the other hand, if the belt is worn out, it will need to be replaced.   

6. Bad Relay

In an AC system using a control board or relay, it is the relay that powers the blower fan. And a faulty relay or a bad control board can also stop the fan from working. While a faulty relay can be replaced using DIY methods, getting a professional to do that is recommended for the best results.  

7. Malfunctioning Pulley

A malfunctioning pulley may be another reason why your blower fan is not working. This generally happens in the case of a belt-driven assembly. In such cases, the blower motor will be operational, but the fan will not function. 

8. Faulty Capacitor

The capacitor is that part of any appliance responsible for storing electrical power and supplying it to the circuit board when the appliance is switched on. In case of a bad capacitor, or one that has shorted out or become weak, it will not be able to supply enough energy for the fan motor to run. 

9. Bad Fan Motor

As with other parts, the fan motor can go bad over a period of time, or its bearings may seize up. In either case, the result will be a non-working blower fan. Depending on the cause and level of damage, the fan motor will need to be repaired or replaced completely. 

10. Damaged Bearings Or Blower Assembly Shaft

If the bearings of the assembly shaft have seized up, it can cause the fan motor to draw a large amount of power. But due to the stuck bearings, the fan blades will not turn. It is easy to detect damaged bearings because the HVAC system will start making squeaking noises in such cases.  

11. Malfunctioning Fan Limit Control Switch

In a furnace heating system, the fan limit switch controls the on and off functions of the furnace blower assembly. In other words, it is the part that determines when hot air is required. If the switch starts malfunctioning, the blower fan may not turn on. 

12. Overheating Motor

If the heat pump system is able to turn on but cannot function properly, it may indicate that the blower motor cannot distribute hot air effectively due to overheating. The most common reason for a motor overheating is dust accumulation, so check the filters and clean them properly. Again, this will prevent the fan from working properly. 

Blower Fan Not Working Frequently Asked Questions ? 

How Does An HVAC Fan Work?

The furnace blower motor is responsible for sending warm air from the air conditioner, heat pump, or heat furnace to your home. The system heats or cools the air as needed, and the blower motor sends it through the duct system and out from the vents. 

What Are The Different Types Of Blower Fans In HVAC Systems?

Blower fans can be differentiated into two categories, depending on their motors. The first kind is single-speed motor fans, which, as the name indicates, operate at a single speed. And the other type of blower fans are variable speed ones, with high-velocity motors that can adjust their speed to produce different airflow levels. 

What Can Cause Your Fan To Blow Hot Air?

Why is my fan blowing hot air?” is a common question among people who rely on fans more than HVAC systems. Unlike air conditioning systems, a fan does not cool the air but simply circulates it, promoting better sweat evaporation. However, you may feel it is blowing hot air if there is no proper ventilation or the heat is too extreme for sweat to evaporate quickly. 

How To Know That Your Blower Motor Is Failing?

Certain signs indicate that your blower motor is failing and can help you fix the problem well in time. The first of these is low airflow from the vents, which can mean that the motor has started to wear out or may already be broken. 

Another sign that may indicate a problem is when the fan operates only at specific speeds. Generally, in the case of variable speed fans, the speed can be controlled by the user. But if you are unable to change the fan speed, there may be a problem with the motor. 

Finally, no air may be coming out from the vents when the unit is turned on, which may indicate that the blower motor has short-circuited or failed completely. Usually, in such cases, the blower motor cannot be repaired and requires a replacement. 

What Are The Best Fans For Cold Air? 

If you’re wondering what fan blows the coldest air, there are lots of options on the market. However, it ultimately comes down to personal preferences, though certain factors can help select the right option. For instance, it is better to go with a blower fan with variable speeds than a single-speed one. 

These generally offer greater customizability and are more powerful than single-speed ones. 

air turbine fan for ventilation and air conditioning isolated on white background. Blower Fan Not Working Final Thoughts.

Blower Fan Not Working Final Thoughts

Proper care and maintenance are necessary to ensure that your blower fan performs well for a long period. However, even with that, situations can arise when it might need repairs or replacements. 

And when it comes to that, it is best to rely on professional repair services rather than performing the repairs yourself. This is because they have the required tools and experience required to perform such repairs, ensuring that they are performed efficiently. 

On that note, it is time for us to conclude this guide. Until next time! 

Landed here while browsing a list of the best concrete paints online? 

Then do stay with us for a few minutes, as we’ll be sharing something that's vital for your next paint job. Choosing the paint is undoubtedly a key factor, but there’s much more to consider. 

Have you thought of the primer you’ll need apart from the paint? You might not be sure if you'll need one at all — many homeowners face the same dilemma when painting concrete. 

Indeed, it’s tricky to understand the role of a primer in the job. That’s why we’ve penned this guide to take you through all the essentials. Read on!

Do I Need To Prime Exterior Concrete Before Painting

Do I Need To Prime Exterior Concrete Before Painting

To get a clear answer to this question, you’ll need to look at several key aspects. So, let’s start. 

The Concerns Of Painting Concrete Directly

You may, of course, choose to apply paint straightaway on a concrete surface — but know that it isn’t sure to stick on. Industry experts suggest using a good-quality primer beforehand to get a long-lasting coat of paint that won’t crack or peel. 

But what if you don’t use a primer? 

Concrete often gives rise to a phenomenon called efflorescence — crystalline salt deposits are formed when this material comes in contact with water or moisture. And these deposits can make it difficult for the paint to adhere to the surface, even causing decay or chipping of the paint in many cases. 

How does that happen? The pores in concrete allow water to either seep in from outside or up from the ground. And even smoothly troweled concrete has tiny pores which might let moisture pass through. This causes residue and minerals to form within the concrete, eventually producing white powdery salts on its exterior. 

How Does Priming Help Exterior Concrete?

Simply put, a primer provides the paint with a surface to stick to and uniform color to paint on. This makes the paint more long-lasting, enhances the look of the concrete surface, and makes it resistant to chipping. 

Primer works by filling in the holes where salt deposits or dirt have settled and then soaking into the concrete, preventing mold and mildew growth due to moisture. Furthermore, it can soak into cement to protect it from long-term damage and can smoothen an uneven surface so that it easily accepts paint. 

Preparing Concrete Before Priming And Painting

The first step in the priming or painting process is to clean the concrete properly. That’s because small pores may hold oil, debris, and dirt in large amounts, making the surface difficult for primer and paint to adhere to. 

Not cleaning the concrete would mean letting the primer lock in all that dirt and oil. And over time, the oil may begin to degrade the primer and paint from within, so make sure you clean the surface really well before priming. 

You can employ a variety of methods to ready concrete for painting. Here, we’ll discuss the simplest method, for which you’ll need:

Now, you’ll need to follow these steps:

Step 1

Begin by removing all traces of previously applied paint from the surface using a paint scraper. You’ll also need a pressure washer if you’re working outdoors or a wire brush in case it’s an indoor project. 

Step 2

Next, use a cleaner such as trisodium phosphate to effectively remove stains and dirt. You may also go for more eco-friendly products like those from Krud Kutter.  

Step 3

Before you start priming the surface, make sure to apply a sealer. That’s because concrete is really porous and needs proper sealing to ensure it’s able to accept the primer effectively. Do note that this is essential for an indoor job; otherwise, it can cause moisture to seep into the concrete. 

Step 4

At this point, the surface will be ready for priming. We know the job is a long-winded one, but the results are worth the effort! 

The Need For Repair

In case the concrete surface has a lot of rough spots, you’ll need to repair it before painting or priming. 

Smooth off the portion that’s bumpy or rough using an angle grinder. Then use the grinder and a blade to smooth out the rough spots. Remember that a smoother surface will hold the primer and paint better, and the job will also be more cost-effective. So, make sure to smoothen the surface as much as you can. 

Apart from smoothing, grinding, and cleaning, you should also check for crevices or cracks and repair them beforehand. Examine the brittle areas too, and proceed to remove them and fill in the affected portion. You wouldn’t want a freshly painted surface to start breaking soon. 

Types Of Concrete Primers

Primers used for concrete are of several types, and you can prepare them in three ways — using oil/alkyd, tinted/shellac, and acrylic/latex bases. Also, these primers can be formulated for both interior and exterior applications. 

Do note that homeowners on a tight budget can go for a universal primer formulated for any surface. However, if you want the paint job to be most effective, we’d suggest buying primers meant for concrete only. You may have to shell out more, but the outcome will be much better.

Now, let’s take a closer look at the various types of concrete primers you’ll find on the market:

1. Acrylic Masonry Primers

These primers are specially designed to shield concrete against discoloration, lime burns, and efflorescence. You can use them on unpainted, properly cured, or new concrete, both for outdoor or indoor applications.

2. Acrylic/ Latex Primers

The porous nature of concrete makes a water-based acrylic primer more likely to soak into concrete than an oil-based primer. This results in a stronger bond, allowing the concrete paint to grip the surface better and reducing the chances of flaking and chipping in the future. Plus, these primers can seal interior concrete to prevent dust buildup. 

3. Acrylic Block-Fillers

If you’re dealing with cinder blocks, know that these primers are specially manufactured for unpainted or new, split-face, or smooth concrete blocks. Remember that these are meant for bare blocks, so you’ll need something else if the blocks have a cement parge coat. 

On a side note, a parge coat is a thin polymeric or cementitious mortar applied for refining a masonry or concrete surface. 

4. Polyurethane/Epoxy Primers

The specialized type of acrylic/latex primer is not only heavy-duty and incredibly strong but can also resist a harsh, chemical work environment in an industrial work area. However, these aren’t used much in residential paint jobs. 

Essential Tips To Follow

Engineer man in yellow uniform and helmet holding a trim roller for wall painting and showing positive hand sign. High quality photo. Essential Tips To Follow.

The following tips can be of great help if you haven’t primed or painted a concrete surface before:

1. Use A Good-Quality Paint

It’s best to go for a paint that’s truly worth the trust, so make sure to read through the reviews of the products you’re considering. Paints suitable for masonry products are usually thicker and can expand or contract with concrete in the future. 

For instance, a non-slip paint makes concrete surfaces less prone to accidental falls while also steering clear of rough spots through the smooth coating it provides. It will also be a great option if you’re looking for ideas for painting concrete porch

On a side note, avoid general-purpose paint as it’s prone to cracking when used on concrete. 

2. Get The Right Coverage 

The part of the concrete surface that’s not protected by primer will render the paint loose and prone to weather damage. So, once you’re done applying the coat, check whether you’re left to cover any portion. 

3. Use The Right Tools

Coat the primer or paint on larger areas using a paint roller, but utilize a brush to get into the small pores and cracks where rollers can’t reach. This will ensure you get a perfect primer or paint coat for every concrete surface. 

Need To Prime Exterior Concrete Before Painting Frequently Asked Questions ?

Is painting a concrete surface better than staining it? 

You can’t label painting concrete as a better practice than staining — it will partially depend on your preferred visual effect. While painting concrete floors or walls will impart a solid hue, staining is a more subtle coating process. 

That’s why painting concrete will yield a striking effect and mask imperfections, but staining will make the surface appear relatively translucent. Also, the latter is generally preferred for a long-lasting effect as it soaks into porous concrete better.

How long does a painted concrete surface last? 

A paint coat on concrete generally lasts up to five years before you need another one. Do note that this is when the surface is primed, prepped, and painted properly. In case it hasn’t, chances are that you’ll see it flaking soon. 

Can you paint concrete without etching?

Know that etching is a vital step in getting a concrete surface ready for painting. You can paint over peeling paint on concrete but, without following necessary steps the result may vary. It strengthens the bond between the paint and the surface, ensuring the paint sticks for a longer time. 

So, it’s best not to skip this step if you need a long-lasting concrete floor. Just be careful about the etching agent you’re using — avoid more vigorous ones such as hydrochloric acid. Instead, you can choose a more eco-friendly version from a brand like Rust-Oleum. 

Is There a Spray Paint For Concrete?

Yes, you’ll find several spray paints meant for concrete. But we’d suggest opting for an acrylic latex paint rated for exterior paint jobs. It will soak into the pores most effectively, resulting in a strong bond. And once you’re done applying an initial coat, you may choose to spray extra layers for accenting or coloring. 

What type of primer do you need for a high-footfall surface, such as a concrete basketball court? 

Specialized concrete surfaces like basketball courts require a specific type, such as a clear concrete primer. That’s why you should be just as careful while fetching the right type of primer as when you’re choosing the best paint for an outdoor concrete basketball court

Does a concrete garage floor require priming? 

Yes, priming a garage floor is also a must, or else the paint won’t adhere well to the concrete surface. 

Garage floors should withstand heavy-duty impact to some extent, so the primer will have to be tough. You may choose an epoxy primer for its robustness, but if the surface has grease and oil stains, a PU primer will be the ideal choice. 

Need To Prime Exterior Concrete Before Painting Final Words

Need To Prime Exterior Concrete Before Painting Final Words

All set to start your overdue paint job? 

With a high-quality concrete primer by your side, rest assured you’ll get the best results. We’d again remind you to take the utmost care while cleaning the surface. And after you’re done with the job, let the primer dry for a few hours before using the concrete surface for other purposes. 

Here’s another piece of advice before we sign off. Don’t hesitate if you feel the concrete needs intensive repair — reach out to a reliable contractor to get the job done. They can even complete the paint job if you’re not confident about going the DIY way. 

Applying primer on concrete prior of painting is an essential process, concrete is not bathroom tiles which are paintable without applying primers. Checkout our this exclusive article on paint for bathroom tiles to know more on the topic, and enhance your DIY knowledge.

To become a pro at pottery making, you will need the right tools and the best clay for sculpting

It is true that many clay artists simply use their thumbs and fingers to make excellent pottery. However, to add more details and bring nuances to clay modeling, it is best that you find the right tool set. Such tool sets have all the right pieces of equipment needed for the job. 

That said, there is no perfect way to select a tool set. It all depends on your requirements and, most importantly, on your level of expertise. For example, when buying clay sculpting tools for your kids, it is best to go for a plastic option. The scale of your clay sculpting project will also dictate the kind of tools you need. 

And in today’s guide, we will take you through all that you need to look for when selecting tools for clay sculpting. We have also attached a few top options that you can try. 

So, let's begin!

Things To Remember When Buying Clay Sculpting Tools

the hands of a clay potter carve a pattern on the bowl. Side view. Ceramics and clay for creativity in the workshop. carving tool, close-up. Things To Remember When Buying Clay Sculpting Tools.

Before we dive into looking at the best clay sculpting tools, it is important to know about a few factors that will help you make the best choice. And, in this section, we are going to take a look at some of those factors.

1. Types Of Sculpting Tools Set

The type of clay sculpting tool that is suitable for you depends on the kind of expertise you have. If you are just starting out, it is best to start small and introduce simple clay tools to your inventory. You might be wondering why we are suggesting this!

Well, if you start without any prior experience, there’s a good chance that you will feel overwhelmed handling a massive set of modeling tools. So, we recommend that you get acquainted with the clay sculpting process and pottery tools before investing in a big set that has all the tools. 

However, if you already have some experience and are trying to expand your pottery skills, simply opt for a comprehensive set. Just remember to always check that the quality is good and you are getting the product at a fair price. 

2. Double-Sided And Single-Sided Tools

If you are planning to get a bang for your buck, investing in double-sided tools is a great idea. This simply means that you can enjoy double the application with just half the sculpting tools. 

To make the most of them, you simply have to switch ends. And, voila! You can now use different-sized cutters and loops for mark-making. Most sculptors really appreciate these tools because of their multi-purpose use. 

A word of caution, these tools are not the best choice for beginners. If you are new to sculpting, you might find it a bit challenging to understand how exactly these tools function. 

In most of the comprehensive sculpting tool sets, you will find a mixture of both single-sided and double-sided tools. Once you get accustomed with the single-sided ones, you can move on to using the other variant. 

3. Material

You will find the best tools in a number of materials. The most popular ones are wooden clay  tools and metal ones that come with wooden handles. These variants are widely loved because of the strength of metal metal and wire shape. You will surely like the feel of wood in your hands while sculpting. 

Nonetheless, when sculpting clay, you can choose other options like rubber and silicone if you are looking for a different effect. Select a set in accordance with your preference for the tool material. That said, when you buy a comprehensive set, you will find tools made of different materials.  

In case you are buying a set for kids, we recommend that you select one that comes with plastic tools. These are great for beginners and kids, as there is no chance anyone would get hurt. Plastic tools, however, come with their fair share of disadvantages too, and we recommend that you research well before you make a purchase. 

4. Added Features

To make the most out of polymer clay or other types of clay for that matter, it is best to choose tools that come with additional exciting features. For creative projects to go smoothly, it is not only essential that you use advanced tools, but you also need to explore the best storage solutions. 

While some people prefer storing the tools in a box, there are others who prefer to wrap them neatly in a leather cover. Moreover, you will need a long-lasting clay sponge that will help clean dried pieces and smoothen wet clay. Check if the collection that you are purchasing comes with sponges. If it doesn’t, you’ll have to buy it separately. 

We have noticed that many sculptors prefer to use an apron to protect themselves from getting mud all over themselves. When investing in a sculpting tool set, you can check if it comes with an apron or not. 

Can Best Clay Sculpting Tools Improve Your Work?

Many clay artists prefer sticking with the tactile experience they enjoy when using just their fingers for sculpting work. However, we have noticed that when you embark on creating more complex models, using just your fingers might not be the best solution. 

This is where tools can significantly enhance the quality of your work. With the right set of tools, creating marks and patterns on clay will become pretty convenient. These tools will make it easy for you to create complex designs by experimenting with different engraving styles. 

Mostly in comprehensive tool sets, you will find ribbon tools, loop tools, and knives, which will help create any patterns and cuts that you desire. If you have a bit of prior experience, you can even use these tools while working on a pottery wheel. 

While these are specialized tools, you cannot devalue the importance of some basic ones when engaging in clay sculpting. For example, the right sponge will enable you to apply water to clay, ensuring that it does not get too wet. 

Also, we cannot emphasize the importance of a good brush. It will enable you to apply glaze and slip, which are much needed for hand-decorated works. To sum it up, always check the full listing of tools before investing in a set, as they will directly determine the quality of your work. 

The Best Clay Sculpting Tools Of The Year

Artist and artwork in process. Craft tools arranged on ivory textile background. Woman hand with palette knife. The Best Clay Sculpting Tools Of The Year.

1. Rubfac Seroline Polymer Clay Tools

These 24-piece clay sculpting tools can be a perfect addition to your art space if you want to take the craft a notch higher. 

The set consists of five rubber pens, five wooden clay tools, four plastic styluses, four rubber handle styluses, and five wooden handle ball styluses. Not to mention, you will also get a much-needed pottery sponge included in the package. With a bit of maintenance, these tools can help you work on your clay sculpting ideas

2. Meuxan Pottery tool set

If you like to work with a larger number of tools than what was present in our last recommendation, it is best you give this option a try. This Meuxan tool set comes with 30 clay sculpting tools. 

With so many useful tools, you will face no difficulty cutting, carving, modeling, smoothing, and scraping clay. And, most of the tools present in this set are double-sided, which helps you get super creative when you have to sculpt clay. 

3. Sculpt Pro Pottery Tool Kit

For people who are on the lookout for tool sets that are small but multi-functional should give this one a try. It comes with 11 double-sided tools that add a great deal of versatility to your work and expertise. 

However, what makes it stand apart from other sets is the fact that it comes with an aluminum brush that is super helpful for detailing work. To make things easier for the user, the manufacturer has thoughtfully included a plastic covering on top of each tool to prevent them from getting damaged. 

4. Blisstime Clay Sculpting Tools

Often sculptors complain how some tools are uncomfortable to work with and cause hindrance to give life to their clay modeling ideas. Keeping that in mind, Blisstime has introduced this set of 42 clay tools that provide the user with the ultimate comfort. 

The handles of these tools are quite sturdy, thereby preventing them from slipping out of your hands. That said, we noticed that the carving tips of the tools are quite sharp. And, it is best that you use them carefully. 

5. Arteza Sculpting Tools

This multi-functional tool set with 22 clay sculpting tools is quite popular among clay artists for all the right reasons. The tools are made of lightweight wood and stainless steel. This makes all the tools ergonomic, and you won’t experience any hand ache even when you work with them for long hours. 

Moreover, this set gets extra points for exceptional packaging. The tools come in a portable see-through plastic storage tube. 

6. S & E Teacher’s Edition Pottery & Clay Sculpting Tools

We are sure that the “teacher’s edition” tag must have gotten you curious to know more about this product. For people who are on the lookout for multi-purpose clay tools that are easy to use, you must give this item a try. 

The package includes six pieces of sculpting tools, all of which are double-sided. And, the best part is that all the tools come with wooden handles, making them super easy to use. You can use this tool set irrespective of your level of expertise. 

7. Genround Polymer Clay Tools

This polymer clay tool set is the perfect choice for both kids and adults. The versatility of the tools is quite commendable, and you won’t need to purchase any tools separately, as all the essential ones are included in the package. 

Also, you get a multi-purpose sponge that enables you to add a glaze or a glossy finish to clay projects. This sponge can also be used to soak extra water during pottery production. 

8. Cynamed Stainless Steel Sculpting Tools

If you have an affinity for collecting exceptional sculpting tools which will turn some heads, we suggest you try this product. This set of specialized sculpting tools is made of stainless steel and will last for a long time with little to no maintenance.

In the package, you will find specialized double-sided carving tools. These tools are great for carving, scraping, shaping, and cutting. All the tools are six inches long and will easily fit in small storage boxes or bags. 

9. Joypea Pottery And Clay Sculpting Tools

With these 42-piece clay sculpting tools, you can easily experiment with clay patterns and textures. If you are feeling experimental, you can even use these tools during Halloween to make unique patterns on pumpkins. 

Because the tools are of a wide variety of shapes, this set makes for a perfect gift for anyone who wants to play with clay. And, the best part is that you can easily ask for a refund if you are unsatisfied with the results. This company offers a 120-day replacement/refund policy. 

Tools For Clay Sculpting Frequently Asked Questions ?

Is it possible to sharpen my tools?

Unless you are a professional sculptor, sharpening or chiseling your wire end tools can be quite a task. If you are a beginner, it is unlikely that you will have the right means required for the task. 

However, if you are using steel tools, you have the scope to sharpen them. Since steel is made of high carbon and is tempered, you can make use of a bench stone to sharpen the tools. Bench stones are available in various sizes, and you can pick one that best suits your requirements. 

What is the best way to clean sculpting tools?

When sculpting clay, you must focus on cleaning the tools once you are done with the day’s work. And, for this purpose, we suggest you get your hands on a pack of rubbing alcohol. For this to work best, grab a container and fill it with rubbing alcohol. 

Next, you will need to submerge all the tools in this solution. Let them soak in the solution for about 30 seconds for the best results. Now, get your hands on a piece of fresh cloth and wipe the tools to remove excess build-up of clay. If the stains are too stubborn, you can even consider using an old toothbrush to remove them. 

The grime may not disappear right after you do this step. And, we suggest that you repeat these steps a few more times to ensure that the tools are speckless. Remember that rubbing alcohol is not just the best cleaning option for the tools. It can work great even when you are trying to remove pigments from your hands or the apron. 

To be honest, rubbing alcohol comes in handy when you are working with lighter-colored clay and want to avoid staining it. To do that, you can use an alcohol-based hand sanitizer when putting colors on clay models or after you are done working with clay. 

Tools For Clay Sculpting Final Words

Tools For Clay Sculpting Final Words

With that, we have reached the end of this informative guide. We hope you enjoyed reading it as much as we enjoyed compiling all the information for you. 

By now, you must have understood that one can create magic with clay when they have the right tool set in their inventory. If you are a beginner, we advise that you start small and invest in a set with a small number of tools. These sets will help you get accustomed to the sculpting process before you move on to more professional-level clay modeling. 

The right tool set can indeed be a game changer. However, keep in mind that you must clean the tools timely to ensure they stay in the best condition for the longest time. If you liked this guide, do not forget to keep a watch on this space for more such reads. 

Until next time, happy sculpting!

Let’s put it this way—you’ve got the best clay for sculpting, acrylic paints, and every other supply needed for creating an amazing model. 

But, if you don’t bake the model at the right temperature or air-dry it properly, it would be of no use. Hence, the secret to creating a perfect masterpiece lies in the hardening of the sculpted clay. 

From polymer to oil-based, there are different types of clay used by professionals and hobbyists alike. While oil-based clays can be air-dried, polymer and water-based ones are baked at high temperatures in cooking ovens or kilns to solidify them. 

So, if you’re a beginner in the art world who doesn’t know the way around modeling clays, this guide is for you. Today, we’ll walk you through some of the easiest (beginner) sculpting clay techniques to help you pull off the projects in a breeze. 

Keep reading! 

How To Harden Modeling Clay - 2 Easy Ways

How To Harden Modeling Clay

Artists and sculptors prefer easy-to-use and non-toxic modeling clay to create prototypes and models. However, its versatility doesn’t end here, as it is also used by children, art students, potters, and animators for creative purposes. Whether you’re a DIYer who wishes to carve ornaments or an amateur potter, hardening the clay is important to make your artwork durable. 

Now, there are four different types of clay used by artists—ceramic, polymer, paper, and oil-based modeling clay. And the method you opt for depends largely on the clay you use for the project. 

Having said that, we’ve enlisted two quickest and easiest methods to harden clay. So, let’s check them out. 

1. Hardening Modeling Clay By Dipping In Epoxy Resin

If you’re a jewelry maker who sculpts earrings, pendants, and necklaces out of clays, epoxy resin is a must-have in your craft kit. That’s because dipping your creations in epoxy will solidify them and create a waterproof coating that will withstand the test of time. 

All you need to do is mix the epoxy resin as per the instructions on the package and dip small jewelry pieces in for a couple of minutes. Once dried, you can sand the piece to eliminate drips accumulated on the bottom. Not only will it solidify your art pieces, but it will also add shine to them. 

2. Harden Clay Using A Polymer Sealer

Another quick way to harden modeling clay is to use a polymer sealer on your artwork. Simply grab a brush, dip it in the polymer sealer, and coat a thin layer of it all over the sculpture. After it dries, your creation will become durable, and you can use it without the fear of tampering.  

However, make sure you read the instructions on the package before applying it to your sculptures to avoid making mistakes.

Step-By-Step Guide On How To Harden Polymer Clay By Baking

The best way to harden polymer-based modeling clay is by baking it in the oven for a few minutes. Though clays are baked in less than ten minutes, the exact time depends upon the type of clay you are using. 

Step 1: Create A Vent Hole

You will first have to create a vent hole on your models before tossing them in the oven. Usually, it is created on closed-off air pocket models to prevent the clay from cracking due to temperature variations. So, grab a needle and pierce the model till you reach the inner air pocket. 

Step 2: Read The Instruction Manual Properly

More often than not, clays are baked at 275°F for about ten minutes. However, the baking temperature and time vary from clay to clay which is why going through the instruction manual is recommended. 

Another thing we’d like to mention is that the thickness of the clay plays a crucial role in determining the baking time. Hence, make sure you read the instruction manual thoroughly to avoid over-baking the clay model. 

If your model is fabricated out of clays from different brands, set the temperature of the oven at 265°F. You can even follow the directions provided by the brand whose clay you have used the most in creating the masterpiece. 

Step 3: Preheat The Oven

Most likely, the oven is preheated between 220°F and 300°F, but we suggest referring to the instruction manual in the polymer clay packaging. Once you figure out the right temperature, turn on the oven and preheat it. 

Step 4: Put The Model On A Ceramic Baking Dish

Moving on, place your model on a ceramic baking dish, preferably an oven-safe one, and toss it in the preheated oven. In the absence of a dish, you can use a ceramic tile, glass dish, or even parchment paper. 

As a piece of advice, dispose of the surface after baking clays because polymers contain a lot of colorants. 

Step 5: Place The Baking Dish Into The Oven 

As soon as the oven is preheated, place the ceramic dish into the oven and turn it on to start baking. In case you’ve painted the model, bake it for a couple of minutes more than the time specified in the manual. 

When baking models that are more than 1-inch thick, bake them for about 30 to 40 minutes at a lower temperature to avoid burning them. 

Step 6: Take Out The Model From The Oven And Dunk It In Ice Water

As soon as the oven beeps, take out the ceramic dish from the oven and transfer the model to a pot filled with ice water. Keep it submerged in the cold water for about 30 seconds so that the clay doesn’t get over-baked. 

Also, make sure you use a spatula to separate the model from the ceramic, not tongs, as they tend to leave marks on the clay. Alternatively, if you’re unable to separate the model from the surface, submerge it in water along with the ceramic dish. 

3 Ways To Harden Non-Hardening Modeling Clay Without Baking

While baking is the most preferred option among professionals, beginners may find it slightly overwhelming. That’s because baking clay in the cooking oven requires constant supervision and can get damaged if baked at high temperatures. 

But don’t worry, for we’ve enlisted a few ways that will come in handy while hardening non-hardening clay without using the oven. 

1. Use A Dehumidifier

Pots, ornaments, coffee mugs, or flower vases—no matter what you wish to create, using a dehumidifier is the best way to harden non-hardening clay. All you need to do is unpack the clay and place it in front of the dehumidifier to maintain the humidity level. In the absence of a dehumidifier, a space heater or a humidifier will serve the purpose. 

2. Chemical Reaction

Another preferred option for hardening non-hardening clay among hobbyists is using chemical binders, such as vinegar or glue. Irrespective of whichever binder you use, add around four ounces of clay and start sculpting your masterpiece. 

3. Heat Gun

Though uncommon, some people use heat guns for hardening non-hardened clay. However, we suggest trying it only if you’re well-versed with its operation, or you may end up damaging the clay. 

4 Tips To Dry Self-Hardening Clay

4 Tips To Dry Self-Hardening Clay

Compared to traditional ones, self-hardening clays (air-dry clay) need not be fired in kilns for the purpose of hardening. This means the model you carve out of them will have to be hardened at room temperature. 

While most harden within 24 hours, some self-hardening clay may take up to a few days to solidify. However, you must keep in mind that the drying time depends upon the size and the thickness of your project. 

That being said, we’ve mentioned a few tried-and-tested tips that every artist and DIYer must keep in mind while hardening air-dry clays. 

1. Keep It In A Well-Ventilated Area

The first thing that you should do after completing your project is to keep the model in a dry and well-ventilated room. Ideally, the model should be left undisturbed for about 24 to 48 hours, but keep checking it every five to six hours to ensure no cracks. 

Though most clays dry within 48 hours, some may take up to 72 hours to solidify completely. Of course, the thickness of the clay and the moisture in the air play a significant role in the drying process. 

If your air-dry clay isn’t drying even after 12 hours, use a hair dryer at high temperatures to dry it. Alternatively, you can dry it in the oven at a low temperature for about one or two hours if you have access to one.

2. Flip Over The Piece After A Few Hours

Pieces like pots, earrings, or pendants are multi-dimensional, so you’ll have to flip them over to let the other side dry. Preferably, you should flip over such pieces after 12 to 24 hours to avoid damaging the clay. 

3. Repair Cracks That Appear During The Drying Process

During the drying process, cracks or dents may appear on the clay model. So, if that happens, dip your fingers in clean water and rub it over the dents to smooth them out, and repeat the procedure if needed. 

At times, large cracks may appear on your models, which you’ll have to fix by adding water to the clay and putting it in a plastic bag for about ten minutes or so. After that, knead the clay and keep adding water till it becomes usable. 

4. Paint The Clay After It Dries

When it comes to air-dry clay, make sure you paint it only after it has completely dried. Once it is fully cured, grab a paintbrush and coat it with tempera or acrylic paint. 

After leaving it aside to dry for 24 hours, coat a paint sealant or spray it over the surface to protect the coating. For models with intricate details, using a fine or thin paint brush will be the best bet. 

Tips And Tricks To Harden Plasticine Modeling Clay

Most people love crafting kids’ toys out of plasticine modeling clay but don’t know how to harden them. Though it may appear overwhelming in the beginning, hardening plasticine isn’t impossible.

To make it easy for you, here are some time-tested methods for hardening plasticine that are worth a shot. 

  • Apply sealant or varnish to the modeling clay
  • Mix it with epoxy resin
  • Add a premium-quality hardener to the clay
  • Cast it in plaster of paris
  • Allow it to cure in UV light

How To Sculpt Clay: Tips For Beginners

If you’re a newbie in the world of clays, you may find sculpting a bit challenging. But, with patience, practice, and determination, you’ll soon become a pro at clay art. 

Here we’ll walk you through some techniques that you must follow while sculpting clay. 

  • Sketch your design on paper before sculpting
  • Condition the clay by warming up and kneading it to make your models durable
  • Practice basic sculpting before moving to complex ones
  • Bake clay in the oven as per the instructions on the package

How To Harden Modeling Clay Frequently Asked Questions ?

How Long Should You Air-Dry Modeling Clay?

Though we suggest referring to the package instructions, 24 to 48 hours is sufficient to air-dry modeling clay. 

Can Polymer Clay Be Painted After Baking?

Yes, polymer clay is compatible with paint, which means you can coat it with any color you want to make designs pop. 

How To Harden Modeling Clay Final Words

How To Harden Modeling Clay Final Words

On that note, we’ve reached the end of our guide on the topic. 

Clay is an excellent art medium, and you can use it to carve almost anything you wish—ornaments, flower pots, vases, wall arts, paperweights, or pencil holders. 

Honestly, modeling clay serves as a fun, relaxing, and therapeutic activity, but the secret to a stunning masterpiece lies in its hardening. So, whether you bake or air-dry your creations, don’t forget to follow the instructions of the manufacturer and do it the right way to avoid ruining them. 

With that, we’ll call the curtains for the day. Till then, take care! 

Ceiling fans usually blow in a counterclockwise direction in the summer and a clockwise direction in the winter to allow for effective air circulation. Although, there are different other aspects that need to be considered to determine the direction of a blowing fan. 

Fans are such a simple yet incredible device! They are used not only as standalone appliances but also as components inside other machines in the forms of CPU fans, blower fans, air conditioning fans, and so on.

However, if someone suddenly asked you about the direction in which fans blow, would you be able to answer quickly? You would likely take a bit of time to come up with an answer, which may or may not be correct.

That’s why we have discussed this aspect in this article. So, if you are curious, jump in!

How Does A Fan Work?

Closeup of yellow hi-tech fan placed on water with ripple and reflections. Grey background with copy space. 3D Rendering. How Does A Fan Work.

Before we get to the meat of the topic, let’s discuss a little bit about how fans work in general. 

When it comes to fans, everything is about circulation and airflow. The fan’s motor spins the blades in a manner that it mobilizes the air in a given space, thereby helping to circulate throughout the area uniformly. Unlike air conditioners or blowers, fans are not able to alter the temperature. What they can do, however, is cool your surroundings using a mechanism known as forced convection.

In a still environment, the air surrounding our immediate body feels warm because our body  heats it up. But when the fan is turned on, it promotes rapid airflow, thereby displacing the warmer air that is in contact with the skin. This effectively transfers heat by convection, which provides a cooling effect.

The body of a fan consists of a motor that runs off of a power source. This motor is responsible for spinning the fan’s blades and determining the direction of a fan. When we say the direction of a fan, we are referring to the path in which the air flows with respect to the fan’s body. 

If the air flows inward, it means that the fan is pulling the air towards itself. Conversely, when the air flows outward, it means that the air is moving away from the body. 

Factors That Determine The Direction Of A Fan’s Airflow

Apart from the motor, there are some other factors that help to determine the direction of airflow of a fan. We have discussed them below, so we suggest that you keep reading.

1. Direction Of Rotation

When the motor of a fan is turned on, it spins the blades in one of two directions - clockwise and counterclockwise. In this regard, the direction in which the blades spin plays a crucial role in determining the direction of airflow. 

If the fans spin clockwise, the air will blow in one direction, but if it spins in the other direction, the path of the airflow will be reversed too.

2. Blade Design

When you inspect a fan closely, you will notice that the blades are situated at a certain angle with respect to the central axis of its body. The surface of these blades is slightly curved as well. 

Both of these aspects form a key aspect of the fan’s design, which, in turn, helps to determine the direction in which the air blows. On that note, the design of the fan blades is intrinsically linked with the direction in which they spin.

2. Intended Usage

Some fans are designed to be used in both directions, which means that the blades can circulate air either inward or outward. In such cases, the direction of the fan can be changed with a switch whenever necessary. Usually, most ceiling fans and ventilation fans are designed in such a manner so as to improve their utility in a home usage scenario.

On the other hand, some fans are designed to spin only in a single direction. Because of that, the path in which the air flows is fixed and cannot be changed. This is normally observed in AC blower fans, PC component fans, and so on.

What Direction Do Ceiling Fans Blow?

As we have mentioned before, the motor of a ceiling fan is designed in such a manner that it can spin the blades in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions. When spinning in a clockwise rotation, it creates an updraft, and when spinning in a counterclockwise direction, it creates a downdraft.

The best method to identify the ceiling fan direction is to stand directly under it when it is running at high speed. If you notice that the air has less force, it is an indication that the fan is running clockwise and hence pulling the air upward (updraft). 

However, if you notice the cooling breeze to be strong, the fan is running in a counterclockwise direction and pushing the air downwards (downdraft).

A ceiling fan is typically set to spin counterclockwise during the summer months to create a downdraft of cooler air. The rapid circulation of cool air from the top of the room replaces the warmer air at the bottom, which ultimately makes you feel cooler. A reverse phenomenon happens during the winter months when the fan is set to spin in a clockwise direction. 

In this situation, the fan creates an updraft that pulls cooler air from the bottom of the room and mixes it with the warm air at the top. Then, it distributes the air towards the ceiling and the walls instead of pushing it directly downwards. As a result, you do not feel the chill of the cold air.

Changing The Ceiling Fan Direction

Once you know the direction of the ceiling fan, you can change it as per your requirements. It can be altered with the help of a switch that generally comes in the form of remote control or a pull chain. If it is a new fan, it may include Wi-Fi connectivity, which will allow you to alter the rotation via an app.

Regardless of the method used for switching its direction, such an aspect will allow you to use your fan all year round. Besides the seasonal directions already discussed before, you can change the fan’s rotation to create a comfortable environment at all times. 

For instance, you can set the fan to blow air upwards to dispel a foul odor from the lower part of the room. Likewise, the fan can be set to blow air downwards to keep you cool while watching TV or doing any other activity in the living room.

How Else Can You Know About The Direction Of A Blowing Fan?

Finding out the ceiling fan direction is relatively straightforward. However, you might now be wondering how to test an AC blower fan motor rotation or how to test the rotation of a CPU fan. Unfortunately, the process might not be as simple as a ceiling fan. For such cases, the direction can be ascertained by two methods.

In the first method, you have to observe the blade design and the direction in which the blades are rotating. Based on that, you can find out the direction in which the air is blowing. This is quite complex, as the whole process needs to be done attentively.

Another way to determine the fan’s direction is to check the fan’s body for any directional indicators. For this, you will need to disassemble the fan from the machine since the markers won’t be easily visible otherwise. Most of the fans used in PC components or AC blowers come with such indicators, which help to orient them in the right direction after repairs or maintenance. 

What Direction Do Fans Blow Frequently Asked Questions ?

Does the fan direction really matter?

Yes, the direction in which a fan blows matters since it determines the usage scenario. In summers, the fan spins in a direction that produces the wind chill effect to keep you cool. Alternatively, the fan spins in the opposite direction in winter to keep the air inside the room warm. 

Consequently, the fan direction can greatly complement the HVAC system of your house to make it more comfortable to live in.

Does the fan speed play any role in air circulation?

Yes, fan speed plays a critical role in controlling the rate of air circulation inside the rooms. At a low speed, the air around your body will be displaced slowly, which will reduce the intensity of the wind chill effect. Subsequently, at a high fan speed, the wind chill effect will be stronger since the air will be displaced and circulated more rapidly.

The computer fan isolated on white background. What Direction Do Fans Blow Final Words.

What Direction Do Fans Blow Final Words

Fans are all around us, so it is only natural that you learn more about how they function. This includes being able to determine the direction in which they blow.

Many people believe that it is a complex task to determine the directions in which fans blow air. But as you can see from the discussion we have provided, it is not at all complex. Rather, it is a fairly simple task if you approach it in the right way.

And that brings us to the end of this brief guide. If you have found this read insightful, we suggest that you check out our article on the difference between an angle grinder and a polisher.

To be honest, looking for the best paint for furniture is more challenging than it seems, especially for wooden furniture. 

Most people think they need to buy expensive wood paint or stains to give their furniture a refreshing look. While that can be true in some instances, you can also experiment with paints already present in your home. 

One such option has to be acrylic paints which are quite versatile and can be used on a number of surfaces. However, they aren't the most common options for painting wooden furniture. That's why we thought of creating this guide to let you know whether it's worth the effort to paint furniture with acrylic. 

This guide should also give you a better idea of things to remember while painting wooden furniture, so without further ado, let's get started! 

Can You Paint Furniture With Acrylic Paint?

Closeup of female having thin brush in hand carefully painting old cupboard in red color. Home workshop for renovation of furniture. New life for old things. Can You Paint Furniture With Acrylic Paint.

Yes, acrylic paints can very well be used for painting furniture, particularly those made of wood. In fact, options such as acrylic latex paint and acrylic chalk paint have been the go-to paints for homeowners. You just need to use a proper primer and prep the surface of the furniture before painting to make the acrylic paint long-lasting. 

Apart from wood, acrylic paints can be used for other furniture materials like metal, plastic, and wicker. If in doubt, buy an acrylic paint that's manufactured for use on furniture to get expected results. Many professionals actually like acrylic paints on furniture as they're typically water-based, which makes cleaning up and fixing mistakes easier than other paint options. 

It's even better that brands have got on the trend of using acrylic paints on furniture and have formulated paints that can be used to paint outdoor furniture. They are perfect for painting wooden porch or lawn furniture that are regularly exposed to rain, snow, and harsh sunlight. You can find multiple indoor-outdoor acrylic paints online. 

Steps To Follow While Painting Wooden Furniture

It's not the best idea to paint directly on wooden furniture; that's why we will let you know about the steps to follow to get the desired results. This will surely help you revamp any furniture piece even if it isn't in the best shape. 

1. Select The Right Acrylic Paint

Believe it or not, the type of acrylic paint you choose for the furniture will make a big difference in getting the desired look. One of the best things about acrylic paints is that they are available in a number of finishes and colors, so you'll never run out of options. 

An essential factor to remember while picking suitable paint types is whether the furniture will be placed outdoors or indoors. It’s recommended to pick an acrylic latex paint or other acrylic paints meant for outdoor use for furniture kept on porches or lawns as these are durable paints. 

You should also spend some time deciding on the finish, as at times, a matte paint works better than the usual satin sheen of acrylics and high gloss paints. We recommend looking up things like how to paint furniture with Farrow and Ball before selecting an acrylic paint to ensure it's easy to use for DIY projects.

2. Clean The Wooden Surface

Before you can proceed to paint any furniture, it's essential to get the surface as clean as possible. So, use warm water and soap to get rid of any dirt, debris, and oil stains. Sometimes, outdoor furniture may have tough stains, but you can easily remove them with a strong detergent and a scrubbing sponge.

3. Sand The Wood

The next step is to sand the surface of your furniture to achieve a smooth texture. Applying acrylic paint on wood can often highlight even the most minor damages, but light sanding will help remove dents, nicks, or scratches. Sanding is also a great technique to remove old paints from painted furniture. 

In case there are more significant dents or cracks, use a wood filler to smoothen the surface. And remember to sand again afterward so that the entire surface of the furniture is even. 

4. Apply A Primer

We know that prepping wood furniture takes a lot of time, but believe us when we say that the outcome is pretty impressive. Don't skip on this step and ensure to coat the entire surface of your furniture with a good-quality primer. 

A primer is essential when using acrylic chalk paints as it can hide blemishes. Moreover, a wood primer will help the paint colors to shine through without you needing to apply several coats. You should also prime furniture as it guarantees that the paint will last longer. 

5. Apply The Paint

Needless to say that this is the most crucial step when you want to paint any furniture. Remember to get high-quality paint brushes as they help to avoid brush marks, especially when using homemade chalk paint. Always apply the paint in even brush strokes with slight overlaps to achieve a smooth and durable finish. 

If the furniture is quite large, use a paint roller as they are easier to maneuver for beginners, and the job takes less time. Also, read the instructions to know how many coats of paint are required to avoid applying too many layers. We recommend leaving the first coat to dry for 24 hours before you return to check if it requires any touch-ups. 

6. Finish With A Sealant

If you want to protect the look of smooth surfaces and ensure the paint lasts for a long time, never forget to use a sealant. A top coat of transparent sealant works best on both indoor and outdoor furniture to preserve their look after a paint job. 

Moreover, remember to let the paint dry completely before applying the sealant with a paint brush or roller for a lasting finish. A paint sprayer filled with sealant may also work well for applying the final coat on a large piece of furniture. 

Paint Furniture With Acrylic Paint Frequently Asked Questions ?

Can you paint raw wood with acrylic paints?

Technically speaking, you can use water-based paint like acrylic paint on raw wood. But, we wouldn't recommend doing so as the finish wouldn't be the best. It's best to prime wooden furniture before painting to achieve the best result because priming ensures that the paint job will last for a long time, especially with a sealant. 

Furthermore, painting on raw wood with acrylics isn't recommended as it often delivers a patchy finish. 

Can acrylic paint be used on stained wood?

In many cases, a piece of wooden furniture is stained to highlight the wood grains and protect it from termites. You can proceed with painting stained wooden furniture, but make sure to follow the steps of wood preparation properly. 

When the stain is glossy, a little bit of sanding should get rid of the shine while it would also let you smoothen uneven spots on the wood. A few coats of primer can even help subdue dark stains to provide an accurate finish with the acrylic paint. 

Can you use acrylic wall paint on wood furniture?

When it comes to painting outdoor furniture, many people prefer to paint them to match the color of a particular wall. The good thing is that you can actually use the same acrylic wall paint on the wooden surface of the furniture to get an even finish. 

We especially recommend chalk-style paint due to its matte finish, which many people use to create a chic look. Remember to check out how to use chalk paint for furniture to achieve a smooth finish. Other than that, you can also find acrylic latex paints that work for walls and wooden furniture. 

Paint Furniture With Acrylic Paint Final Words

Paint Furniture With Acrylic Paint Final Words

All in all, go forward with the furniture project if you have been wondering whether to use water-based acrylic paint instead of the usual furniture paint. We hope that this guide will help you get the desired finish. 

In case you're still wondering if the acrylic paint lying in your garage is going to work, consult a professional. They may also help you figure out whether your wood furniture would benefit from a coat of oil-based paints. 

Other than that, whenever you're working with paints, ensure to follow the instructions mentioned on its packaging and use protective gear. If it's your first time in furniture painting, we recommend using a non-toxic acrylic paint. 

Want to read more articles on paints and painting like this article? Check out our next article on how to erase a colored pencils drawing to gain more knowledge on the subject.

Until next time, goodbye, and have fun painting! 

Using the best concrete paints is one of the most affordable and easiest ways to revamp concrete flooring. 

Concrete is by far the most prevalent flooring option, especially in high-traffic areas and surfaces that are exposed to external factors. The high durability and low maintenance have definitely played a part in the popularity of concrete over the years. 

Having said that, most people perceive concrete floors to be lackluster compared to other flooring options. Even though it isn't necessarily true, concrete floors can get a bit dull over the years. 

There's no need to worry, as a couple of concrete paints can easily fix the drab concrete floor and transform it into an attractive surface. Today we're here to provide concrete floor paint ideas, to help you create beautifully painted concrete floors without much hassle. 

What Are The Advantages Of Painting Concrete Floors?

What Are The Advantages Of Painting Concrete Floors

More than ever before, options for concrete paints are on the rise. This wasn't the case a few years back, as most people preferred to opt for acid-staining exterior surfaces to achieve better durability. 

Painted concrete surfaces have come a long way, and now you can choose ultra-durable paints that won't chip or peel. This brings us to one of the basic advantages of painting concrete floors which is ease of use. The primary application is no different than painting the walls of a home, so you can easily paint concrete surfaces by yourself using simple tools like paintbrushes and rollers. 

On top of that, concrete paints aren't that expensive, especially when you opt for self-application. Even additional components like decorative color chips are available for an economical price which helps to cut down on the overall cost. 

Don't like the texture or finish of your concrete floor? There's no need to worry as two coats of the right concrete paint can easily hide everything from minor imperfections to concrete stains. Currently, you can find paints in various color options, so customizing any concrete surface won't be an issue. 

These days you can especially find concrete paints that are meant to protect high-traffic areas from further damage. These easy-to-apply paints are meant to be used in garages, walkways, porches, patio, or pool decks, and they resist chemical spills as well as hot tire pickup. 

Another advantage of painting concrete surfaces is that cleaning them is hassle-free, as they're usually water-based acrylic formulations. You won't really need to use any special procedures to maintain the surface once the painting project is over. 

How Are Concrete Floors Painted?

Now that you know why painting concrete floors is a good option, let's find out how it's actually done. But, before you start the process, make sure that the paint is suitable for the surface. 

In case you're looking for durability, it's best to opt for concrete paints that are ideal for indoor and outdoor use. You can also pick anti-skid or slip-resistant paints for surfaces like your garage floor and porch. 

1. Preparing The Surface

The first step is usually to scrape the concrete surface with a wire brush and scraper to remove any high spots. You should also use a degreaser to get rid of as much dirt and grime as possible, especially in areas like the garage. It's even recommended to use water for rinsing the surface and drying it off with a wet/dry vacuum. 

Another step for prepping is to fill the cracks or low spots present on the floor using a concrete crack filler or sealant. Make sure to even out the top surface after applying the filler and remove all crumbling concrete debris using a vacuum cleaner. In case the cracks are too deep, it's best to contact a flooring contractor as they can help you check if there are any underlying damages in the concrete. 

At this point you might be wondering - “do I need to prime exterior concrete before painting?An extra step done by some is to etch the concrete surface with a concrete etcher for the paint to stick better. Then, a generous coat of a suitable primer is applied to the floor, so try to pick a primer that works for both epoxy and concrete surfaces. 

You can skip the primer if the paint doesn't demand one, but it does help in evening out the surface and provides better adhesion. 

2. Application

Once your concrete surface is dry and free from moisture, it's time to begin painting. It's no different than painting any other surface, so you can easily spread the paint with any paintbrush. In case you decide to use an epoxy-based paint, follow the instructions on the container to mix it well before application.

While laying down the first coat, ensure that it's as even as possible for a professional-looking floor. Wait for it to dry completely before applying the second coat for the best coverage. 

3. Sealant

To be honest, most people don't add a sealer as the paints already come with sealant-like properties. However, you can definitely add a clear finish concrete sealer to make the newly painted concrete floor long-lasting. That's because a good-quality sealer can protect it from scratches, peeling, and regular wear and tear. 

Other than that, a sealant is preferred by those who like a shiny finish. The high-gloss finish can elevate the look of outdoor concrete surfaces and make them resistant to oil, gas, or acids. But remember to check the compatibility of the sealer with the concrete paint before proceeding with the application.  

Concrete Floor Paint Ideas

Concrete Floor Paint Ideas

1. Faux Stenciled Rug

One of the most popular trends is to use a stencil to create a painted rug on the concrete floor. All you need to do is strategically lay down the stencil and use a paint roller to apply the concrete paint. Just make sure not to lift the stencil too soon, or you may damage the design.

Also, top the whole surface with a coat of clear sealant to reduce damage from regular wear and tear. 

2. Diamond Motifs

Love the look of traditional concrete floors? You can DIY a diamond motif floor using painter's tape and concrete paint. Begin by measuring the area and then use the tape to create the diamond shapes. Alternatively, you can find vinyl diamond-shaped stencils that make your job easier. 

We recommend laying down a coat of white or gray paint as a base. Then create the diamond designs and fill them in with brighter or darker colors for a contrasting look. 

3. Faux Grout Lines

Another simple design you can create by using painter's tape is faux grout lines. This design looks excellent on basement floors and porches, so start by laying down a light-colored concrete paint and let it dry before using the tape to create faux tiles. 

You can proceed to paint the surface with a slightly darker-colored paint to create the illusion of grout lines. And make sure to lift the tape carefully so that the lines come out even. 

4. Bold Stripes

Want to change the dull look of your laundry rooms or porches? Think about using bright or pastel-colored concrete paints to create bold stripes. There's not much that needs to be done apart from measuring the total area and dividing it into equal horizontal stripes. You can even use black and gray paint for the stripes to give the floor a bolder or more traditional look. 

5. Graphic

There's no point in shying away from using fun graphics to highlight a concrete surface area of your home. You can opt for fun vinyl graphic stencils and paint the surface to create unique patterns. Just learn how to remove paint from concrete to get rid of as much hardened residue from a previous paint job to have a smooth surface. 

6. Painted Tiles

Let's be honest, tiles can be quite expensive, especially when you need to cover a large area. But, you can still get the tiled look on a concrete surface by clubbing faux grout lines with stencils. 

More people are using it to create unique tiled looks in living rooms or patios, as these spaces usually draw a lot of attention from guests. We like the use of vinyl stencils with Greek, Moroccan, or Portuguese tile designs as they provide more quirky finishes. 

7. Adding Flakes

We couldn't miss mentioning vinyl chips or flakes as they have always been used to create extremely durable floors with an industrial feel. You just need to throw flakes on a wet layer of paint to get the desired look. The experts recommend using a good-quality transparent sealer on top to prevent the flakes from peeling off. 

Concrete Floor Paint Ideas Frequently Asked Questions ?

Are concrete stains better than paints?

One of the reasons many homeowners prefer using concrete stains over paints is durability. While a layer of paint sits on the top, a concrete stain penetrates the surface, making it long-lasting. 

Stains might be a better option if you prefer a more earthy and translucent finish or want to mimic the look of marbled floors. Having said that, working with a stain, especially the acid-based variants, can be a bit challenging for a beginner. 

Those who want to use paints but are concerned about durability can purchase concrete paints formulated for interior and exterior durability to achieve a better finish.

What type of paint is best suited for concrete?

As you would have guessed, paints for concrete are available in different formulations and apart from the water-based concrete paints, variants made of latex and epoxy are available. But, most professionals suggest using water-based paints due to their quick drying time. 

Other than that, whenever you're purchasing paint for concrete surfaces, try to find one that's specifically meant for that floor type. For instance, many brands make garage floor paint for garage floors designed to resist scratches and abrasion from tires. 

Are there any drawbacks of painting a concrete floor?

Like any other medium, concrete paints have some drawbacks, which might make them unsuitable for concrete floors. One of the foremost things to know is that paints applied on high-traffic floors need frequent touch-ups but this issue can be solved by topping it with a high-quality sealer. 

Another thing to note is that concrete paints are opaque, so you won't be able to achieve mottling effects or color variations. You'll need to use a concrete acid stain to achieve such finishes. 

We want to add that some concrete paints tend to be slippery, but you can use a slip-resistant variant or mix the paint with anti-skid additives to improve traction. 

Concrete Floor Paint Ideas Final Words

Concrete Floor Paint Ideas Final Words

We hope this guide will help you paint any concrete surface in your home in eye-catching designs and patterns. 

Remember to order a suitable paint in the right amount based on the square footage of the concrete surface. Also, apply a fresh coat of paint only on dry and moisture-free concrete surfaces to avoid peeling. 

Contact a professional contractor if you find it challenging to plan the paint job for concrete surfaces on your property. They are experts who can help you get the desired outcome and can even make the concrete surfaces look better than before. 

Taking suggestions from a professional is especially important if you have a polished concrete floor. Such surfaces need extra attention to detect any damages that might exist in the concrete. 

Until next time, goodbye, and take care! 

Just like a lower fan, it’s quite common for a ceiling fan to malfunction due to incorrect rotation, damaged blades or bases. And a malfunctioning ceiling fan needs to be fixed at the earliest unless you want it to stop functioning altogether. 

Although ceiling fans can be complete lifesavers during the humid summer months, they aren’t immune to malfunctioning. In many cases, they can become dysfunctional and reduced to just an accessory in your room.  

As mentioned above, ceiling fans can malfunction or produce less air for a number of reasons. And today, we are going to decode some of the most common causes behind this trouble. And compare it with blowing fans which are different in many things, such as size, function and others.

So, let’s dive in! 

Reasons For Ceiling Fan Not Blowing Air

Electric Ceiling fan decoration interior of room. Reasons For Ceiling Fan Not Blowing Air.

1. Incorrect Ceiling Fan Size

If the fan is smaller compared to the size of your room, chances are that you won’t feel its cool breeze at all. Small fan blades are only suitable for tiny spaces and not when the room’s square footage is more. 

Be it a ceiling fan or a pedestal, when the fan blades are too small they cannot move enough air on the surface area. So, the ceiling fan blades will be turning all day without providing the required air. 

Another problem that is commonly noticed with these fans is small fan motors, which do not have enough power to generate high speed or move the heavy blades. In that case, you will be stuck with a slow fan that doesn’t serve the purpose.

2. Improper Fan Blade Rotation

The direction in which your fan’s blades spin determines how far the air will reach. Contrary to the much-popular myth, you won’t experience proper airflow in the clockwise setting. On the other hand, the blade pulls air upward and pushes air down the walls when spinning in the opposite (anticlockwise) direction. 

If you do set the fan to spin anticlockwise, the blades will push air downward, and you will experience better airflow in the room. The only problem here is that the airflow can be best experienced right under the fan, as the blades won’t blow air much to the sides. 

Most ceiling fans that you find on the market come with a switch that allows you to change the fan’s direction. An incorrect fan blade rotation can completely ruin your experience, so we’d suggest checking and changing the settings when you get a new ceiling fan. 

3. Dysfunctional Motor Base

You might have to do a ceiling fan troubleshooting when it has been used for a long time and if the motor’s base does not rotate properly. If the ceiling fan wobbles, it’s likely due to the motor shaft or base becoming tilted. And when tilted, the weight completely shifts to one side, resulting in reduced fan speed. 

With dysfunctional motor bases, fans won’t pull air upward or circulate it well. In that case, you will need to fix the issue soon. 

If you are not sure if the motor base is tilted or not, keep an eye out for these indications:

  • The blades incline to one side, especially in older fans
  • The ceiling screws or the blade screws are no longer tight
  • Loose wires are visible above the motor base of the fan and touching the ceiling. 
  • Loud clicking or ticking noise when the fan is switched on.

4. Issues With Fan Height

You would be surprised to know that the height of your fan might actually affect how well it can circulate air. If the fan is installed too high, you won’t feel enough airflow. So, if you have a high ceiling, try installing the fan lower to increase the airflow. 

On the other hand, if the fan is installed too low, it won’t be able to circulate more air and will concentrate the flow only to a smaller area. While this might not be a problem in a small room, the fan would become pretty useless in a large room.

5. Issues With The Blade Shape And Style

Not all fans are made equal. While some are designed for high performance, there are others that will function more as art pieces to enhance the beauty and decor of the room. 

The good news is that the blade size won’t make much of a difference if your room is big, well-ventilated and already has good airflow. However, if the room is small and doesn’t have proper airflow, you should find a fan with a powerful motor. That way, it will move air well, irrespective of the blade size.

Ceiling Fan Not Blowing Air Frequently Asked Questions ?

Does a ceiling fan capacitor affect the fan speed?

Whether it’s a new fan or an old one, you should always check if the capacitor is functioning properly to ensure high speed. When there are faulty capacitors, you will notice that the mounted fans turn slow, or in the worst-case scenario, they stop functioning altogether. 

There are many people who wonder, “what fan blows the coldest air?” But let us tell you, more than the fan, it is the attachments that should be functional and in the best shape. Only when the fan capacitor, circuit breaker, and motor shaft are all in place and running well can you experience the best air movement. 

How to fix misaligned fan blades?

You might notice misaligned blades on your fan for a variety of reasons. Whatever the cause, misaligned blades cause an imbalance in the overall weight of the fan to affect its efficacy. 

To fix this issue, start by loosening the screws on the blade arms. Once they are loosened, realign the blades to ensure they are straight and aligned. Then tighten the screws properly. 

After you are done, switch on the fan and check if all the blades are aligned correctly. In case you notice that the blades keep getting loose, use larger screws to ensure they stay tightened and in place. 

How to make the most of ceiling fans in summers?

Always make sure that your ceiling fan is spinning anticlockwise during the hit summer days. This will create a downdraft, and you will experience a cool breeze when you sit right under the fan. Besides, the fan should be set at the highest speed. 

You can even put a blower fan in the room to facilitate improved ventilation. Read our guide on “how does a blower fan work?” to learn all about it. 

How to stop the screeching noise in ceiling fans?

You will need to get the base of the fan fixed if you notice that it is rusted or corroded; otherwise, it will keep grinding and generate an annoying screeching sound. The sound is an indication that the bearings need to be replaced, so changing them should resolve the problem. 

Ceiling Fan Not Blowing Air Final Words

Ceiling Fan Not Blowing Air Final Words

In most cases, it isn’t a major malfunction that stops a fan from functioning efficiently. Rather, it is the small mistakes on our part that prevents it from functioning optimally. For instance, a fan rotating in the “reverse” direction can cause it to pull the air upwards instead of pushing it down. 

Such issues can be fixed the DIY way with a few simple alterations, some problems may result from a more serious technical fault. So, if your DIY fix is not yielding satisfactory results, it may be a good idea to call a professional to detect the problem and resolve it at the earliest. 

See you next time! 

The heating system in your house may break and release cold air instead of hot air. This could be because an incorrect thermostat setting is keeping the air running despite turning it off. Alternatively, your heating system may malfunction because of a broken vent.

A heating system in the house is necessary when it's cold, as it can heat the room and maintain a comfortable temperature. However, sometimes the heating systems can break down and release cold air instead.

When that happens, it will cost more money and waste electric energy. Therefore, you will have to fix it as soon as possible. So, here’s a complete guide for you when your vent is blowing cold air.

How To Fix Furnace Blowing Cold Air Coming From Vents

How To Fix Furnace Blowing Cold Air Coming From Vents

There could be multiple reasons for your furnace blowing cold air. I have gathered some possible reasons for that and how to fix it.

1. Cold Air Blowing Because Of Incorrect Thermostat

The thermostat in your home is a small device that is a crucial part of the heating or cooling system. This is because, with a press of a button, you can set the temperature range and comfortably stay warm.

So, when the furnace is blowing cold air from the vent, the first thing you should do is check the thermostat setting. As you do that, see if the device is set to "ON." If so, the problem could be because of that, as it keeps the fan running despite you turning the heat off. As such, simply change the setting from "ON" to "AUTO."

Once you do that, the fan will automatically turn off when the heat is turned off and will not blow cold air.

2. Broken Or Dirty Flame Sensor

Cold air can also blow because of a broken or dirty flame sensor located inside the furnace. The flame sensor is a device that detects flame and burns natural gas, maintaining the heating cycle. Moreover, when the device is broken or dirty, it can automatically turn the heat off so that natural gas does not leak into the house. Along with that, the fan could still blow cold air into the vent.

Accordingly, you will have to clean or replace the device. For that, I suggest calling a professional instead of trying your hand at it.

3. Issues With Ignition And Pilot Light

Another reason your furnace is blowing cold air could be due to a broken ignition system. In such a situation, the fuel in the heater will not ignite and will not be blowing hot air. Instead, it will release cold air only.

When that happens, check if the pilot light is on; if not, you will have to fix the device. If you want to do it yourself, you can use the manual that comes with the device and follow the instructions. When you are done, reignite and see if the flame goes out in a few minutes. If that happens, you might have a bigger problem, and you will need professional help.

Furthermore, if you cannot relight the pilot light, check the gas supply to see if it is a gas furnace. See if the gas valve is turned on; if it is, clean the gas valve properly for continuous supply.

Warning: When you relight the pilot switch, turn off the gas valve so that there are no leaks while you repair it. This is crucial because you can start an accidental fire with leaks and harm yourself.

4. Dirty Or Clogged HVAC Filter

The HVAC filter is an important part of your heating system. Since it helps in filtering dust particles, it maintains good air quality and keeps you healthy. However, it's a device that can get dirty and clogged and will need cleaning from time to time. Otherwise, the air will get blocked inside the furnace, and that can cause overheating, further leading the heater to auto-turn off.

With a dirty air filter, only cold air will come out of the air duct. An easy solution to this is to clean or replace the HVAC filter from time to time.

5. Low Refrigerant Charge In The AC System

A low refrigerant charge in the air conditioning systems can also be one reason cold air comes out of the vents. The cause of low refrigerant can be due to leaks in the coil or heat pump. Moreover, with low refrigerant, you will also lose the capacity and airflow of the heater. Whenever you realize that the first thing you can do is charge the refrigerant. If there is a leak in the heat pump system, call your HVAC expert to fix the leak.

6. Holes and Cracks In The Vents

The vents connected to your HVAC system direct warm air out of the air ducts. However, it can break and crack for several reasons, like rust, earthquakes, etc. If there are cracks in vents, it will draw cold air and feel like the furnace blowing cold air.

So, troubleshooting such a problem will require checking the vents, probably located in the attic, for cracks and holes. If you notice any crack, small or big, you will either have to patch it up or replace the whole section.

7. A Broken Compressor

The compressor of your heating system is located inside the heat pump, and it makes everything run smoothly. However, with time the compressor can break for several reasons. For instance, you could have over or undercharged it, or maybe there is a faulty motor. Moreover, it could be due to a dirty evaporator and coil or a faulty run capacitor.

When that happens, your heater will not work properly and impact the heating process.

8. A Broken Limit Switch Can Also Be The Problem

The limit switch is also another important device inside your heating system. Since the device automatically turns the burner off when the heat exchanger gets too hot, it is an important safety feature. However, it can malfunction and keep blowing hot air overheating the heat exchanger or turn the burner off continuously and stop the heating cycle.

9. Faulty or Broken Fan Or Motor

The blower fan and the inductor draft motor inside your gas furnace help in blowing hot air when it's in heating mode. The blower fan can malfunction when it is too old or has high static pressure. Moreover, it can go out because of inadequate ductwork. That’s when you can fix the problem by lowering the static pressure. If that does not work, you can replace the blower.

Besides, the inductor draft motor also works inside the furnace to remove exhaust gas. If the device gets faulty, the heater will push air that is filled with exhaust gas which is obviously dangerous for your health.

Now, the cause of a faulty draft motor could be due to a blocked flue pipe or some other restrictions. To fix the problem, you can try cleaning the blockage or restrictions or installing a new motor.

Why Is Cold Air Coming From Vents When Heat Is Off

Final Words

Educating yourself on the heating and cooling system in your home is important. I say this because it maintains the temperature of the room, keeping you comfortable. However, it can break and not work optimally.

When that happens, follow the instructions above, and you can fix the problem at the earliest. But, as furnace repair can be tricky, you will have to get professional help to diagnose and fix the problems.

From military subterfuge to religious decorations and more, face and body art has been used in countless ways over the centuries. Either it’s homemade or professional body paints, you’ll see them everywhere around the world with many cultures. 

It has been used during festivals, conventions, and even to highlight various causes. While originally practiced by the indigenous people of Africa and Australia, it is now most commonly used as a form of entertainment. But like other forms of art, selecting the right tools is necessary for getting the best results. 

Since the paint will be directly applied to the skin, it is important to find options that are completely safe. That is why it is recommended to use paints that are specially developed for the purpose, such as any water-based or alcohol-based formula. Our face and body are not like our home wall or ceiling; there also you cannot just use any types of paints. In fact, painting ceilings is not at all an easy job, they need skill sets and the right kind of paint that’ll stick to the ceiling without peeling off. 

Besides these, there are some other options, so let’s look at them in detail. 

Origin And Evolution Of Face And Body Art

Origin And Evolution Of Face And Body Art

Nowadays, there are several paint options for the face and body. However, this type of art dating back to the paleolithic age had humble origins. The first items that were used as a face and body paint were pigments made from plants, animal by-products, ashes, and similar materials. 

During the hunting-gathering phase of human evolution, body painting was used by tribal warriors for practical purposes like identification and camouflage. Such paint was also used for ceremonial rituals and inciting fear in enemies. Later, it became popular as a decorative item, used to enhance one’s appearance, similar to how makeup is used today.  

However, the problem with many of the materials that were used for face and body painting in the earlier days was that they were not safe. Pigments made from rocks, plants, and animals often turned out to be toxic for the human body.

Even most of the options available currently, like acrylic paints, are not meant for use on the human skin, as they can cause allergic reactions and skin irritation. That is why you should make sure to select the right type of paint for body art. Supposedly on Halloween, acrylic paints are only good on Halloween paintings and decorations ideas and not on human skin. 

Body Painting In Modern Times

Modern-day body and face painting mainly involve creating a living piece of art by decorating a person’s body, usually for purposes like:

  • Promotional or marketing activities
  • Costumes or part of costumes for parades, conventions, and similar events
  • Competitions and festivals

Body painting also includes glitter tattoos, temporary tattoos, and other types of art usually created using various mediums. 

What Does Body Painting Symbolize?

Various cultures associate different things with body painting, and these are different from body art done for ceremonial purposes or events by indigenous people. Indigenous people utilize body painting as an art form for special occasions like weddings, funerals, right of passage ceremonies, and other celebrations. For such events, various colors and patterns have different meanings.

In contrast, modern body art focuses on expressing an emotion or idea and is generally about the art itself. Body art is also used for celebrations but does not have any spiritual meaning and has a more decorative purpose, that of enhancing beauty. 

Body Painting And Safety

Generally, body and face painting is completely safe if the right type of paint is used and proper instructions are followed. So, craft paints, which are not meant to be used on the skin, should be avoided at all costs. These include acrylic paint, regular spray paint, tempera paints, and others which can cause skin irritation, allergic reaction, or even chemical burns. 

That is why you should always use paint specifically designed for the purpose, as these are completely safe. 

The Best Types Of Paint For Face And Body Art

1. Water-based Paint

Water-based body paint is among the safest options if you’re going for face and body painting. Such paints need to adhere to certain quality guidelines and are properly regulated as they may also be used by kids. Besides being completely non toxic, they are easily washable and can be applied using several methods and tools. You can use a sponge, paintbrush, or toothbrush for the purpose. 

However, keep in mind that water-based paints can easily be rubbed off and are susceptible to cracking. That is why they may not be the best option if you use them for professional purposes, like modeling. 

2. Metallic Body Paint

If you’re trying to achieve a shiny, glossy look, metallic body paints might be an excellent option. These paints contain real metal powder blended with a synthetic liquid for application but they should be used cautiously. Since the powder is made up of real metal, it can cause skin irritation, which is why it is best for special occasions. 

Compared to water-based paints, metallic paints do not rub off easily and last longer. 

3. Alcohol-Based Paint

Generally used for making airbrush tattoos and for special effects applications, alcohol-based paint can resist heat and moisture for prolonged periods.. 

Being waterproof, these paints do not crack easily due to sweat and have to be removed using rubbing alcohol. Keep in mind that it may take some time for the paint to remove and you should do the same in a well-ventilated area, as the fumes can be toxic. 

4. Latex Body Paint

Regular or liquid latex is another fantastic option for body art and is often used by cosplayers because it is more affordable than custom costume designs. One of the best things about this paint is that it does not leave any residue, unlike most other options. That said, it may not be ideal for those with latex allergies, as it can cause irritation and allergic reactions.  

Latex paint is also not recommended for use in extreme heat, as it can cause heat stroke by blocking the perspiration process. And like many other types of paint, avoid applying it to damaged skin areas.

Another thing to keep in mind is that latex paint works just like wax when it comes to skin application, meaning that it can pull the hair out during removal. So, you should shave the areas where the paint has to be applied to minimize the pain when removing it. 

5. Henna

One of the traditional body paints, henna is commonly used in Asia and coastal areas of Africa for body painting. Extracted from plant dye, it’s a reddish-brown pigment used for many purposes. In coastal African cities, women often use henna as decorative paint and body paint for when they are about to get married. 

This is one of the safest types of body paint and can be used by kids and adults without worrying about any harmful effects. Being a temporary paint, it fades away naturally over time, but you can exfoliate your skin to speed up the process. However, unlike regular henna, black henna should be avoided since it contains chemicals that can cause allergic reactions and irritations. 

6. Commercial Body Paint

You can find commercial body paint from different manufacturers for various purposes. These are generally available in containers or spray bottles and are nontoxic. They also do not contain any latex, making them a worthwhile option for those with latex allergies. 

7. Markers 

In addition to body paints, special markers can be used for body and face painting. Like commercial body paints, most such markers are non toxic and can be used by both children and adults. However, some may specify the areas of the body where they should not be used, so make sure to read the packaging before use. 

The Process Of Body Painting

The Process Of Body Painting

Finding the right type of paint is vital for creating highly impressive body art, but that is not the only thing that requires attention. Before you can start, it is important to understand the process to ensure the best results. 

Whether you are opting for face painting or both face and body painting, it will involve multiple steps and requires considerable effort and time. 

1. Planning The Painting

Proper planning is the first and most important step in body painting and, in most cases, involves creating a sketch of the design you intend to paint. A sketch makes it easy to see whether various parts of the design work well on the areas of the body they will be painted on. Plus, it serves as a guide during the painting process. 

However, it may not be required if you opt for a free-spirit look.

2. Preparing The Model And The Skin

It is important to ensure that the skin is completely clean and oil-free for the paint to stick to the skin. And the first step in this regard is to use a gentle soap to clean the skin. Avoid exfoliation or abrasive skin treatments, as they may damage the skin.

Once done, dry the skin using a towel and avoid the application of any lotions, creams, or other skincare products. This is because they can affect the ability of the paint to stick to the skin. 

But you can use a barrier spray on the skin before painting, which will shield the skin from oils or sweating and prevent the paint from smudging. 

3. Creating The Right Setup

Both face and body paintings require a lot of time to be completed, which is why creating a comfortable setup for the model is essential. For standing models, providing them with a soft cushion to stand on can be helpful. Similarly, depending on the temperature, you may need to provide a heat source since the model will be almost completely naked in most cases. 

Ensure that the model stays well hydrated and maintains circulation by moving the legs as required. You will also need to provide the model time to take refreshments and breaks, as the process can be quite tiring.

4. Applying The Body Paint

The application process of body paint will depend upon its nature, as body paints are available in various formats such as water activated paints or liquid body paints. 

A. Applying Water Activated Solid Body Paints

Water activated solid body paints are among the most popular options and are generally available in cake form. They may either be dry and hard or have a clayey consistency and are usually applied with water using a brush or sponge. 

Start by moistening the sponge or brush and rub it across the body paint. When the paint acquires a creamy texture, it is ready to be applied as required. When you use a sponge, tap the surface repeatedly to get good coverage. You can also use a dry blending or stippling effect to create various textures. 

Alternatively, you can make circular motions using a body brush or a kabuki brush when using. And use a nice selection of face painting brushes that includes filbert brushes, round brushes, and flat brushes to get those intricate details. 

B. Applying Liquid Body Paints

Applying alcohol-based or liquid body paints is not very different from applying solid ones and can be done using a brush or sponge. If the paints are adequately thin, you can use an airbrush or thin them out first if they are not. An airbrush has three basic components, an airbrush gun, a hose, and an air compressor. 

Put the paint inside the container provided on the airbrush and point the device towards the area of the body to be painted. Use the trigger to apply the paint onto the skin, and the distance between the airbrush and the skin will determine the effect. Hence, learning how to use an airbrush can take some time but it can be advantageous in helping speed up the painting process. 

For this method, look for an airbrush compressor and guns designed for body painting, as regular ones can be quite strong for the skin.

Tools Required For Body Painting

1. Brushes

Body painting requires high-quality specialty brushes, mainly including a one-inch flat brush, a ¾-inch flat brush, and a medium size filbert brush. You will also need round brushes in sizes zero, two, three, and five, a ¾-inch angle brush, a smaller brush, and a kabuki style brush.

Also, keep in mind that brushes with synthetic bristles work better for body painting than those with natural hair. 

2. Sponges

Almost all body painting projects require high-density sponges since they allow you to cover large parts of the body easily and quickly. You can find them in varying sizes, shapes, colors, and densities. The best options are half or full-circle sponges because they provide the largest painting surface. 

Avoid using regular makeup sponges since they do not work very well with water-activated face paints. They are different from body painting sponge,  which are made from reticulated polyether foam. 

3. Setting Spray 

This is an optional resource that can be very useful in certain cases. Apply a makeup sealer to the body paint to help increase its resistance to sweat, smudges, and water and ensure that it lasts longer. However, it will not make the body paint smudge-proof, sweatproof, or waterproof. For that, you need to use alcohol-based paints.   

Removing Body Paint

Compared to the application process, the removal process of the body paint is easier and does not require as much time or effort. The longer you wear the paint, the easier it is to remove later. And while removing body paint, it is common to stain various surfaces, so it is best to be prepared. 

1. Removing Alcohol Or Water-Based Body Paints

Alcohol or water-based paints can be easily removed using a face and body art soap, a rag, sponge, and warm water. Add some soap to your rag or sponge and gently scrub all of the painted areas. Once the pigment becomes loose, rinse with warm water. Repeat the process as required. 

If some faint stains are left, put some lotion on the skin and leave it for about 30 minutes. Then scrub with the rag again and rinse with water. In the case of acrylic, though a water-based paint, it tends to last long when it becomes dry and becomes harder to remove from skin. Thus, another reason why it’s not suitable for body art. 

2. Removing Oil-Based Body Paint

Unlike water or alcohol-based paints, oil paints should be removed using oil-based products or special removers. In this case, use lotion or baby oil to loosen the pigment and wash it off with soap and water. However, most people do not use oil-based paints for body and face painting. 

Getting Good Quality Body Paint

Getting Good Quality Body Paint

While finding body and face paints is easier than ever before, it is important to get paints that are of good quality. These are easier to work with, offer vibrant colors, and provide the best results. But finding such paints can be a bit tricky, so keep these things in mind:

1. Reputable Stores

When buying face paints, always go with reputable stores that are known to provide good quality products. Avoid purchasing from stores that only appear around Halloween, as they offer poor-quality paints that are difficult to use and do not provide the desired results. 

2. Known Brands 

Go with well-known brands that have been on the market for a long time and offer the best body paint. Such paints are generally safer, easier to apply, and last longer. Even if some newer brands can offer reliable products, finding them may require greater effort and time. 

3. Good Customer Service 

Purchasing from stores that offer specialized customer service can take your body painting process to the next level. Their staff includes body painters who can provide ideas, tips, and suggestions to improve your body painting experience. 

What Type Of Paint Can Be Used For Face And Body Art Frequently Asked Questions ?

How Long Does Body Paint Last?

There is no standard time for which the body paint will last, and the period can range from a few hours to a couple of days, depending on the paints used. Products like henna can last up to two weeks with proper care, while alcohol-based paints can last for two to three days.

On the other hand, water-based paints do not last more than a day since sweat and contact with various surfaces can easily remove the pigment. And glitter tattoos can last for about a week. 

What Is A Good Substitute For Face Paint?

You can use this DIY technique to create an excellent substitute for face paint. 

Mix equal amounts of white cold cream or face lotion with cornstarch to make a lotion. Use water to thin the cornstarch or add more cornstarch to thicken it as required. You can also add a quarter teaspoon of vegetable oil or baby oil to make the paint smoother and prevent caking. 

Can You Use Watercolor As Face Paint?

Watercolor is generally considered safe for face painting, especially children’s watercolor paints. These are generally safer than other types of watercolor because they are nontoxic and thus, can be safely applied to the face. 

Is Acrylic Paint Safe For Skin? 

Acrylic paint is usually used for painting purposes on surfaces like canvases and is a water-based solvent. It contains acrylic, color pigment, and a colorless liquid called MMA. Artists use acrylic paint because it is easier to clean and safer than oil-based paints. ‘

But it is not meant to be used on the skin since it stiffens upon hardening. This reduces the flexibility of the skin and prevents it from breathing, which can cause skin irritations. Additionally, it may contain harmful chemicals like ammonia, lead, and formaldehyde that should never be put on the skin. 

What Do Cosplayers Use For Body Paint?

For cosplaying purposes, the best paint would be regular water-based face and body paints or airbrush body paints. Water based paints, when wet, can be easily mixed to create new colors, which helps get the right shade. 

Airbrush paints also offer several advantages for cosplayers. They can be easily applied to various areas of the skin and can be easily diluted and mixed to create various shades. 

What Type Of Paint Can Be Used For Face And Body Art Final Thoughts

What Type Of Paint Can Be Used For Face And Body Art Final Thoughts

While the purpose of body and face painting may have evolved over the years, the art itself remains quite popular today. You can see some great examples of body art at conventions, cosplays, birthday parties, and other such occasions.

So, if you’re a beginner looking to try out this form of art, there has never been a better time as there are lots of paints and designs to choose from. However, when starting out, it is a good idea to go with simple designs that are easier and can be completed quickly.  

Now that you are ready to find the type of paint most suitable for you, it is time to conclude this guide. Until next time!

Repairing an old concrete surface can be challenging, but it isn’t impossible. 

Concrete is one of the most versatile construction materials on the market. However, its quality can degrade over time due to damage from weather, sun, and physical impacts. 

Concrete resurfacing can be used to repair the existing concrete by removing a thin layer of old concrete and replacing it with a new layer. In fact, this is one of the most effective ways of repairing old concrete to make it more durable. 

So today, we will tell you all about concrete resurfacing, including the best concrete crack filler, types of cracks in concrete slabs, and best asphalt crack filler to help you make an informed decision. Now, let’s dive in! 

What Is Concrete Resurfacing?

Worker plastering the concrete cement during construction contractor using a float to sidewalk. What Is Concrete Resurfacing.

Old concrete surfaces have a tendency to get damaged or cracked due to intense weathering and other external factors. However, it may not always be possible to replace them with new ones, mainly due to budget constraints. And here's where concrete resurfacing can come to your rescue.

The damaged top layer is removed, and the cracks are repaired before a new layer of concrete is applied to the concrete. This new layer is made from a material known as a resurfacer. 

Although resurfacers look like concrete, they are fundamentally different when it comes to the main composition. The compound is made from a special bonding agent that allows it to adhere well to old concrete. 

On the contrary, if you apply a new layer of concrete without applying a resurfacing material, then the two layers will not bond well. Eventually, these thin layers will crack due to various external reasons, but resurfacers add an extra layer of protection as well as help with better bonding. 

How Does Resurfaced Concrete Look Like?

Despite having a different chemical composition, resurfaced concrete looks identical to an existing concrete surface. Resurfacing focuses on getting the cracked surfaces repaired and repairing the damages with a new layer of resurfacer. Hence, you can’t tell any major difference when you look at a resurfaced concrete slab. 

Decorative Concrete Resurfacing Ideas

The good news is that you can use some techniques while pouring the resurfacer to enhance the overall look. And here is a list of options you can try to enhance the looks of your concrete resurfacer:

A. Texture

If you are bored of the plain old texture of a concrete surface, you can alter the look of the resurfaced concrete by adding different textures to the new surface using simple tools. For instance, you can use sandpaper to create a coarse texture, especially on white concrete. 

B. Color

Besides altering the texture of the surface, you can change the color by adding color to the resurfacing material. Once you have mixed the color, apply the coat on the concrete surface and let it dry completely before adding more layers. 

C. Lines And Patterns

You can also add additional details by using different shapes and stamps on the wet, resurfaced layer. For example, you can decorate the resurfaced concrete surface by creating unique patterns while the top layer is still wet. Asymmetrical black lines on white concrete deck can enhance the aesthetics of your driveway or deck. 

D. Finish

Lastly, you can apply a layer of finish coat to give your concrete layer a sealed and uniform finish. This works exactly like paint which seals the surfaces and prevents corrosion from occurring. Besides, you can choose a glossy or matte finish. 

How Can I Make My Concrete Resurfacing Last Longer?

Normally, a resurfaced concrete surface can last for more than 20 years or more without needing much repairs or maintenance. In fact, resurfaced concrete is extremely durable, making it a good candidate for repairing old concrete surfaces. However, you can further prolong the longevity of the resurfaced concrete by following a few tips: 

1. Repairs

Before applying the resurfacer, you need to repair the damage on the existing concrete since the damage may intensify later on, thereby affecting the integrity of the resurfacer. Fill the cracks and let them dry completely before pouring the resurfacer onto the old concrete layer. 

2. Cleaning

You should always clean the existing surface before applying a layer of resurfacer. Resurfacer compounds are generally known for having a special ingredient that lets them bond with the existing concrete; however, dirt and dust can affect the bonding property of the compound. 

Therefore, you should clean and remove any dirt from the surface, which will help prevent any impurities from interfering in the bonding process. 

3. Finishing

As soon as the resurfacer layer has completely hardened, we recommend applying a layer of finish coat since it seals the concrete surface and provides an additional layer of protection against harsh weather conditions and corrosion. And depending on your preference, you can go for a glossy or matte finish. 

4. Inspection And Identification

If you are planning to do a DIY resurfacing of the concrete driveway, then we highly suggest inspecting the area first before making your decision. Look around the concrete driveway and search for any damages or cracks. Most concrete damages require heavy-grade industrial tools for repairing, and using home tools can damage the cracks further. 

So, you can call a professional and ask them to repair the cracks and damages before pouring the resurfacer onto the surface. In addition, you will need to use the correct resurfacer, which will work well with your concrete driveway, concrete overlay, and concrete garage floor. 

5. Maintenance

Resurfaced concrete surfaces usually require the least amount of maintenance, but they can definitely benefit from a little maintenance. One of the best ways to maintain the surfaces is by applying a thin coat of good-quality sealer. The sealer helps the resurfaced layer to last longer by sealing the porous holes and making it resistant to water. 

Additionally, the sealer is capable of limiting UV rays and intense weathering damage. Some sealers are capable of providing resistance to chemicals that can easily corrode the new concrete. Hence, investing in a good-quality sealer can drastically improve the shelf life of the resurfaced concrete surface. 

Can Old Concrete Be Resurfaced Frequently Asked Questions ?

When Should You Resurface A Concrete Surface?

There are several ways of knowing if your concrete surface needs to be resurfaced. For instance, if you notice deep cracks on the upper layer, then there’s a good chance that the underlying concrete is also damaged, so resurfacing it may be a good idea. You can also perform resurfacing to repair old pipes. 

But if you haven’t done resurfacing before, we’d suggest contacting a contractor, who will get the job effectively and walk you through the maintenance aspects as well. 

Should You Do The Resurfacing By Yourself?

Although you can purchase a resurfacer from a local hardware store, it is not advisable since it is expensive, and you might pick the wrong resurfacer for the concrete surfaces. The concrete needs to be treated properly as well; therefore, we recommend getting in touch with a professional to get the job done. 

Besides this, resurfacing requires you to own commercial-grade tools, which may not be readily available to you. 

What Is The Best Concrete Crack Fixer?

Epoxy coatings are the best concrete crack fixers on the market since they are cheap and easy to use. You can purchase the epoxy from a local hardware store and apply it to cracked concrete surfaces and floors. 

After the epoxy has been applied correctly, it won’t take long to dry, which is another advantage. Nevertheless, you should let it cure properly according to the manufacturer's instructions for best results. 

Epoxy can also be used to fill asphalt cracks and other materials similar to concrete, making it pretty versatile for DIY repairs around the house. 

What Are The Types Of Cracks Observed In Concrete Surfaces?

Generally, there are six types of cracks that can cause severe damage to your concrete slabs or surfaces, which include: 

  • Cracks formed due to premature drying 
  • Cracks formed due to the overloading of slabs 
  • Heaving cracks 
  • Plastic shrinkage cracks 
  • Settling cracks 
  • Expansion cracks 

Is It Possible To Stain Resurfaced Concrete?

Just like regular concrete floors, you can use stain on resurfaced concrete as long as you use concrete stain on the surface. 

However, keep in mind that stains used for wood or any other surfaces are not compatible with concrete since the chemical composition is different. Hence, you should avoid using them as they can cause severe damage to the resurfaced concrete surface. 

Instead, you can use a concrete stain of any color to add to the aesthetic of the otherwise boring plain concrete. Moreover, you can use different painting techniques and tools to create unique effects. 

However, we’d suggest practicing it first on any unused or leftover concrete slabs (if available) or simple paper, as it can be difficult to remove the paint from the surface once applied. 

Full length of man laborer using troweling machine while screeding floor in new building under blue sky. Male worker finishing concrete surface with floor screed grinder machine at construction site. Can Old Concrete Be Resurfaced Final Words.

Can Old Concrete Be Resurfaced Final Words

Concrete surfaces are prone to get damaged over time; however, you can still prolong their longevity by following a few tips. 

For starters, always make sure to coat your old and new concrete surfaces with weatherproof paint as it will give the surface additional resistance to thawing and freezing cycles. Besides, try to keep heavy weights and objects away from them as they can easily form cracks on the surface. 

And try not to use any appliances with strong vibrations near newly resurfaced concrete since they can cause irreparable damages, especially on walls and floors. 

That said, we shall now say goodbye. See you next time! 

Do you want to change up the look and feel of your home? Then you should give it a nice fresh coat of paint! 

It feels great to refresh the appearance of your home from time to time. But painting your home can be a lot of work, especially if you are a DIYer. And when it comes to the ceiling, painting it may feel like a nightmare. Even the best quality ceiling paint can result in a messy failure, if you don’t know how to paint your ceiling. 

However, we would suggest that you use a roller to paint the ceiling. That will make the process a lot easier to complete. All you need to do is clear out the room, get some basic arrangements done, and then apply the paint with the roller while ensuring uniform coverage. 

Then again, we understand that not everyone may be familiar with using a roller. That’s why we have prepared this guide so that you can easily learn how to use a roller to paint your ceiling. 

So, let’s roll! 

What Is A Roller?

How To Paint A Ceiling With A Roller

Before using the tool, you should first get familiar with it so that you can grasp the process better. So, let us begin by discussing a little about what a roller is. It is a standard piece of equipment that is used by professional painters and interior decorators.

Usually, a paint roller comes with two components - the roller frame and the roller cover. The roller cover is a cylindrical component that absorbs the paint and transfers it to the wall. Conversely, the roller frame makes up the remainder of the paint roller, which comprises the handle and an attachment for the roller cover.

It may be made using metal, plastic, wood, or any other durable material. On the contrary, the cylindrical cover is made from rubber foam, pile fabric, or urethane fibers. Although, the material may change based on the type of paint you are using and the texture of your ceiling. 

However, the fundamental method of operation is more or less the same. It is designed to soak up the paint from the paint container or tray. And when you roll it on the walls or other flat surfaces, the paint is transferred to the surface.

During paint application, only the cover rotates while the frame holds it in position. Thus, compared to other painting tools like the paintbrush or a sprayer, a roller is a lot more efficient and convenient. It is also less messy since the paint usually doesn’t drip from it like paint brushes.

But you should know that the roller covers are typically not reusable, due to which you will need to replace them after painting. Roller frames, on the other hand, are durable enough so you can use them for a long time.

How To Paint A Ceiling With A Roller?

Now that you know what a roller is, let’s get back to our primary objective - how to use it to paint the ceiling. First off, you will need to make a few preparations before you begin painting. You need to gather all the supplies and additional tools that will be necessary while painting. 

Ideally, you should keep them ready at hand so that you will have easy access to them whenever necessary. In this regard, besides the roller and the paint, you need a can opener, stirring stick, paint roller extension rod or extension pole, and painter’s tape. 

You can also keep an angled brush, paint tray, step-ladder, drop cloths, rags, and sweepers. And always make sure to wear protective clothing, such as safety goggles, caps, and so on.

Gathering the necessary equipment and tools is essential to make painting your ceiling a lot smoother and more convenient. Once you are done, it’s time to proceed further by following the steps below.

Step 1: Clear The Room

We know that you are eager to start rolling the paint on your ceiling, but let’s not be hasty. Otherwise, you will be making the process a whole lot more bothersome than necessary.

You need to prepare the room that you are going to paint. If you plan to paint the entire room, such as the ceiling and the walls, a few extensive preparations will need to be made.

In any case, preparing the room is an absolute necessity before getting started. And to do that, you will first need to remove or cover all of the furniture and other items using old bedsheets. This will prevent paint from splattering all over your household items and furniture.

Then, you will need to remove all the objects from the ceiling, such as ceiling fans, light fixtures, vent covers, and so on. And if you are painting the whole room, then remove all the wall fixtures as well.

Step 2: Prepare The Room For Painting

After you are done clearing out the room, it is time to prep it for painting. For this step, you will need to cover the flooring with drop cloths to prevent splattering. And if you only intend to paint the ceiling, you can cover the walls with them too.

Even the fixtures which are unremovable, like your windows, vents, or switchboards, can simply be covered with these drop cloths. The same applies to any heavy furniture or household items that you are unable to remove from the room.

Make sure to use sufficient drop cloths so that there are no gaps left. It will be ideal if they overlap each other, which eliminates the chances of paint getting through them almost completely. Furthermore, to keep the drop cloths in place, you can use painter’s tape along the edges.

Step 3: Clean And Fix The Ceiling

Before you apply ceiling paint, you will need to make sure that it is clean. You may not know it, but the ceiling can get pretty dirty due to a number of reasons, which include cobwebs, roof leaks, spills, tobacco smoke, and so on. And if your ceiling surface is dirty, the paint will not adhere well to it.

Therefore, you can clean it up with a brush or a rag to eliminate most of the grime and dirt. Unfortunately, this will not be enough to clean out stains caused by roof leaks or tobacco smoke. To remove them, you need to use a stain-blocking primer. We recommend using white shellac, which will cover up these stains effectively.

Following that, you will need to fix any imperfections on your ceiling. So, if you have any holes or cracks on the ceiling, you need to repair them. And to do that, you can consider using spackle or caulk since they can fill in any holes or cracks completely.

As a good measure, you can also rub your ceiling with sandpaper. It will flatten out any imperfections and give you a smooth surface that will form a better bond with the paint. However, this step is not necessary if you have a textured ceiling, as it can affect the texture. Although, painting a textured ceiling is a different task for newbies and DIYers.

Step 4: Tape Off Walls Along The Top Edge

You need to apply painter’s tape along the top edges of your wall and on the crown molding. That will prevent the ceiling paint from touching the areas when you are using the roller near their edges. Make sure you use tape that is at least two inches thick so you can mask them off properly.

If there are vents, smoke alarms, or other unremovable fixtures on the ceiling, then you need to tape them off as well. This will keep the roller marks off them and also prevent any damage. On that note, if you wish to paint the walls as well, applying painter’s tape will not be necessary.

Step 5: Prime The Ceiling And Cut Along The Edges And Corners

Before applying the ceiling paint, it is necessary to prime the ceiling. The primer you need to use for this purpose depends on the type of ceiling you have. For smooth ceilings, you may use interior latex drywall primer, and for textured ceilings, high build primer can be used.

After you have applied the primer, you need to let it dry for a while. Once it has completely dried, cut along the corners and edges of the ceiling. Meaning, apply paint along these edges and corners with a brush.

The reason for doing this is to cover these parts with paint, as the roller will not be able to reach them completely. Besides, it will effectively conceal any uneven brush marks along the edges and corners.

Step 6: Apply The Paint On The Ceiling With The Roller

Now that all the above steps are complete, it is finally time to get the paint rolling! Dip your paint roller in the tray to soak it with the paint. Roll off any excess paint by running the roller on the edge of the tray. Then place the roller at one of the corners of your ceiling and slowly roll on the paint.

It is advisable to use slow and gentle strokes when painting, as that will give an even layer of paint. Also, we would suggest that you start by painting in small sections instead of rolling over the entire ceiling at once. This will prevent any uneven overlapping of the paint and minimize the overlap marks left behind.

However, it might not be possible to avoid lap marks altogether. Especially along the edges and corners, where you have already applied paint, the lap marks may become too prominent. So, to conceal them, gently roll over the lap marks while they are still wet to get an even paint texture.

Step 7: Dry The Paint And Apply A Second Coating If Necessary

Once the paint has been applied, you need to let it sit for a while so that the wet paint can dry completely. After the paint has dried, you may choose to apply another coating over it to give your ceiling a deeper and even coloration. And if you notice any imperfections or irregularities, you can rectify them with the second coating.

Now, applying the second coat of paint is not mandatory, so if you are satisfied with the first coat, you can skip it altogether. But if you choose to do it, then you need to follow the same procedure as described in the previous step. You will need to allow the second layer to dry as well before wrapping it up.

Young Asian male construction worker Work as a house painter Painting the ceiling inside the house and using a white primer paint roller on the construction site. Tips For Painting The Ceiling With A Roller.

Tips For Painting The Ceiling With A Roller

In this section, we would like to provide some helpful painting tips for you to keep in mind. If you follow these tips, painting your ceiling with a roller will be a breeze.

1. Select A High-Quality Paint

You need to get good quality paint for your ceiling to give it a richer color. Such ceiling paint will not dry off very quickly, preventing it from leaving behind unsightly lap marks.

Conversely, it won’t take a lot of time to dry either, so you won’t have to wait for a long time to finish your painting. Furthermore, with good quality paint, only one coat of paint will be enough.

2. Choose A Suitable Color

Typically, you might be inclined to go with white or any other lighter colors. But don’t be afraid to experiment with different color options. If you select another color besides white, that might make your room feel more spacious and give it a professional-looking finish.

3. Follow All Safety Guidelines

Safety is of paramount importance when painting the ceiling. So, you need to make sure that you follow all guidelines and instructions. Always wear protective equipment, such as goggles, masks, and hair covers. Also, make sure not to paint directly overhead, as the paint may splatter all over you in that case. 

If your ceiling is too high, you can use a step ladder or a paint roller extension rod. That will be a lot safer than straining your arms, neck, and shoulders. And make sure to clean up properly after you are done painting.

4. Always Roll Slowly And Gently

When you paint a ceiling with a roller, you should always be gentle and slow. Be careful not to apply too much pressure, as that will make the painting uneven. The same will happen if you roll too quickly, as the paint will not be properly transferred to the surface.

Maintain a uniform pressure and pacing throughout the process. And try to move the roller in a single direction for the most part. To spread the paint in a smooth and consistent manner, move the roller in both forward and backward motions evenly.

5. Use A Suitable Roller Nap

If you have a textured or popcorn ceiling, you will need to use a suitable roller nap as well. The roller nap refers to the width of the material on the roller cover, which absorbs the wet paint and transfers it to the surface. 

There are different roller naps, and each has a specific usage scenario. For a smooth ceiling, you need to use a thin roller nap, while for a textured ceiling, a thicker roller nap is more suitable.

Rear view of painter paints the ceiling with a roller in room. How To Paint A Ceiling With A Roller Frequently Asked Questions.

How To Paint A Ceiling With A Roller Frequently Asked Questions ?

How Long Does It Take To Paint The Ceiling With A Roller?

Usually, the whole process of painting a ceiling takes one whole day or two days at the most. However, this duration is not set in stone, and it may vary based on how much effort you want to put in and the area of your ceiling.

If you are in no hurry, then you may allocate more than two days to get the painting done. Likewise, if the surface area of your ceiling is large, it might require some more time to complete.

How Much Paint Do You Need For Your Ceiling?

The amount of paint required depends on the surface area of your ceiling, as well as the number of layers you want to apply. One gallon of paint can sufficiently cover around 300 to 400 square feet. 

You first need to calculate the square footage of your ceiling by multiplying its length and breadth. If you divide that number by the coverage area of your paint, you will know how much paint is necessary.

In case you want to apply a double coat, the paint required will consequently double, so keep that in mind as well.

What Type Of Paint Is Best For The Ceiling?

Any normal paint that you use for the interior walls of your house can be used to paint the ceiling. However, if you want, you can use a special ceiling paint that is available on the market. Such paints have a matte or soft, flat sheen to make the ceiling stand out from the walls.

Should You Paint The Ceiling Before Or After The Walls?

If you are planning to paint an entire room, we would suggest that you start by painting the ceiling first. Then you can gradually work your way down to the walls. Not only will this be convenient, but it will also be a less messy job.

ideal for websites and magazines layouts. How To Paint A Ceiling With A Roller Final Words.

How To Paint A Ceiling With A Roller Final Words

The ceiling is an integral part of your home’s interior so it is crucial that you pay equal attention to it, just like the other walls of your home. Whether it’s your living room or basement, a ceiling must get a fresh coat of paint from time to time. Although, choosing paints for basement ceiling is slightly different from regular ceiling paints, due to its damp-proofing and mold-resistant nature. 

That’s why we have prepared this informative, stepwise guide so that you can easily paint it with a roller. So, it is time that you shrugged off your fear of painting ceilings and gave them the love they deserve. We have also included some tips to make the work even easier for you. 

With that, we have reached the end of this guide. We hope you enjoyed reading it. 

Take care, folks! 

If you’re looking for paint for furniture, then Farrow And Ball has a lot to offer. 

The brand is known for its high-quality, durable paints for different surfaces. However, first-time DIY painters may get anxious, as painting furniture with these paints requires proper cleanup and priming of the surface. 

And that’s where we come in. Dive in for all the know-how! 

The Preparation 

The Preparation 

No surprises here- the first step in painting furniture is to clean and smoothen the surface so that the new paint adheres properly. And here’s how to do that effectively:

Step 1: Clean The Surface

Start by getting rid of any loose dirt or debris from the surface using a vacuum cleaner. And since outdoor furniture is more prone to dust, you may want to consider vacuuming multiple times to clean it properly.

However, ensure that the setting isn’t too high; otherwise, you may risk damaging the furniture. 

Step 2: Sand The Surface

Now, grab a sander and begin sanding the piece of furniture. It’s usually recommended not to skip this step, as sanding will help remove the existing paint, sheen, and varnish from surfaces like previously painted wood.

Begin sanding the wooden surface with a low sandpaper grit (like 100) and gradually move up for a smooth finish. While low grit sandpapers are coarser and can remove larger irregularities, the high grit ones are finer and ideal for finishing off the process to make the paint adhere better.

In case of metal surfaces, you may want to choose higher grits (in the 300s), which will help smoothen any bumps as well as remove stubborn rust. However, you shouldn’t go above a 140-grit sandpaper for sanding plastic furniture, as it doesn’t really need too much finesse.

If you don’t have an orbital sander handy, then you can wrap the sandpaper around a sanding block to get the job done. Naturally, this alternative will take more time, so plan the painting schedule accordingly.

On that note, you can use this technique to lightly sand around the curves or tight corners of the furniture. Don’t apply too much pressure, as it may damage these areas or remove any design specific to these parts.

Step 3- Cleaning The Surface (Again)

Whether you’ve sanded solid wood, metal, or plastic furniture, it will produce a lot of debris and dust, which should be cleaned thoroughly. Here again, you’d want to start by dusting the loose debris before going in with soap and water. Remember that any unwanted particle on the surface can result in an uneven or distorted finish.

Furthermore, you can use either normal or sugar soap, but don’t use too much water. Both wood and metal don’t tolerate excess moisture well, so the surface may get damaged if the furniture doesn’t dry properly.

Likewise, use methylated or white spirit to eliminate any greasy or oily residue from wooden surfaces. This is specifically important for new wood, as it may have sticky resin knots that should be removed before you paint the surface. Then, get the patches treated with a wood filler before applying the primer.

Step 4- Priming

Applying primer before the paint gives it a nice surface to stick on to, as well as makes the paint more durable in the long run. In this regard, use an all-surface primer, which will be compatible with wood, metal, and plastic. 

To cut corners, go over the larger areas with a small foam roller and use a synthetic bristle brush for the tight spots. And the number of coats you employ will depend on the formula of the primer, so check the manufacturer’s instructions.

In case of multiple coats, let each of the layers dry properly before applying the next one.

How To Paint The Furniture?

With the preparation part done and dusted, it’s time to get your hands on paint brushes and your favorite Farrow Ball paint tub. But the process will depend on the kind of surface you’re painting.

For wood that has been previously painted, apply one coat of the brand’s “wooder primer and undercoat” in the shade that best matches the topcoat paint color. Then, go with two coats of the topcoat, allowing the first layer sufficient drying time before applying the second coat.

However, bare wooden surfaces will absorb the primer faster and more effectively, which is why it’s a good idea to dilute the undercoat by adding about 20% water of the total amount being used. Apply an even layer, followed by a drying time of at least 4 hours and an undiluted coat of the same.

Once the undiluted coat dries completely, apply one layer of your preferred topcoat, let it dry thoroughly, and finish off with two coats of modern eggshell paint. 

We’d advise using a fine-bristled synthetic brush for this step to get the best possible results. Besides, you can browse the brand website to look for other options (like estate eggshell or full gloss). These are compatible with non-wooden surfaces as well and render unique finishes to breathe new life into your old furniture.

How To Paint Furniture With Farrow And Ball Frequently Asked Questions ?

Can You Use Farrow And Ball Paint For Antique Furniture?

Yes, you can use Farrow And Ball paint for antique furniture like a chest of drawers, irrespective of whether they’re painted or unpainted. However, you will need to handle the piece with care, especially when it comes to sanding and priming the surface.

Does Farrow And Ball Manufacture Paints For Walls And Ceilings?

Farrow And Ball has a special “California Collection” manufactured in collaboration with renowned international designer Kelly Wearstler. It comprises eight distinct “sun-kissed” shades meant for indoor and outdoor walls, ceilings, and skirting boards. 

These neutral paint colors suit most style preferences, so you can choose a color that best matches the existing decor of the space.

How To Apply Glaze To Painted Furniture?

Once the paint on the furniture is dry, prepare the glaze by shaking its can thoroughly. Open the lid and use a brush to mix it for another minute. Then, use a flat brush to apply it to the furniture while paying attention to the nooks and crannies, as well as other parts prone to damage. 

Damp a cloth and use it to take off the excess glaze immediately according to the final look you want. If you end up removing too much of it, just use a small amount to re-apply it. Now, that’s how you apply glaze to painted furniture.

How To Paint Furniture With Farrow And Ball Final Words

How To Paint Furniture With Farrow And Ball Final Words

That brings us to the end of our guide today.

But before we wrap up, here are a few tips that will make the overall painting process easier. If you haven’t worked with Farrow and Ball paints before or aren’t sure about the color, get some tester pots and apply the paint to a small section of the furniture. 

And while painting, take out the required amount in a paint tray instead of dipping the brush constantly in the can. This will prevent the paint from constant exposure to wind and moisture.

See you next time!

Humidity is an unfortunate by-product of the lovely rains, which can be mitigated by getting a dehumidifier for your bedroom.

A dehumidifier can help reduce the humidity level of a room, but there is one small catch to them: figuring out the right setting. Since these appliances come in many models and sizes, picking out one that suits your room and residential temperature becomes vital to their success.

So, what should the ideal temperature setting be for your bedroom? The ideal setting should be between 70 and 90 degrees F for residential refrigerant dehumidifiers. But there are other factors that need to be looked into - which is why we have curated this guide. 

Relative Humidity

The term ‘relative humidity’ refers to the amount of moisture present in the atmosphere in relation to what would be present in saturated air. If the temperature is high, the amount of moisture the air can hold is also high, and vice versa.

Every part of your home will have a different relative humidity depending on where they are situated. If you live close to a forest or a beach, you’ll experience a higher level of humidity, making a dehumidifier all but necessary.

The relative humidity level will contribute to your decision of getting a dehumidifier, if it hasn’t already.

How Does A Dehumidifier Work

Air purifier , Business woman use filter for clean room in a living room. How Does A Dehumidifier Work.

To put it simply, a home dehumidifier reduces the relative humidity of the air by either refrigeration or absorption/adsorption. The two methods are equally effective in stopping the rise of humidity levels in your home.

1. Refrigeration

Most dehumidifiers use refrigeration as their primary way of reducing the relative humidity in your home by letting in warm air through a fan in the device. The warm, moist air passes over pipes containing coolants, condensing the moisture in the air, after which the air is allowed back into the room. This improves the air quality in addition to lowering the moisture levels of the room.

2. Absorption/Adsorption

Some dehumidifiers reduce the moisture levels of the room by absorbing the water content out of the air. It involves drawing in air through a duct, which is then passed through a rotating wheel that absorbs the moisture. Dry air is then allowed back into the room.

The way absorption and adsorption differ is that absorption involves water soaking into a material, while adsorption has the moisture content picked up on the surface of the material.

Utilizing Dehumidifiers

If your house feels very humid during the summer, you can put a dehumidifier to good use and trap the moisture in the air. There is no clear-cut temperature value you can set on your dehumidifier to keep the humidity perfectly at bay. However, you can use it to keep the moisture in the air low enough to ensure an optimal comfort level.

The objective of using a dehumidifier is to increase your comfort and remove issues born of humidity, such as pests, odors, and mold.

1. Sizing Your Dehumidifier

There is no such thing as a dehumidifier that is perfect for every room.  Dehumidifiers come in all kinds of shapes and sizes, catering to the kind of space they’ll be used in. 

Too small and your dehumidifier will not be effective at all. Too large, and you may end up drying out your skin and hair because of the excess drying agents. Not to mention you’ll end up wasting your money and space on something that can be achieved with a smaller device.

For reference, a dehumidifier as large as a smoke alarm is fine for a bathroom, but too small for a bedroom.

2. Placing The Dehumidifier

The right location to keep your dehumidifier is in the middle of the bedroom. This will allow the device to reduce humidity levels much more efficiently than when placed in the corner.

Close your doors to maximize the dehumidification and cool the room down to save your device from excess load. It’s also a good idea to have an air conditioning unit working in your bedroom with the dehumidifier to distribute the energy expenditure.

3. Maximizing The Efficiency

Remember to turn the device off after a while, as the aforementioned drying agents may have an unintended consequence. It’s important to utilize your dehumidifier in moderation and run it alongside your air conditioner.

4. Maintenance

You’ll need to remove the moisture reserves of the appliance once in a while. Once a month would suffice, if you use your dehumidifier regularly.

Some dehumidifiers will signal you to empty the reserves once full, as they’ll turn off automatically if you don’t.

Ideal Settings For Bedroom Dehumidifiers

Dehumidifier settings vary based on a number of factors, such as the room temperature, humidity levels, and size of the room. Let’s explore these settings in detail.

1. Temperatures

Differences in room temperature will require the dehumidifier to work harder in order to maintain cooler air and a comfortable level in the room. This is because the inside of the condenser will have to be cooler than the surrounding atmosphere to properly condense the humidity. Meaning, if the temperature drops, your dehumidifier will struggle to keep the room temperature low.

Residential dehumidifiers ideally work in the range of 70 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit. Other kinds of dehumidifiers, for example Low Grain Refrigerant or Desiccant dehumidifiers, work more efficiently in different temperature ranges.

2. Humidity Level

You can perform a simple test for humidity levels to know if you should turn the dehumidifier on. If it is excessively high, using your dehumidifier is a no-brainer. You can keep the device on 30-50%, which is considered by most to be the right humidity level.

Test The Humidity Level Of Your Bedroom

To find out the relative humidity of your room, you can perform the ice cube test. While this will not give you the exact figures of the moisture content of your bedroom’s air, it will give you a general idea.

Simply put a few cubes of ice into a glass of water, stir, and wait for a few minutes. If there is no moisture on the outer side of the glass, your room has dry air, which may mean you need a humidifier. 

In case the condensation on the outer side of the glass is high, the air has high moisture content and will require you to use your dehumidifier.

Safety Precautions

The combination of water and electricity is quite the safety hazard, which is why you should read the safety guidelines of your dehumidifier before operating it. You can follow these precautions in addition to the manufacturer’s guide to minimize any risks of dehumidifier-related accidents:

  • Always plug the device in a three pin socket
  • Remove dust build-up from the dehumidifier
  • Wash air filters regularly
  • Check drainage passages for debris
  • Keep the appliance away from the walls, furniture, and curtains
  • Turn it off when not in use
  • Be vigilant for any burning smell or unusual noises

Health Benefits Of Using A Dehumidifier

The benefits of a dehumidifier in the bedroom extend beyond making your afternoons more comfortable, even though they do make the humidity pretty tolerable. They have tangible health and hygienic benefits that can significantly improve your quality of life. Not to mention the elimination of musty smells.

Excess moisture carries with it bacteria and microorganisms that may enter your body when you breathe in. Not only that, but pests like dust mites and cockroaches also thrive in areas with moist air, which are hygienic hazards that must be terminated quickly. You will even see a rise in mold growth in a damp environment.

Dehumidifiers eliminate the very source of the problem by reducing high humidity levels and keeping the temperature low. With dust mites and mold growth in check, you’ll also have lowered chances of an allergic reaction or asthma.

What Temperature Should I Set My Dehumidifier In Bedroom FAQs ?

How long should I run a dehumidifier in my bedroom?

You can safely run a dehumidifier for around 12 hours every day for maximum reduction of your bedroom’s humidity level. This will keep your room feeling fresh for far longer than otherwise.

But, it isn’t a good idea to keep it running 24x7, as it will cause the dry air to have an effect on your skin and hair.

How much energy do dehumidifiers consume?

Dehumidifiers remain turned on for a long time, resulting in their relatively low wattage and hourly electrical usage racking up.

Some dehumidifiers can consume up to 23 kWH of electricity per day, making their electrical consumption a substantial hit on the wallet.

How does a dehumidifier prevent mold growth?

Mold thrives in the presence of warm air and moisture, and the fungi will spread as long as they are in a moist environment. While dehumidifiers don’t kill mold directly, they stop their primary method of transmission and reproduction, thus stopping them from ever taking root.

Should I keep the windows open while using a dehumidifier?

No, you should keep the windows closed while your dehumidifier is running. Open windows invite more moisture, meaning more work for your dehumidifier. Not only does it increase the electrical consumption, but it also keeps the humidity levels from dropping.

Asian woman turning on and using the modern air purifier while staying in the living room, air purifier is a popular appliance - household electricity. Air purifier can help to purify the air. What Temperature Should I Set My Dehumidifier In Bedroom Conclusion.

What Temperature Should I Set My Dehumidifier In Bedroom Conclusion

By keeping the room temperature and bedroom size in mind, you’ll be able to maximize the reduction of indoor relative humidity in your bedroom. If you live in a tropical climate and are on the fence about purchasing a dehumidifier, think of all the sweat and discomfort that high humidity brings.

Scrutinize in great detail the most efficient brand of dehumidifiers for the bedroom and consider looking into the device. Not only will it reduce the humidity level of the room, the indoor air quality will also increase. 

The benefits of a dehumidifier are plenty, and with the best setting, you’ll eliminate discomfort before long.

Painting concrete surfaces is not easy, even if you use the best concrete paints for the purpose. 

It requires a tremendous amount of effort and several tools, including brushes, rollers, and sprayers. Moreover, the chances of accidental spills are high, and you will need to be prepared to remove such paint quickly before it dries, which can be even more difficult. 

This is because there are multiple removal methods, but not all are guaranteed to deliver results in each situation. Also, you need to ensure that the surface does not get damaged while removing the paint, the chances of which are quite high. 

And, the methods that are most effective are generally not very well known to most people. That's why we decided to put together this detailed guide on the subject to help you out. So, without further ado, let's get started! 

How To Remove Concrete Paint

abstract yellow and white color concrete texture background. How To Remove Concrete Paint.

Tools Required

These are the tools you will need to undertake the paint removal process for your concrete surface:

  • Protective gear - This will include gloves and a respirator for dealing with paint fumes
  • Vacuum cleaner or broom - For removing dirt and debris from the surface
  • TSP alternative - Used for cleaning the painted surface
  • Scrub brush - Required for scrubbing the concrete surface
  • Putty knife (optional) - Can help remove chipped-off paint
  • Paint stripper - For removing the paint while also cleaning the surface
  • Power washer or hose - Used for washing away the paint

The Paint Removal Process

1. Cleaning The Concrete Surface

Before you get down to the actual process of removing the paint, it is important to prepare the concrete surface properly for the purpose. And that involves cleaning the surface to remove debris or dirt using a vacuum cleaner or a broom. 

Once that is done, you will need to scrub the surface using a solution of warm water and trisodium phosphate alternative (TSP) or warm water and soap. For scrubbing, use a wide wire brush that can effectively remove dust or dirt particles lodged or embedded into the surface. 

Also, make sure to wear protective gear such as gloves, goggles, and long sleeves if using TSP instead of an alternative. This is because it is highly toxic and can cause eye and skin irritation. 

2. Application Of A Paint Stripper

You may notice that some of the paint has already started to chip during the cleaning process. If that happens, try to scrape away as much paint as possible and apply a paint stripper to the remaining area.

Generally, mineral or turpentine spirits can be used for the purpose, but if they do not work, look for a paint stripper especially suited for concrete surfaces. 

3. Leaving The Paint Stripper To Set

After applying the paint stripper to the concrete surface, you will need to leave it for some time and let it do its job. This period may vary from 30 minutes to over eight hours, depending on various factors, such as the area to be cleaned and the type of paint used. 

Also, keep in mind that applying the paint stripper in extremely hot or windy conditions can cause it to dry prematurely. 

4. Scrubbing The Surface

Once the paint stripper has been left for an adequate period, it is time to scrub the surface again using your wide-wire brush. Keep on scrubbing until no more paint can be removed. You can also use warm soapy water with the brush in the case of latex paint, but it will not be effective in the case of oil-based paint. 

Similarly, spray paint can be harder to remove since it gets applied quickly in multiple layers and often requires several applications of the chosen removal method. 

5. Using A Power Washer

The best way to remove stubborn paint stains that cannot be removed simply by scrubbing is to use a power washer or high-powered garden hose. A power washer is ideal for exterior surfaces such as a basketball court or patio. Therefore, it can provide effective results even if you have used the paint for outdoor concrete basketball court.

Other surfaces where a power washer can be used include driveways and walkways.  

6. Repeating The Steps

If you cannot remove the paint completely with these steps, simply repeat them by reapplying the chemical paint stripper and scrubbing the surface.  

7. Final Cleaning

Once the paint has been removed completely, use the power hose to rinse the surface and remove all the paint stripper and other chemicals used during the process. After the surface dries, you can paint or seal it as required. 

Staining or sealing the concrete surface will help improve its appearance while protecting it from the elements and harmful UV rays. 

Paint Removal Methods That Do Not Require Chemicals

old grunge wall texture background. Paint Removal Methods That Do Not Require Chemicals.

Due to the health risks of chemical paint removal techniques, many people prefer using more natural methods. In this section, we've mentioned a few of them so you can try them out before resorting to methods that utilize TSP or similar chemicals. 

Just keep in mind that the first step in all paint removal methods is to clean the surface thoroughly for maximum effectiveness. So that you can paint over peeling paint on concrete effortlessly and create a visible flawless new surface. 

1. Sandblasting

Sandblasting can help you effectively remove paint from outdoor and indoor concrete surfaces without relying on chemical paint strippers. But it can damage the surface, so be careful and work slowly when using this device.  

Additionally, wear equipment like safety glasses, ear protection, and a face mask because silica in crystalized form is dangerous and should not be inhaled. Wearing long sleeves can also help provide protection to your skin. 

For removing concrete paint, turn the sandblaster on and slowly open the valve, letting out the sand particles. You will need to slowly move the machine using upward and downward motions, covering the painted area. Also, avoid pointing the nozzle at one spot for long, as that can damage the surface. 

2. With A Soda Blaster

A less aggressive and abrasive option than sandblasting is soda blasting, which can help remove stubborn paint stains without causing any damage to the concrete underneath. Soda blasters utilize sodium bicarbonate in granular form for removing paint from concrete floors and other surfaces and can even be used to remove epoxy off your concrete surfaces.

You can easily rent a soda blaster from the local hardware store and will also need some industrial-grade sodium bicarbonate. Common baking soda will not work for paint removal purposes. 

This technique will release fine particles of dust into the air, so wear appropriate protective gear, including gloves, safety glasses, and a mask. Also, make sure that the compound does not come into contact with any nearby plants as its pH level is very high, which can harm them. 

3. Pressure Washing The Surface

A pressure washer can be very effective for removing paint from exterior concrete surfaces such as the garage floor. If you do not own one, check the nearby hardware stores where they can be rented. Select a pressure washer with a flow rate of four gallons a minute and a pressure class of 3000 psi at the very least. 

When using the washer, make sure that the nozzle range lies between 15 and 25 degrees, which will create a powerful spray and can even help remove spray paint. The distance between the wand and the surface should be one foot, at the very least.

Once ready, hold the washer at a downward angle and sweep it across the surface. At this angle and distance, the water will be strong enough to remove stubborn paint residue without causing any damage. 

4. With A Floor Grinder

One of the fastest techniques of removing paint from any concrete surface involves using a floor grinder. This machine uses light abrasion for paint removal, resulting in a smoother concrete surface afterward. 

After using the machine to remove the paint, it is a good idea to reseal or repaint it to keep it protected and improve its appearance. You can easily rent walk-behind or handheld floor grinders from nearby hardware stores. 

Again, this method will generate tiny dust particles, even though some floor grinders have attachments that reduce dust, making cleaning up easier. Even in that case, be sure to wear safety clothing during the paint removal process. 

5. Using Vinegar

One of the safest and most economical methods of removing concrete paint involves using vinegar. Vinegar is easily available in most households and is very effective as a paint remover. It also does not harm the environment and removes stains from oil-based paints, which cannot be removed easily using many other methods. 

But when using vinegar cleaner on a concrete surface with a finish coating or sealer, you should test it and ensure that it is safe for the surface. 

For this method, warm the vinegar using your microwave or stove until it becomes hot but do not boil it. Then, use a paint brush or sponge to apply it onto the painted surface before letting it soak for at least 15 minutes. 

As the paint starts to separate from the surface, it will start bubbling. For removing incredibly stubborn stains, you may need to apply more vinegar after an interval of 15 minutes and again let it lie for some time before removing. 

Finally, remove the paint using of the best paint scrapers or wire scrub brush and wash the surface using water and soap. Then, leave it to dry. 

6. With Paint Thinner

As mentioned, spray and oil-based paints can be incredibly difficult to remove. And if all other methods fail, you may need to depend on a paint thinner used for commercial applications to remove such paints. But before applying it, test a small area by applying the thinner and leaving it for a few hours.

If the thinner does not damage the surface, apply it to the painted surface and leave it to soak. This period can vary between six and eight hours. Then, use a paint scraper or a stiff brush to remove the loosened paint, followed by washing and rinsing the area to remove any chemical residue. 

Commercial paint thinners also contain harsh chemicals, and before handling, you should wear protective gear to prevent any contact with the skin and ensure safety. 

7. Using A Homemade Paint Stripper

You can easily create a homemade paint stripper using absorbent materials such as cat litter and clay to remove paint stains from concrete. These materials remove paint by absorbing it as they dry, working in a manner similar to paint thinner and making it easy to scrape away any remaining paint. 

For making your homemade paint stripper, you will need a cup of cat litter, one cup of well-ground clay, and half a cup of paint thinner. Combine all the ingredients together until they form a paste, and apply this to the painted area. Make sure to wear protective gloves during application. 

Once done, let the mixture dry for about two hours, and then remove the loose paint using a paint scraper or wire scrub brush before rinsing the surface. 

8. With Dishwashing Soap

If the paint is still wet, you can simply clean the concrete surface using soapy water to remove it. Use two tablespoons of dishwashing soap and a cup of hot water and scrub the surface with a brush or sponge to remove the paint. After that, rinse the surface with fresh water and check for paint residue. 

If some paint is still left, use any of the above techniques to remove it but be careful while disposing of the paint. Most paints are toxic to plants and can be harmful to the environment. 

How To Remove Paint From Concrete Frequently Asked Questions ?

How Much Pressure Does A Power Washer Require To Remove Concrete Paint?

A power washer should have a range of 2000 psi to 4000 psi for removing concrete paint. Ideally, a power washer with a 3000 psi rating is more than enough for most purposes. 

Is It Necessary To Prime Exterior Concrete Before Painting?

Many people are bothered by the question, “do I need to prime exterior concrete before painting?” We’d like to mention that it is a crucial part of painting concrete and plays a significant role in determining the final result. Without proper priming, the exterior surface will have a poor finish, and the paint will have a higher chance of cracking and peeling quickly.

How Long Does Concrete Paint Last?

While the period for which concrete paint lasts depends upon the quality of the paint used and the use of the surface, it generally ranges from three to five years. After that period, you will need to apply a new coat. 

Roughly pink gold painted concrete wall surface background. How To Remove Paint From Concrete Final Thoughts.

How To Remove Paint From Concrete Final Thoughts

Removing paint from a concrete surface can often take considerable time and effort, besides multiple applications of different techniques. In some cases, you may not be entirely successful in removing it and should consider alternative options. For accidental paint spills, you can try to paint over the entire area to provide uniformity. 

Or hire professional paint removal services, though this will involve some financial investment. In any case, the options are numerous, and you should think carefully before deciding. Also, when using any DIY paint removal techniques, make sure to wear safety equipment and take all the necessary precautions. 

With that said, it is time to conclude this guide. 

If you missed it, please checkout our previous article on how to store clay in a safe place for future use and in a way that can be used later without the clay getting damaged.

Until next time! 

In most cases, an AC unit should have 350 to 400 CFM per ton of cooling for the most effective results. But sometimes, the number of CFMs required may be more or less depending on certain factors like humidity and HVAC unit size.

If you’re planning to get a new air conditioner installed, the CFM rating is one of the most important things to consider.

People generally assume an AC unit with a higher CFM rating offers better cooling. But this is not always the case, which is why learning about how many CFM per ton of cooling you require is quite essential.

And that’s just what this detailed guide can help you do. So, let’s start!

What Does CFM Refer To In Air Conditioning?

What Does CFM Refer To In Air Conditioning?

CFM, or cubic feet per minute, is a measurement unit that determines the amount of air that an air conditioning unit can move in a minute. A higher CFM means that your air conditioner can move a larger amount of air in that time. Generally, you require 350-400 CFM for every 12,000 British Thermal Units or BTUs for optimal cooling.

BTU is the measurement unit used to measure the cooling power of an air conditioning system, and 12,000 BTUs are equal to one ton. It is a common misconception that a higher CFM offers better cooling. In reality, there are other factors, such as BTUs, that determine how effective your air conditioner is.

The cooling capacity of air conditioning systems installed in homes generally ranges from 18,000 BTUs to 60,000 BTUs, or 1.5 to 5 tons. Other factors that can affect cooling include the climate, home size, installed insulation, and humidity level.

CFM also applies to heating capacity in the same manner. 350 to 400 CFM per 12,000 BTUs provides adequate airflow to help circulate the heated air through the supply ducts. It also pulls cool air back to the air handler or furnace.

A 3-ton HVAC system should have around 1050 to 1200 CFM, while a 3.5-ton one should be able to move 1600 CFM at the very least. But as I mentioned before, this can vary depending on various factors. For instance, if you reside in an area with a hot and humid climate, an HVAC system capable of moving 450 CFM per ton might be a better option.

In contrast, households that are insulated properly may only need an AC unit with a capacity of 350 CFM per ton. I recommend consulting an HVAC technician who can provide accurate information regarding the exact amount of CFMs required for your home.

Calculating CFM

The CFM of a blower depends upon the size of its centrifugal fan and the horsepower capacity of its motor. Every blower fan assembly is given a rating when it is manufactured. And this rating determines how many cubic feet of air it can move in a minute, depending on its speed.

The CFM per square foot depends on the following factors:

  • HVAC system size
  • Blower CFM rating
  • Size of the area where the system is installed

You can use this formula to determine the correct CFM required for a particular room - Tonnage x CFM of the blower / Number of square feet. For instance, a 2000 square foot room that has a 4-ton AC unit with a blower with a 400 CFM rating will have a CFM of:

4-ton AC x 400 CFM blower / 2,000 square feet = 0.8 CFM per square foot. However, including the number of air changes per hour or ACH would require additional calculation. Let’s take another example for this purpose.

A room with an area of 1600 cubic feet and a height of eight feet would need the air to be changed every ten minutes at 160 CFM. This means that the air will need to be changed six times every hour.

For more frequent air changes, a larger amount of air will need to be supplied to the room, and there should also be another return air vent. Calculating the CFM can also be done through various websites that provide tools like online calculators where you just need to enter the data regarding the room and HVAC size.

CFM And HVAC Size

A larger heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system can deliver more CFMs, but this also depends on the size of the blower. Knowing how many CFMs your system can deliver can make it easy to know the CFM requirement of the room it is installed in. It can also help you know how much time it takes to change the air.  

For instance, a 1-ton AC unit has a CFM rating of 350 to 400, while that of a 1.5-ton one will range from 525 to 600. Similarly, a 2-ton AC unit will have a CFM rating ranging from 700 to 800, and a 2.5-ton one will have a rating between 875 and 1000. A 3-ton AC unit can deliver 1050 to 1200 CFMs, and a 3.5-ton one can deliver 1225 to 1400 CFMs. 

Finally, a 4-ton unit has a CFM range of 1400 to 1600 CFMs, while for a 5-ton unit, the CFM can range from 1750 to 2000. Now, let’s look at the furnace capacity, which can also be very useful for airflow calculation. 

A 60,000 BTU furnace generally has a CFM rating ranging from 1750 to 2000, while an 80,000 BTU one will have it between 2320 and 2250. For a 160,000 BTU furnace, this rating lies between 4670 and 5350.  

Standard CFM Rates

As I’ve explained above, when it comes to cooling capacity, 400 CFM per ton is the industry standard. Other flow rates depend on the cooling system you use to lower the room air temperature. 

How Many CFM Per Ton Of Cooling

For High Latent Heat Systems

Latent heat cooling systems use a cooling medium that can change its state depending on the temperature. Such a medium is usually a refrigerant that can change from liquid to gas during the cooling process. For such systems, 350 CFM per ton of cooling capacity is ideal.

Sensible Heat Systems And Heat Pumps

Often heat pumps do not send air through the evaporator or cooling coil but around them. This air is called bypass air, and these systems require 500 CFM per ton of cooling capacity for the best performance.  

Why Do More Humid Climates Require AC Units With Less CFM?

Many people wonder why humid climates require air conditioning systems with less CFM, assuming that more CFMs will be required to cool the environment. However, the reason you need fewer CFMs is related to how an air conditioner operates to remove hot air from its surroundings. 

When an air conditioner cools down a room, it also removes moisture from the area. Cooler air cannot hold as much moisture as warmer air and, therefore, has a lesser amount of latent heat. The process by which HVAC systems remove moisture from the air is called dehumidification, which is also important for removing heat. 

As a rule of thumb, such systems will work much harder in humid climates to get rid of the heat and moisture. But they do not need to move a large amount of air for effective cooling.

Why Do Drier Climates Require More CFMs?

You may think that AC units installed in drier climates will require fewer CFMs since dry air is easier to cool. But in reality, the higher latent heat in dry air makes it harder to cool than air in humid climates. Because of this, an HVAC system is unable to remove as much moisture from the air.

With more moisture, the air still has some heat left remaining, which is why your AC will need more CFMs to cool the house properly. 

Situations Where A Higher CFM Is Needed

Here are a few situations where you may require more CFMs than is needed on average.

1. A Large Sized Home

A larger home will require an air conditioner with a bigger cooling capacity and more CFMs. This is because the air conditioner will have to move a larger amount of air so that all the rooms in the house are cooled properly.

On the other hand, those with smaller houses may not need as many CFMs for effective cooling. 

2. Having Improper Insulation

In the case of houses that are not insulated properly, the cooling system has to work harder to maintain a lower temperature. The building insulation may be poor due to the use of inferior quality insulating materials used in its construction. Similarly, the attic may not be insulated properly, or there may be gaps in windows and doors, allowing air to pass through.  

If your home does not have proper insulation, more CFMs will be required to keep it cool.

3. Residing In A Hot Climate

Households located in areas where the climate is hot will require more CFMs to get rid of moisture. But if the humidity is high and the air contains a lot of moisture, the number of CFMs required may not be as much, as I explained above.

When humidity levels are around 50%, 500 to 600 CFMs per ton will be required.

What Happens If You Do Not Have An Adequate Number Of CFMs?

Having an adequate number of CFMs is crucial to ensure that your AC can function optimally. In the absence of an appropriate number of CFMs, certain issues may arise, which can include:

  • Improper cooling
  • Stuffy and hot rooms
  • Higher power bills
  • Short-cycling of the AC unit
  • More frequent breakdowns
  • Shorter lifespan of the unit

When it comes to the question of how many CFMs are required for a room, there is no standard answer. The ideal number of CFMs will depend on how frequently the air needs to be changed. You can use the room size per square foot to calculate the number of CFMs needed for two air changes per hour or 2 ACH.

A room with an area of 200 square feet will require 53 CFMs at 2 ACH, while one with 500 square feet will need 133 CFMs. Larger rooms, such as those with 2000 or 3000 square feet, will need 533 and 800 CFMs, respectively. 

Air Circulation And Cooling Efficiency

Proper air circulation is also an important factor that should be considered when determining the cooling efficiency of your HVAC system. The reason is that if air cannot circulate properly, such as in a locked room that does not provide any space for air to escape, air pressure builds up inside.

This means that it cannot accept any more air coming from the air conditioner, and there will be no temperature drop, leading to ineffective cooling. To prevent this from happening, you can install a door that is slightly trimmed at the bottom, providing a gap for air to pass through. Ideally, this gap should be ¾ inches for best results.

How Many CFM Per Ton Of Cooling

What Is Better, High CFM Or Low CFM?

To ensure better indoor air quality and more effective cooling, having the right number of CFMs is vital. But the number of CFMs required for different-sized homes can vary, with some needing a higher CFM while others may require a lower one.

Issues With A Higher CFM

Sometimes, having an extremely high CFM can lead to certain problems. One of them is that such a CFM will result in a breeze blowing through your home, which may not be comfortable at all times. This is especially true in winter when you need better heating instead of cooling. 

Similarly, higher CFM can worsen the humidity in very humid climates. Apart from removing heat from the air, your AC unit removes humidity from the air by passing the air over its evaporator coil. This coil is very cold, because of which condensation occurs and turns the moisture in the air to water, which passes through the wastewater pipe and goes into the drain. 

However, when the CFM is too high, air passes over the evaporator coil very quickly without allowing the moisture to condense. Thus, the overall humidity in your home will increase, leading to problems like mildew and mold growth.  

Problems With A Lower CFM

HVAC systems generate a huge amount of heat while operating. If the CFM is too low, proper air circulation cannot take place, and this heat has nowhere to go. When this happens, rooms located near the system can become extremely hot, while those further away will get uncomfortably cold in winter. 

However, during summer, the reverse will take place, with the living space closer to the furnace becoming colder and areas further away becoming hotter. That is why having the right number of CFMs is ideal, which is generally 350 to 400 CFM per ton. 

Indoor air quality is affected by several factors, such as the number of occupants in a room, how the room is used, and others. In some rooms, such as the kitchen, the air contains a lot of moisture and different odors. Similarly, a room used as a home workshop may have a lot of dust.

Rooms with more occupants, such as the dining room, will also have inferior indoor air quality. In all these situations, you will need to change the air more frequently, and that is why the CFM should also be higher.    

Ductwork, CFM, and ACH

To ensure that your rooms get enough CFMs, the size of the ducts making up the HVAC duct system should be large enough. As is obvious, a smaller-sized duct will allow a smaller amount of CFMs to pass through. However, the size is not the only consideration, as the shape also affects how many CFMs are delivered through the HVAC ductwork. 

One of the most challenging tasks for HVAC technicians is determining the most suitable duct size for a specific room. To make the task easier, they generally rely on computer programs that consider factors like the room size, CFM rating of the blower, size of the HVAC system, etc. 

An important factor that can affect how well the HVAC ducts work is static pressure, which refers to the amount of pressure present while the blower fan is in operation. When this pressure is higher, the system has to work harder to supply air and ensure proper air circulation

Tip

When selecting the ductwork size, you need to consider the amount of CFM that has to move through it. 4-inch ducts deliver 20 CFMs, 6-inch ones deliver 75 CFMs, and 8-inch ones deliver 160 CFMs. Keep in mind that the total duct runs should not be more than the CFM output of your AC unit.

Application Of CFMs To Different Types Of HVAC Equipment

All types of HVAC fans come with a rating for CFMs, which lets you know about the ideal CFM for the machine. Both the required ACH and recommended CFM ratings should be considered when looking for components like air purifiers, heat pumps, ductless air conditioners, and others.   

Such ratings are also present for whole-house fans, ceiling fans, dehumidifiers, garage heaters, portable ACs, and attic fans. 

The Relation Between Air Velocity, CFM, And HVAC Equipment

Air velocity is closely related to CFM and should be considered when determining how many CFM per ton is required for lowering the air temperature in a room. It is defined as the quantity of air that is moved per unit of time and is measured in liters/meters per minute (LPM) or feet per minute (FPM). 

This varies significantly for different components of your HVAC system and can determine how effective it is in cooling a particular space. For standard air ducts, the recommended air velocity or air flow ranges from 700 to 900 FPM for residential structures. But it is considerably higher for commercial and industrial systems, generally ranging from 1000 to 1800 FPM.  

For replaceable air filters, the recommended airflow is 700 to 750 FPM, while that for low-velocity disposable ones is 300 FPM. Similarly, the airflow for a washable high-velocity air filter is 650 FPM. A heat pump or condensing coil should have an FPM of 1000, while for the evaporator and cooling coils, it ranges from 400 to 600 FPM. 

Finally, the maximum recommended airflow for a heating coil is 700 FPM.

How Many CFM Per Ton Of Cooling

Final Thoughts

With that, this guide has come to an end, and hopefully, now you know how many CFM per ton of cooling is required. In most situations, 400 CFMs per ton of cooling will be more than adequate, but there may be instances where you need a higher or lower amount of CFMs.

If you’re not sure about the number of CFMs required for proper cooling in your home, I recommend talking to an HVAC professional. Such professionals can perform an inspection of the house and recommend the most suitable system that can provide the required number of CFMs.   

This will help make your home comfortably cool without worrying about the technical aspects. 

Using stencils, a foam roller, and concrete paints, you can enliven your concrete patio with a stylish makeover! 

Nothing brightens a beautiful Sunday morning like sitting on your beautiful, artistically designed patio. And though you always have the option of calling professionals to do the job for you, it will lack a personal touch that only you can bring. 

Luckily, the process is fairly simple, and the ideas for the desired aesthetic of your porch are abundant. You are bound to find something that suits your tastes perfectly. 

So, without further ado, here’s how you can add that personal touch to your concrete porch! 

11 Ideas For Painting Concrete Porch

11 Ideas For Painting Concrete Porch

1. Graphic Stencils

Repeating patterns are pleasing to the eye. With graphic stencils, you can create an appealing look for your patio to inspire a mood of your choice. 

You can also get creative and mix a few concrete driveway ideas and designs to bring a fresh look to the patio floor. 

2. Wooden Finish

The concrete texture may not be to everyone’s liking. Not helping the matter is its dull gray color that is simply too dull to inspire any feeling within. What you can do about this is to make it appear wooden by using paint and clever brushwork. 

With a wooden finish, your porch floor will instantly appear more lively and classy. 

3. Thick Stripes

In a similar vein to graphic stencils, thick stripes are aesthetically pleasing when spaced out evenly. Use contrasting colors or stick to the simple gray-and-white combination to bring variation to the monotonous look of a concrete patio. 

The great thing about using a stripe motif is that it’s easy to execute for pretty much anyone. 

4. Painted Tiles

Tiling your floor may be expensive, but using clever brushwork and paint can achieve a fragmented look that seems like tiles. All you need is your preferred variety of paint and stencils to achieve this look. From floor epoxy to acrylic, you can utilize many different kinds of paints for this. 

Make your porch floor seem premium with the faux tile design. 

5. Rock Paint

You can find a mix of colors that you can use to make your patio floor appear like natural rock. Combine this with natural decorations, and you’ll have a patio that blends seamlessly into the décor. 

6. Abstract Patterns

Mix and match different paints to achieve your own abstract look. Plan how your concrete patio is going to look like, and execute it with a combination of decorative paint and a customized paint roller. 

Feel free to experiment with the colors to make your porch floor stand out among others. 

7. Stained Concrete Patio

You can create an artistically stained concrete porch floor by using weak acid along with salts. Acid opens up the pores in your floor, and salt acts as a catalyst for a chemical reaction, resulting in the concrete surface losing color. 

The concrete stain will be one-of-a-kind, thanks to the unpredictable nature of acids. However, it pays to be careful when handling acid to avoid excessive and unsightly splotches. 

8. Experiment With Color Schemes

This is where your creativity will shine the most. With the use of various coloring methods, you can replicate the look of natural materials like stone or earth or enhance your porch floor further by taking inspiration from murals and artwork. Now, you’re probably thinking, how to paint a garage door in a way that matches the concrete porch or patio paint? 

Contrast is key when it comes to painting your porch. Even if you choose to keep your concrete surface a solid color, the garage door’s color and patio décor will enhance its appearance by bringing about a change to the monotony. 

The resulting look can be funky or elegant, or it can include floral designs or bold accent colors. All you’ll have to do is broaden the horizons of your imagination. 

9. Checkerboard Pattern

The checkerboard pattern is a classic, timeless design that you can modify to add a fresh angle. Split the squares in half, transform them into a geometric design, and combine them with décor and furniture of contrasting colors for a modern look. 

10. A Glossy Finish

You may opt to coat the entire surface of your concrete patio with semi-gloss latex paint. The paint will form a protective layer over the floor and give it a gorgeous, fresh look that will always appear new. What’s more is that it makes cleaning more manageable as well, since dirt won’t be able to stick to the surface as readily. 

Cast aside the worries of your concrete floor appearing dull with a glossy, modern finish. 

11. Experiment With Textures

You can customize not only the look but the feel of the concrete as well. Be it with concrete panels to create a variation against the solid color or simpler, brick-like textures, you’ll be looking at a significant transformation of your patio. 

With the right kinds of paint color, you may morph your concrete porch into appearing sand-like or make variations thereof. 

How To Paint A Concrete Porch Or Patio

How To Paint A Concrete Porch Or Patio

Painting a concrete floor is fairly straightforward, a process that demands your time only. Not only are professionals expensive to hire for something as simple, but they may also end up taking longer to finish the job. And that’s not ordinarily ideal. 

With the following steps, you can implement the ideas mentioned earlier and have the perfect painted concrete porch. 

1. Wash The Concrete Patio

You can sweep debris and unwanted elements on your previously painted concrete porch away with a leaf blower or a good old-fashioned clean broom.  

By using a pressure washer, you can remove all the unwanted elements from the concrete surface. If you don’t own a pressure washer, use your garden hose to thoroughly rinse the concrete and scrub the floor with a wire brush. The surface has to be free of any blemishes before you proceed and so, make sure you do so thoroughly. 

2. Repair Cracks And Irregularities

Next, you’ll need to repair any damage that may be present on your concrete surface. Apply concrete caulk sealant where you spot cracks and irregularities and allow it to dry for the next day. There are handy applicators that make placing caulk easier, which may be worth looking into. 

Next, you can use sandpaper or a wire brush to smooth the excess caulk out, after which you can use a vacuum cleaner to clear out the debris. Be wary of the dust it produces, and keep a broom nearby for quick sweeps. 

If your concrete porch is damaged severely, you may have to contact professionals for help. Otherwise, it may lead to a botched paint job or chipping prematurely. 

3. Etch The Concrete Floor

No one likes a messy finish and so filling up pores in your concrete patio is paramount. To do so, you can make use of a powerful chemical known as muriatic acid. Of course, being highly reactive, you should take care while handling the acid. Ensure you don the appropriate protective gear before you get etching’. 

Apply it evenly on your concrete porch using a spraying bottle. Now, it’s also essential to consider which material the bottle is made of. An ordinary plastic bottle will serve just fine as long as the acid is diluted sufficiently, but it’s best to have one made from PVC. 

Allow the acid to perform its task for around 10 minutes, after which you can rinse it off with a garden hose. 

4. Prime The Concrete Porch

Here’s where the long stretch begins. Priming and painting is a lengthy process that can take days to finish completely, so be sure to vacate your schedule before starting. 

It takes multiple coats of primer to properly prep the patio for painting. Moreover, it has to completely dry between each coat to apply the next one smoothly. 

This is where you bring out your paint roller and painter’s tape. The former applies paint quicker and more consistently than a paintbrush, and you’ll use the latter to cover up areas you don’t want to be painted. 

You’ll be done within a few hours, depending on the size of your porch, before letting the primer dry. It can take up to a full day to properly dry and so, it’s vital to keep in mind that no debris touches the floor. Your patio floor will have noticeable spots if it does happen. 

5. Painting The Porch Or Patio

The painting process is nothing out of the ordinary, especially when it comes to the first coat. With the first coat, you’ll be applying a layer of solid color that acts as a base coat for your design. It’s simple: apply the concrete paint evenly using a paint roller, wait for it to dry, and repeat the process twice. Now comes the fun part. 

There’s a good chance you’re thinking of using stencils to bring that extra elegance or spice to the front porch. Fortunately, there is no shortage of the latest, cutting-edge stencils for you to choose from. From a simple repeated stencil pattern to more abstract ones, the process of using them is essentially the same. The only thing you’ll need to maximize your painting efficiency is a paint sprayer. 

Now, if you’ve used painter’s tape during priming, you’ll need it for stencils as well. Use it to keep the stencil steady while spraying the paint over it. Keep your hands steady and your eyes focused because if the paint goes out of the stencil bounds, there are no quick do-overs. You’ll have to apply a second coat of the base paint over it or just make peace with it. 

Once you’ve applied the concrete paint, remove the stencils using the previously-applied painter’s tape. Allow it to dry and voila, you’re done. 

Ideas For Painting Concrete Porch Frequently Asked Questions ?

How do you keep paint from running under stencils?

You can temporarily stick your stencils to the patio to ensure the paint does not bleed in. To do this, use a mild, water-based adhesive on the back of your stencil and seal it to the surface. 

After you’ve painted over the stencil, peel it off and you’ll find no visible signs of bleeding. 

Which is the most long-lasting paint for concrete?

You can choose epoxy if you need the pattern to last as long as possible. Epoxy resin nets you not only a durable finish but a pretty design as well. 

It is worth noting that due to the acrylic plastic base, it lasts quite a long while as well while offering a wider variety of colors in comparison to epoxy. 

What can you do to make my concrete patio less slippery?

You can use rock salt to create small pores on the surface of your patio by applying it on wet concrete and allowing it to cure. Once the salt has done its job, you’ll be left with a textured finish that provides excellent traction as well. 

How long does it take for floor epoxy to cure?

Floor epoxy can take upwards of nine hours to dry at room temperature. Any cooler, and the drying time rises to 18 hours. If you’re applying multiple coats, it could take several days before the concrete porch surface is ready to be walked on again. 

Ideas For Painting Concrete Porch Conclusion

Ideas For Painting Concrete Porch Conclusion

Your patio will add to the impression anyone has of your house, and it should showcase a bit of your personality. Add a visual flair to your home with your painted concrete porch, and make it stand out among others. 

Stencils are a no-brainer for most purposes, and you can easily prepare them without hired aid. You can get creative; perhaps choose a color and pattern that will define the look of your home altogether. 

No matter your choice, it’s critical to remember that painting your concrete porch will take days’ time. If you’ve opted for a more complex layout, it could be a full week before you can use it. And before long, your dream patio will be ready to be gaped at again! 

A blower fan and a regular fan have different uses, and you should keep that in mind before deciding on one. While fans create a flow of air to keep the entire room cool, blowers provide a strong airflow in a specific direction. 

There are many people who confuse fans with blowers and blower fans are same and also think that these two appliances can be used interchangeably. But that’s not the case, as these two appliances are technically different and serve different purposes. 

Blowers are more suited for industrial applications, whereas fans are used pretty much everywhere. So, today, we are going to discuss what makes these two devices different from each other. This will help you understand how to make the most of them. 

Let’s dive in! 

Difference Between A Fan And A Blower Fan

Retro vintage tabletop fan isolated on a blue background. Difference Between A Fan And A Blower Fan.

If you are looking for direct and powerful airflow, there’s nothing better than getting your hands on an air blower. On the other hand, fans come with a range of modern features that might not be present in blowers. 

Also, blower fans are not well-suited for wide-cooling. A fan circulates air better in a large space and is great for improving indoor air quality. Moreover, fans score better on energy efficiency, as the power bills will not drive a hole in your pockets. 

To give you a better understanding of how these two devices are different, let us tell you what the American Society of Mechanical Engineering (ASME) has to say. According to ASME, fans and blower fans should primarily be differentiated on the basis of suction pressure and discharge pressure ratio. 

Suction Pressure And Discharge Pressure

Going by ASME findings, fans and blowers have unique suction and discharge pressure ratios. Fans come with a pressure ratio up to 1.11. On the other hand, a blower mostly has a pressure ratio ranging between 1.11 and 1.2. 

It is important to keep in mind that fans and blower fans both are ventilation devices that bring in air and throw some air out when they are functional. And during this process, a lot of dust, dirt and contaminants also get thrown out or eliminated. For example, industrial blower fans mostly have to handle high temperatures, chemicals and oil depending on the industry in which they are installed.

To help you understand better, here a quick summary of differences between fans and blower fans.

Fan Blower Fans
An electronic machine A mechanical device
Uses blades for functioning Uses impellers for rotation
Runs on low power High electricity consumption
Provides medium to high air flow depending on the motor Offers higher air flow compared to fans
Most common types include industrial axis fan, radial, and propeller fans Two most common varieties are positive displacement blowers and centrifugal fans

Different Uses For Blower Fans And Fans

Mechanical engineers will also tell you that blower fans and normal fans are used differently as their functions are pretty different. So, in this section, we will quickly take a look at where and when these appliances can be put to the best use. 

1. Drying

When it comes to drying things, air blowers are definitely a great bet. They generally use centrifugal force and generate powerful airflow that dries up moisture pretty quickly. It ensures that the moisture-laden air is blown away and fresh air comes in to make the drying process super efficient. 

Unlike fans, drying air blowers are great at producing strong airflow, making them better suited for drying activities. 

2. Cooling

Summer afternoons might make you feel like roasted marshmallows dripping with sweat! You might even find the ice in your beverage melting even before taking a sip. Wondering what can bring you relief in these moments?

For cooling and air conditioning purposes, there’s nothing better than a fan. Unlike an air blower, a fan can provide area-wide cooling. So, you can chill in the room and feel the surrounding air turning cooler because of the fan.

Besides, fans come with electric motors and useful modern features such as remote controls, which make operating them super simple. And because the electricity consumption of fans is pretty low, you do not have to worry even if you leave them on for an entire day. Just don’t leave it running for days, as that might damage the internal combustion engines.  

3. Workshop Usage

Centrifugal blowers and other types of air blowers are well suited for workshop space. Blowers are an excellent option to keep your workshop free of dust and unwanted mess. For example, it can be a lifesaver to keep wood dust and wood shaving at bay. 

However, if you are planning to create better airflow in your workspace to ensure that it’s cold and breathable, it is best to use a garage fan. Its coverage is a lot better than air blowers, keeping you more comfortable while you work. 

aIn short, blowers are best to keep the workshop clean and mess-free, whereas a fan can keep you comfortable. 

Blower Fan Vs Fan Frequently Asked Questions ?

What is the use of a blower motor in a car?

The best blower motor for car performs two crucial functions-rotating the heater blower and AC fan. This is an electrical device that helps push air through the evaporator ducts and heater core. 

Basically, it’s a major component of the HVAC systems in cars to maintain proper air circulation inside. And the assembly in the blower motor comes with a fan wheel and a 12 DC motor.

The working process of the motor fan is pretty interesting- it receives electricity from the battery of the car, gets charged and spins with the wheel. This rotating assembly helps move air into the passenger’s side through the vents. 

Is using ceiling fans in the kitchen a good idea?

Using a ceiling fan in a kitchen with gas burners is not the best idea. Gas is inflammable, and in case there is a fire, it can cause the fire to spread quite rapidly across the house. 

Instead, you can try using an exhaust fan or a chimney to ensure that hot air is removed from your kitchen. Conduct proper research on exhaust fan vs. chimney options to understand which will be better suited for your kitchen space. 

air turbine fan for ventilation and air conditioning isolated on white background. Blower Fan Vs Fan Final Words.

Blower Fan Vs Fan Final Words

With that, we have reached the end of this guide. We hope that after reading this, you now have a better idea about how air blowers are different from fans. 

Both blowers and fans make your life easy in the workshop and your home. However, to make the most of them, you need to know when to use what. So, study the area and determine the purpose of use before choosing one. To jog your memory, use fans for general cooling and blowers when you need more airflow. 

Bye for now! 

Are you the type to start panicking the minute you see a crack on concrete slabs? 

Well, good news for you - it’s not always that serious! In fact, not all concrete cracks result in structural damage. This is because most of these concrete cracks appear during construction or may be caused due to external factors. 

Yet we understand if looking for the best concrete crack filler is the first thing you do on spotting even a hairline gap. You may even go to the extent of learning how to fix a crack in a foundation wall or how to repair cracks in concrete

But before you get started, you need to learn about the different types of cracks in concrete. This way, you’ll be able to fix the issue more effectively and prevent more cracks and damage in the future. 

So, without further ado, let’s get into the deets… 

Different Types Of Concrete Cracks

Plant for the production of reinforced concrete slabs and foundation blocks for large-panel construction. Panels for the construction of reinforced concrete structures. Industrial enterprise. Different Types Of Concrete Cracks.

1. Plastic Shrinkage Cracks

Before hardening, concrete is said to be in “plastic” condition when it is full of water. Gradually, the water fully evaporates, thereby leaving huge holes on the concrete surface. As you may have guessed, these holes weaken the structure of the concrete, making it more prone to damage. Hence, these are known as plastic shrinkage concrete cracks. 

Notably, these types of cracks are very common and can emerge on walls and slabs. However, you must watch out for these cracks on the corners and center of the concrete slab affixed with plumbing fixtures.

2. Horizontal Concrete Cracks

Horizontal cracks are usually spotted around areas of high tensile strength, such as column faces, column junctions, and beams. They are usually caused by improperly reinforced concrete, incorrect placement of installed reinforcement, uniaxial bending, insufficient moment resistance capacity, etc.

Note that horizontal concrete cracks call for immediate attention as they can degrade structural integrity.

3. Diagonal Cracks

If you’ve got a reinforced concrete slab, diagonal cracks are bound to appear along the concrete column face. These types of cracks may be caused due to inefficient load-carrying abilities, weak cross-section, insufficient reinforcement steel, and more. But unlike some minor cracks on concrete surfaces, diagonal cracks must be repaired immediately to prevent any damage to the entire structure.

4. Expansion Concrete Cracks

The nature of concrete is such that it expands when heated, further pushing anything that gets in its way. And as concrete does not bend or flex, such expansion causes it to break, creating concrete cracks.

Interestingly, expansion joints are used as points of isolation against static objects. This reduces the chances of concrete cracking in the future. 

Moreover, expansion joints are used as shock absorbers as they are made of a compressible material like rubber, timber, or asphalt.

5. Splitting Cracks

If you spot short vertical cracks of varying widths along the concrete slab, they are most likely caused by a lack of load-bearing capacity, improper cross-section and steel reinforcing. You must also ensure that the concrete used is of top-notch quality to avoid splitting cracks in the future.

6. Settling Concrete Cracks

If the ground beneath the concrete slab settles and creates a void, you may notice settling cracks. For instance, when a large tree is chopped/uprooted and the hole is not refilled with soil, settling cracks can occur on the concrete surface. Another suitable example is when a utility company digs around for its services and leaves the surface bare. 

7. Concrete Cracks As a Result of Premature Drying

When the concrete dries too soon, you may notice two types of surface cracks - crazing cracks and crusting cracks.  

Crazing cracks look like spider webs and form when the concrete slab loses moisture soon after application. While these surface cracks may be an eyesore, they do not pose any structural damage.

On the other hand, crusting cracks usually occur during the concrete stamping process. Again, this happens when the concrete surface dries up too quickly due to sunny or windy days. Plus, the stamp getting pressed on the concrete creates more texture and minute fissures. These types of cracks are also not a major concern, so you need not stress about them. 

8. Concrete Fissures Induced By Slab Overload

We are well aware of concrete’s strength and durability. But like every other material out there, it has its fair share of flaws. As such, excessive weight can cause cracks in concrete columns. 

Although overloading of the actual concrete slab is highly unlikely in residential areas, heavy rain or snow can make things worse. This is because the excess weight presses down the concrete slab into the moist earth, thereby resulting in cracks. 

9. Corrosion Cracks

These cracks start off at the same width but end up getting larger with time. You’ll mostly find such corrosion cracks on concrete column reinforcements. 

Like most of the concrete cracks described above, these are also caused by improper bonding between concrete and steel bars. Another reason could be reinforcement corrosion. 

Heaving Concrete Cracks

Sometimes it’s not just the carelessness or mistakes during construction but also natural factors that cause concrete cracks. For instance, the ground rises a few inches while freezing and goes back to its original size when thawed. Hence, if the concrete slab does not move with the ground, it will end up cracking.

The same thing happens when tree roots, both large and small, shift and shatter the surface if they’re too close to the slab. So, you must keep these factors in mind while laying a concrete slab. 

How To Repair Narrow Concrete Cracks

You get a wide variety of options for repairing narrow cracks - all you need is a caulking gun for the process. Not to forget, many concrete fixing products are available in bottles with a convenient applicator tip.

In case of hairline cracks, you can use a vinyl concrete patching compound and smooth out the surface with a trowel or putty knife. The smoothening process is especially important because the concrete caulk tends to peel off after a few months. 

Also, note that sometimes narrow cracks can be deep enough to extend throughout the width of the concrete column. Thus, we recommend starting off by using a foam backer rod to stuff the crack and hold the concrete crack filler. 

In case you’re wondering about the size of the back rod, let us tell you that they are available in a wide variety of diameters. Just ensure that you pick one which is slightly larger than the width of the concrete crack, and you’re good to go.

Finally, you can screw in the backer rod with a screwdriver and then fill the crack with the concrete crack filler. 

How To Repair Wide Concrete Cracks

Before learning how to repair cracks in concrete, it is important to understand the main aim, i.e., to create an inverted “V” with the sides of the crack. Doing so will allow the repair material to get absorbed into the crack and create a mechanical bond along with the chemical bond. Now, let’s check out the steps involved: 

Step 1

Use a masonry chisel and hammer to widen the crack and chisel it. Make sure that you remove any loose material from the old concrete with the help of a wire brush. 

Step 2

You can even use a pressure washer or a garden hose to spray the crack with high pressure water and remove debris. Then take a brush or wet/dry shop vacuum to remove the water as well. Remember that it’s okay to leave the surface damp/wet, but there shouldn’t be any pools of water. 

Step 3

Now follow the manufacturer’s instructions and prepare the concrete patching compound. Scoop the mixture into the concrete crack, ensuring no air pockets are left. Also, use some of the compound on the surrounding concrete surface for better adhesion. 

Step 4

Use a trowel to smoothen the surface and level it along the surrounding concrete. You can even use a brush to create patterns or textures. 

Step 5

Leave the concrete compound to dry and cure. Here, you must check the manufacturer’s instructions and follow them to the T! 

Finally, if required, you can paint or seal the entire surface. 

Types Of Cracks In Concrete Slabs Frequently Asked Questions ?

How to choose the best concrete crack filler?

Concrete crack fillers are available in various forms; namely, sealants/caulks, quick-setting cement, hydraulic cement, patching compounds, epoxy, and concrete resurfacer. Depending on the width of the crack, your level of expertise, time at hand, prevailing weather conditions, etc., you can choose a suitable sealer for cracks in concrete. 

How to remove concrete crack filler?

You can use an angle grinder and scrape off the concrete crack filler from the desired surface. 

How to prevent cracks in concrete surfaces?

While concrete crack fillers can fix present cracks, they cannot guarantee any prevention from future damage. Hence, it is important to maintain the structural integrity of concrete columns. 

You can do so by adding sealants every few years to protect the surface from top-layer damage. A good-quality sealant can harden the surface and prevent scratches, oil stains, and more. 

Other than that, you can invest in routine power-washing, wherein all the dirt and grime are removed with high-pressure water. If you have already used concrete crack fillers, then rest assured that the surface will remain protected with no water seeping into small gaps. 

Types Of Cracks In Concrete Slabs Final Words.

Types Of Cracks In Concrete Slabs Final Words

Though not all types of concrete cracks spell trouble, it is always wise to repair them early on to prevent any possible damage to the entire structure. And while it is difficult to find the root cause of the crack, possible reinforcement corrosion, improper jointing, and inefficient load-carrying abilities are usually the ones to blame. 

Hence, good concrete finishing techniques and proper site preparation must be ensured to avoid structural concern in the future. 

Calculating the appropriate air conditioner size for your home is essential for efficient performance and energy conservation. One way of doing this is by multiplying the total square footage of your home by 20 and making a few adjustments, depending on climate, population, location, etc.

Purchasing the wrong air conditioner size can lead to airflow problems and electricity issues that will cost you a lot of money in the future. Besides, when it comes to an HVAC system, a bigger size isn’t always the better. Sometimes, a smaller and more efficient unit can save money and energy. So, it’s best to calculate the minimum air conditioning requirement of your home for optimum energy efficiency and to adhere to the budget.

In this article, I will walk you through some ways to calculate the appropriate size of air conditioners.

Understanding Cooling Capacity And How To Calculate It

Understanding Cooling Capacity And How To Calculate It

What Is A British Thermal Unit Rating?

Be it central heating or single-zoned air conditioning, the British Thermal Unit (BTU) plays an important role in understanding the cooling capacity and energy consumption. In its simplest definition, BTU is a measuring unit that represents the amount of heat required to reduce the temperature of one pound of water by one degree. In terms of an HVAC unit, one BTU translates to the amount of heat an AC unit can vent in one hour.

Calculating The Right Air Conditioner Capacity

Installing a correctly-sized new HVAC unit can reduce overall operating costs and improve the system life, so here’s a step-by-step guide for precise calculation.

1. Calculate The Square Footage Of Your Home

If you want to cool a single, compact room, then calculating the right size for your air conditioner is quite easy. Simply multiply the room’s width and length if you have a square or rectangular space. But if your room is triangular, you need to divide the former result by two as a rule of thumb, as a non-equilateral triangle is half of a square or rectangle. 

However, some rooms may have unique shapes, which can make it harder for you to determine the required capacity per square foot. In this case, divide it into smaller squares and triangles and add the result to find precise measurements. 

For a central air conditioner, you’ll need to measure the required cooling capacity for the entire home. To do this, you’ll have to repeat the entire process and find the square footage for each room in the house. But if you don’t want heating, cooling, and air conditioning in some parts of your house, remember to exclude them from the equation.

Tip

If your house is perfectly square or rectangular-shaped, you can find the total measurement by multiplying one room’s measurement by the number of floors or square footage of the house.

2. Multiply Square Footage By 20

When it comes to cooling capacity being measured in BTU, 20 BTU per square foot is multiplied as a norm. So, you need to multiply the total sq ft measurement by 20 to determine the perfect capacity for your cooling system.

3. Make The Required Adjustments

The calculations you’ve made so far will give you a rough idea of the ideal cooling capacity in terms of BTU. However, there are several considerations you must factor in while deciding on the capacity, according to Energy Star:

i. Climate Zone

You are required to add or subtract a certain percentage of capacity depending on how much heat your home gets. For example, if your home gets sunlight and is also shaded by a canopy, subtract 10% of the capacity. Meanwhile, if your home receives a lot of sunlight, the capacity of the HVAC system should be increased by 10%. 

ii. Population

If more than two people occupy your home or apartment at once, it is a general rule that you should increase the system capacity by at least 600 BTU.

iii. Location

Hotter zones in your home that require the HVAC unit to run for longer need a higher cooling power. For example, if you want an air conditioner specifically for the kitchen, you should add 4000 BTU to its power. 

iv. Heat Or Cold Air Leaks

Always keep a margin of error in your calculations since air conditioners, especially large-size central air conditioners, often have cold air leaking through the vents. This puts an additional load on your outdoor unit, requiring higher power.

Finding The Correct System Size

As you may have read above, a residential load calculation can help you find the right-size AC unit. However, you can also determine the appropriate size by finding out the system size already installed. Generally, manufacturers don’t list the system size on the product; instead, it is coded into the model number of the outdoor unit.

For example, a 2-ton unit will have the number 24 coded into its model number - this is because there’s 12,000 BTU cooling power per ton. So, ‘24’ is actually 24,000 BTU, which, when divided by 2 (per ton calculation), comes to 12,000 BTU per unit. In a similar fashion, you can easily decode a model number to find its tonnage (look for the model, not the serial number) by using this simple information:

Coded Model Number Weight (tons)
18 1.5
24 2
30 2.5
36 3
42 3.5
48 4
60 5

Square Foot Heating Guide

Calculating the required BTU per square foot is also important for central heating; however, the calculation for heating is a little different. Firstly, you have to figure out which climate zone your home falls under before moving on to the next step. On average, there are five climate zones in the U.S., United Kingdom, and other large countries - and each zone has a different BTU requirement:

Zone BTU/sq. ft.
1 30-35
2 35-40
3 40-45
4 45-50
5 50-60

So, finding the precise climate zone will help you find how many BTU per square footage is required by your home for even heating. If your building's insulation is tight and sound, choose the lower range, but if you have a poorly insulated home, choose the higher one. 

Now, just multiply the number by the total square footage of your home to find the capacity needed for your HVAC system to heat the area. For example, if you live in zone 3 and you have a 3,000-square-foot well-insulated home, the equation will look like this:

  • 3000 sq. ft. x 40 heating factor = 120,000 BTU

You can also calculate the BTU output of a gas furnace by multiplying the energy efficiency rating by the input rating listed on the product. For example, if a product has a listed input rating of 80,000 BTU and an efficiency rating of 70%, it will produce the following:

  • 80,000 x 0.70 = 56,000 BTU output

Learn About The Variables

Several variable factors such as insulation, number of windows, number of floors, ceiling height, construction type, and even humidity will affect the required British Thermal Unit (BTU) for heating and cooling. It is generally acknowledged that if your home is well-insulated and has modern single-pane windows, you can go for a small-sized HVAC system that’s compatible with the total square footage.

Moreover, in a two-story home, the lower floors put less load on the compressor and thermostat, as the one's above act as insulating layers. So, if you have multiple stories with poor insulation and old-styled windows, it’s best to go for a large-size air conditioner.

General Tips For Finding The Right HVAC System

Finding the type of HVAC system you already have goes a long way in finding the right cooling and heating system for your home. However, if you’re unable to identify it, here are some general guidelines you can follow while purchasing an air conditioner:

  • If your home has forced air heat, opt for a 5-ton air conditioning system
  • If you have gas heating installed in your home, you’ll require built-in ‘heat pumps,’ which will help in heating and cooling
  • A 3-ton AC unit is sufficient for homes with electric heating
  • If there’s no forced air heat in your home, you can determine the right-sized air conditioner by calculating the highest BTU heating load (follow the steps previously mentioned).

How To Calculate Air Conditioner Size For A House

To Sum It Up

With proper calculation and research, you can easily calculate the right air conditioner for your house. In this article, I have highlighted different techniques for calculating measurements and units, including cooling capacity (BTU), ton per square foot, heating capacity, and output. All of these measurements can contribute to finding an air conditioner that will perfectly cater to your home’s total square footage and ensure even air circulation. 

However, it can be quite challenging to figure out what unit to go for, especially if you’ve never had an air conditioning system before. In this case, I recommend calling an HVAC expert and evaluating your home to give you a ballpark figure for perfect air conditioning. 

That said, I’ll be signing off. Until next time, take care!

As a beginner drawing with colored pencils, you are bound to make mistakes, and you will have to erase several times before completing a picture. 

While the standard pencil erasers may not do the job well, there are a number of options that are designed to remove colored pencil marks. Some common erasers that you can try, include - 

  • Plastic erasers
  • Electric eraser
  • Vinyl eraser
  • Kneaded eraser

But before you do so, it is essential to know the right method of using these erasers. Also, you need to work on high-quality paper to ensure it does not tear or crinkle easily when erasing. 

There are some other alternatives that we have discussed as well if you do not have colored pencil erasers. Read on to learn all about them. 

How To Erase Using A Colored Pencil Eraser

School, education. Book with pencils on the table. How To Erase Using A Colored Pencil Eraser.

Step 1- Choosing The Right Colored Pencil Eraser 

You need to get your hands on the right colored pencil eraser before you begin the work. Such type of erasers are cheap, and you will not have to pay more than $5 for a product. 

Step 2- Test The Colored Pencil Erasers 

Before erasing colored pencil marks, test the eraser on a small portion of the paper. To do so, you can start by erasing a corner of the pencil marks. Check to see if you notice streaking while erasing and make circular motions with the eraser. We always recommend beginning from one corner so that it does not affect the main picture. 

Step 3- Using The Colored Pencil Erasers 

Remember that even if it is premium-quality paper, the colored portions will be fragile, and it is best not to apply too much pressure on the paper. Colored rubber erasers are thick, firm, and coarser than normal erasers and can tear the paper easily. 

Hence, do not apply the same pressure as you would when using a normal eraser. Rub on the colored area gently and check for streaking marks so that they can be removed as well.  

Is Using A Vinyl Eraser A Good Idea? 

You can always use a vinyl eraser to remove colored pencil marks if a colored pencil eraser is not available. Follow the steps below to do it properly. 

Step 1: Find Vinyl Erasers 

Vinyl erasers are available in different shapes, and you can purchase one on the basis of your needs. You will find these erasers online and they can be used to erase pigment from a colored paper. We will recommend getting the eraser pencil versions since they are easy to hold, and you can work on smaller areas as well as large surfaces. 

Step 2: Test On A Small Area 

Before you erase the entire picture, we will recommend erasing a small area. You may have purchased erasable colored pencils, but this eraser may or may not work well on them. So, choose a small area and rub in circles to test the product. If you notice too much streaking or the color does not fade, then you will have to use a different eraser. 

Step 3: Erase The Colored Pencil Marks

Vinyl erasers are very stiff and are considered to be the hardest among all other options. Hence, you will have to be very careful so that you do not tear the drawing paper. Rub gently and take your time with the process to ensure you have removed all the unnecessary details before coloring on the paper again. 

Can You Use Kneaded Erasers Instead Of Colored Pencil Erasers? 

Top view of a set of school supplies with copy space. Colored Pencil Erasers.

Kneaded erasers are made of a sticky substance that looks like putty. These are easy to shape, and you can shape them depending on the area that needs to be erased. For detailing on small areas, the kneaded eraser can be made pointed, while for large areas they can be stretched to erase colored pencil drawings quickly. 

Kneaded erasers are easily available online, and purchasing them should not be tough. But know that a kneaded eraser will not erase colored pencil marks completely as it will only lighten the marks to help you color over them. A kneaded eraser works like wall putty, and you will get a similar effect. 

Moreover, you can begin by using a kneaded eraser over a small area. Test it before to see how the paper reacts, and always begin from a corner so as not to destroy the entire image. After testing, start rubbing the eraser gently to remove colored pencils marks without streaking. 

Now you may be wondering how much pressure to apply While kneaded erasers are soft, you should always refrain from applying too much pressure. Rub and fold the eraser as you work your way through the drawing. It will keep picking up color pigments, and you can fold over that section. 

After you are done, remember to clean the kneaded eraser well. To do this, stretch the eraser and then rub it on another surface to get the pigments out. 

Making Use Of An Electric Eraser 

Sometimes black lines are difficult to remove with normal erasers, but an electric eraser can do the job well. It can lift pigments from the top, making a region brighter and cleaner. But before you use an electric eraser, make sure to add a little solvent to the desired region. This loosens the pencil marks making it easier to remove them. 

It is best to test the solvent on a small area to see what happens to the paper. Then you can continue erasing the other parts of the drawing. 

Using Tape: An Alternative Method 

Before you use scotch tape, take a standard eraser and rub it gently on the paper without applying a lot of pressure. You will just need to lift the color for the tape to be effective. 

Step 1: Cut A Small Strip Of Tape 

If this is your first time working with scotch tape, then begin by cutting small pieces of tape. You can also use clear tape, artist tape, or masking tape for the job. 

Step 2: Testing The Tape

As we have already established, it is essential that you erase a small portion to get the hang of the process. Also, the tape can damage the paper, and you will have to test it first to see if the paper can withstand it. 

Attach a small piece to one of the corners of the picture and then rub gently over it. There is no need to apply a lot of pressure as it may damage the picture when you peel the tape off. 

Step 3: Using A Pen 

You can use a sharp pencil to write on top of the artist's tape by using a normal pencil sharpener. Also, make sure you apply even pressure on all the areas with the pencil, and that should make the pigment stick to the tape. Most colored pencil artists use this method to easily remove pencil marks from high-quality paper. 

Step 4: Peel Off The Tape 

After the pigment sticks to the tape, peel off the tape slowly but firmly. Most colored pencils leave marks that come off with tape, but there is a chance that the paper may rip. So, do not repeat the process over the same area as the paper becomes thin and more vulnerable to tearing.

After it has peeled, you may still see some color remaining, for which you can use a standard eraser to eliminate the marks.

How To Erase Colored Pencil Frequently Asked Questions ?

It is essential to learn about how to organize colored pencils and erasers as well when you are working with them.  We will always recommend taking them out of the pack and lining them up according to shades. 

This will ensure you have access to all the colors when needed and you can keep the eraser of your choice beside the colors. Moving on, we will talk about some of the frequently asked questions about colored pencils in this section, so keep reading.  

Can colored pencil marks be removed without an eraser? 

There may be times when you do not have a colored pencil eraser to erase colored pencil marks. You will be surprised to know that bread can help you in the process. 

Yes, take some bread without the crust and then create a small ball with it. Use it just like a kneaded eraser and then rub it gently to erase colored pencils. 

Another method is to use a rubber band for this job, as you can roll a rubber band and then rub it over the surface. Anything rubbery should do the job in case proper materials are not available. However, ensure that you do not end up smudging the colored pencil marks. 

We will also talk about one more alternative, and that is flip-flops. You read that right, flip-flops are made of rubber, and the sides can be used to rub remove pencil marks. But they are big, and we will recommend cutting a small portion of the flip-flops before using them. 

Why do some pencil erasers become hard over time? 

Erasers are made of rubber, and rubber becomes hard and brittle when exposed to continuous sunlight. You can restore their quality again by sprinkling some water on them. 

How can you learn to use color pencils? 

If this is your first time coloring, watch a few beginner videos to learn how to use color pencils. You can learn about the process of using different shades and blending them perfectly with each other. Also, keep practicing so that you can get better with time. 

How To Erase Colored Pencil Final Words

How To Erase Colored Pencil Final Words

While some erasers are specifically designed to remove colored pencil marks, you will still need to test them before using them on the paper. While choosing colored pencils, check the back of the pack to see if they are erasable. 

Additionally, do not use a number of different erasers together but opt for just one and check if it works for your drawing. In case it does not, you can try another type for the job. 

Using the right tools is essential to protect the paper. We believe that a white eraser is a better option to choose than the traditional pink eraser as it can often be too firm, damaging the paper easily.

If you like this article on erasing colored pencils, checkout our previous article on furniture paints and can you use acrylic paints on furniture to gain an outstanding look to your drawing room or any other part of your home.

Acrylic paintbrushes require care and attention, especially when it comes to cleaning them after you’re finished with the painting.

Unlike watercolors, acrylic paints have a tendency to stick to the brushes, which can cause long term damage and render even the most expensive brushes useless.

Today we’re going to look into the causes of such damages, and help you avoid them.  

First off, we’ll describe the process of getting your brush as close to the store-bought condition as possible.

Then, we’ll look into common causes of damage to your brushes, and help you mitigate these damages to the maximum extent possible. Finally, we’ll cover a few common questions you might have regarding care and cleaning. Without further ado, let’s begin!

How to Clean Acrylic Paint Brushes Step by Step

Once you’re done reading this section, you won’t go back to your general methods of cleaning - for very valid reasons, too. With that in mind, next up is the walk-through.

Method 1 | No soap, simple rag/paper towel and water

  1. Wiping the excess paint left over using a dry cloth rag or paper towel 

While there’s no absolute need to perform this step, doing so can help you avoid damage later. Indeed, this step will take you some time - but that time will be well spent in caring for your brushes. Wrap the dry cloth rag or paper towel around the brush and get the excess paint out.

This has to be performed as soon as you’re finished with the painting. The only thing to keep in mind is to not delay this process under any cost - else it might be too late.

  1. Using a paper towel or a cloth rag, gently glide over the surface of the paintbrush 

Until you notice the brush not making marks anymore, brush the bristles of the paintbrush with a paper towel or a cloth rag. You’ll remove all the excess paint this way.

  1. Take a cup of water and swish the brush around in it until the brush is clean 

You do not need to perform this step for too long, but until the time you have a significantly cleaner brush. Make sure you keep the brush straight and that the bristles do not get bent in any case. For this purpose, the water that you used while brushing (if you did use water) is good enough, you only have to get the remaining excesses out of the brush.

Method 2 | Soap and water-based cleaning

  1. Use lukewarm running water to clean the paintbrush 

Hold the paintbrush under a medium strength faucet with both the hot and cold faucets engaged, until the water is mildly warm. Hold the paintbrush for around ten seconds to rinse it, while rotating the brush so as to hit all different sides of the bristles. The pressure definitely helps you in dislodging any leftover paints from dry cleaning the paintbrush.  

  1. Use your fingers or a fine comb to gently pinch through the bristles to get rid of paint

You’re best off using a fine-toothed comb since blunt nails and fingers are not as likely to get those small pesky bits of paint out of the paintbrush. Do remember, however, that the paint isn’t yet fully clean, though it may appear to be so. Your best bet is to continue the water cleaning as described in step 1 of this method.

  1. Use gentle soap on the bristles of the paintbrush to clean it thoroughly 

Turn off all the faucets, and take some smooth, preferably pH-neutral soap (or shampoo of similar quality), and get to work with gently massaging the bristles with the soap.  For larger brushes, make sure you get the soap into all the different size bristles, whether large or small.

When you’re working the soap through the paintbrush, you should get the soap to the metallic part joining the bristles and the body of the brush, known as the ferrule. The ferrule needs to be cleaned regularly, otherwise you the bristles get hardened over time and eventually the shape of the bristles of the paintbrush changes.

  1. Run the paintbrush through lukewarm water again 

This step follows the entire cleaning process as described above. You have to work your fingers through the water stream above, up until the soap has been completely rinsed off from the surface of the bristles and the ferrule.

  1. Take some soap and gently swirl it on to the bristles 

You have to swirl the brush through a few drops of soap you’ve taken in one hand while holding the brush in the other hand. This is done to exactly copy the movements your brush makes while painting. Make sure you reach the bristles near the ferrule as well.

  1. Now, rinse the brush out 

This step should be done under the same lukewarm temperature of running water that we’ve discussed earlier. This should result, ideally, in there remaining no bristles left with residual amounts of soap.

  1. Dry the brush thoroughly yet gently 

The brush has a tendency to adapt the same shape it has for long periods of time, whether dry or wet. Consequently, you should take care that you dry the brush with a gentle cloth or paper towel, making sure there’s no residual water left. However, once your brush is sufficiently dry, you should stop at this stage. Take a breath - you’ve successfully cleaned your paintbrush!

This wraps up our section on the best methods to clean your brush properly. Now, we proceed towards the next part of our discussion - common mishaps and pitfalls to avoid when dealing with acrylic paintbrushes.  

Common Pitfalls to Avoid While Dealing with Acrylic Paintbrushes

This part of the article deals with avoiding mistakes one is likely to make while dealing with the care of paintbrushes. Let’s begin with the first such mistake:

  1. Letting acrylic paint dry on a paintbrush

Among the cardinal sins which one could commit against their paintbrushes, this comes up near or on the top. Your brush must, at all times, be either wet or at least moist when it comes in contact with the paint. A dry paintbrush means the harder it becomes to remove all the residual paint which accumulates on the bristles and near the ferrule.

To avoid this, always have a cup of water nearby which can help you keep the brush relatively moist if not fully wet. If you’re not using the brush, you should keep it on the rim of the cup.  Also, it’s not as if brushes which go crusty have no use - there’s just some effort involved in reviving the paintbrush and getting it to good-as-new condition.

  1. Resting your paintbrush with bristles down in the water

This is a common mistake people tend to make while painting. This is by far the easiest way to kiss your perfectly new paintbrush a fleeting goodbye. This causes the hairs to go all wonky and frizzled, and there’s no way to undo this damage. Even if you can get away with this because of cheaper brushes, we recommend not doing it just the same.

  1. Getting paint stuck on the ferrule

This is another problematic situation you want to avoid. The ferrule is the silver, metallic part of a brush which connects the bristles of the brush with the body (wooden or otherwise). The problem with getting paint on the ferrule is that even after washing the ferrule, some paint will remain stuck between the bristles and near the joint.

This wraps up the top few ways in which artists tend to take their paintbrushes on a one way journey to the bin. Avoiding these takes actively participating in care for your tools, and realising that caring for your paintbrushes is equally important as is being involved in the painting process.

Coming now to the final part of today’s discussion - questions you have regarding the process. Now, we will cover a few important questions artists tend to ask regarding brushes and cleaning in general.

We start off with ruined brushes.

How to Clean Acrylic Paint Brushes FAQ

  • If my brush is ruined should I throw it away?

    Absolutely not! You can find a number of uses even for the most crusty and sticky of brushes. If you find yourself having to paint abstract art or know someone who does, these brushes are perfect for rough usage in this way. You can also use these brushes for any artwork which does not require many intricacies or complex detailing.

  • What if I have to attend to a situation while painting?

    Take 10 seconds and rotate your brush in water very gently yet quickly, and then squeeze out all of the excess paint on a paper towel or cloth rag. Swish it gently as before and then leave it resting across the rim of the water cup. This process generally takes anywhere between five to ten seconds.

  • Read More on Acrylic Painting

    10 Best Paper for Acrylic Paint in 2022 | Artist and Beginner Grade

    10 Best Canvases for Acrylic Painting | Student & Artist Grade

    8 Best Palettes For Acrylic Paint & How to Choose What You Need

    Learn How To Make An Acrylic Painting Waterproof Right Now

    Acrylic Painting Materials That You Really Need In The Studio

    13 Best Acrylic Paints for Beginners & Professionals Reviewed

    10 Best Acrylic Paint Brushes for Artists & Students Reviewed

    Learn How To Get Dried Acrylic Paint Out Of Brushes Successfully

    Learn How to Make Acrylic Paint in Your Studio

    Painting on Paper with Acrylics & 5 Paper-Like Surfaces to Consider

    Learn How to Thicken Acrylic Paint Correctly Right Now

    Painting Surfaces For Acrylics | Acrylic Prepping 101

    Best Cheap Acrylic Paints – Strength and Weakness of Brands Compared

    22+ Delicate Beautiful Acrylic Painting Ideas To Try

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects

    20 Oil And Acrylic Painting Ideas For Enthusiastic Beginners

    Are you planning to give your bedroom or living room a quick makeover by repainting the ceilings? 

    Choosing the right color and getting top quality ceiling paints along with proper tools from the market is not enough to get the job done. As exciting as it may sound, painting the ceiling can be a daunting endeavor if you don’t have the necessary skills, patience, and a bit of practice. However, fret not because there are plenty of ways to pull off the task without ruining your floors with drips and splatters or making your ceilings patchy. 

    Irrespective of whether you have textured or smooth ceilings, the best way to coat them is by using a roller and working in grid-like sections to ensure an even coat. Flat white, adventurous blue, or dramatic red - no matter which color you wish to paint, we’ve got your back. 

    Although ceiling painting is difficult, it is not as complicated as painting body art; where you’ve to keep in mind the color, the types of paint and style for various art forms. Know more on body art starting with types of paints used for face and body

    Today, we’ll walk you through the nitty-gritty of painting a ceiling that will help you achieve a smooth and flawless finish like the pros. So, grab a cup of coffee and start reading! 

    How To Paint A Ceiling - The Easy Way

    How To Paint A Ceiling - The Easy Way

    Whether you want to make your room appear spacious or add a modern touch to it, painting the ceiling is no doubt the best way to spruce up the space. Of course, you can hire a professional for home improvement projects, but they will charge exorbitant rates just to paint the ceiling. 

    Instead of spending a fortune by hiring professionals, the best way to revamp your ceiling is to paint it yourself. Not only will you save money, but you will also develop a new DIY skill. 

    Though slightly tricky, painting the ceiling isn’t a Herculean task. With the right skills, tools, and knowledge, you’ll be able to get the job done efficiently. Knowing the difference between ceiling and other regular paint is very important when it comes to painting ceilings. 

    Having said that, we’ve put together a step-by-step guide on how to paint a ceiling, so you can go about it without issues. Let’s dive in, then! 

    Step 1: Prepare The Room

    Before starting your painting project, it’s advisable to remove the furniture, mattress, carpets, and all the other items from your room. After that, lay down canvas drop cloths or paper on the floor so that they don’t get stained by drips or spills. 

    In case any piece of furniture is unmovable, spread plastic tarps over them to protect them from the paint. And, don’t forget to remove any ceiling fans, light fixtures, and smoke detectors from the room, so you can paint the ceiling without worrying about ruining your expensive décor items.  

    Step 2: Hang Plastic Sheeting To Protect The Walls

    Let’s assume you’ve painted the walls before the ceiling, which is why you will have to protect them by using plastic sheeting. Since you’ll have to use the sheets to cover the walls, make sure you buy a sufficient number. 

    Start with one wall and then move to the other, while including windows and doors. And don’t forget to measure the height and length of the wall using a measuring tape for accuracy before buying the sheets. 

    Step 3: Use Painter’s Tape Over Trim

    After hanging plastic sheeting over the walls, you’ll have to grab painter’s tape and use it over the molding and trims of the ceiling. Mainly, such tapes are used to create crisp lines and protect the trims from the paint. 

    If you skip the painter’s tape, the ceiling paint will lack perfection and smoothness. 

    Step 4: Prep The Entire Ceiling 

    Now that you’ve taken care of the trims and moldings, it’s time to prep the ceiling to make your job easy. Though it may sound challenging, cleaning the ceiling is an easy task. 

    Take a vacuum cleaner and use it all over the ceiling to remove the dust and other minute particles. When the ceiling is free from impurities, the primer and paint will adhere to the surface properly. 

    In case there are cracks or tiny holes in the ceiling, fill them before priming the ceiling. Ideally, it takes two hours for the spackle to dry, after which you’ll have to sand it to smooth the surface and blend the patches seamlessly. 

    If there are rough spots on the ceiling, use sandpaper for sanding and then vacuum the surface to ensure it’s free from dirt. 

    Step 5: Grab Your Tools And Arrange Your Supplies

    Before moving on to painting the ceiling, we suggest laying a liner on a paint tray on one side of the room. You can even keep it outside the room so that you don’t trip over it while painting. 

    Now, attach a spout to the primer can and pour it over the paint liner in the tray. Next grab a paint roller frame and replace the old roller cover with a new one. 

    Subsequently, dip your roller into the primer and attach it to the extension pole so that you can have better control while painting the ceiling. Another benefit of using an extension pole is that it reduces strain on the arms and back, which means you can work for hours without any issues. 

    Note that the secret to success lies in using the shortest possible extension, or the weight of the pole will lead to pains and aches. 

    Step 6: Start Priming The Ceiling

    When it comes to applying primer, start by cutting in the borders of the ceiling using a paint edging tool or an angled brush. After completing the edges, apply primer onto the rest of the ceiling and allow it to completely dry. 

    More often than not, people prefer using a stain-blocking primer to prepare their ceilings before painting. Mainly, they use it to hide stains, flaws, and other imperfections while preventing stains from bleeding through. 

    Step 7: Paint The Edges Of The Ceiling 

    After the primer dries, it’s time to paint the ceiling, and we suggest starting with the edges. But before that, pour paint onto the tray and use an angled brush or a paint edging tool to coat the edges. 

    However, make sure you only paint the edges of the ceiling, not around them. And once you’re done painting the edges, let them dry before moving on to the next step. 

    Step 8: Apply Paint To The Rest Of The Ceiling Using A Paint Roller

    As soon as the edges dry, you’ll have to paint the other parts of the ceiling without further delay. Certainly, changing the paint roller cover is important, so replace the dirty cover with a new one and then start painting. 

    Before that, make sure you pour more paint into the tray and dip the roller into it to soak the paint. As already mentioned, the best way to paint the ceiling is to use the roller in three-foot by three-foot sections. That’s because keeping track of how much area you have covered is easy when you paint in grid-like sections. 

    When painting a new section, make sure you overlap the wet edge of the previous portion to prevent lap marks and blend the sections seamlessly. Once the ceiling is painted, you can apply a second coat of paint if need be. 

    Another thing we’d like to mention is that you must move the roller slowly in straight lines to avoid splattering the paint. And you’re done! 

    3 Tips That Every DIYer Must Know Before Painting Their Ceiling

    1. Ceiling Paints Are Thick And Sticky

    Only a few people know that ceiling paints are different from wall paints because they are formulated to prevent paint drips. That is why they are slightly sticky, have a thick consistency, and are compatible with roller covers. 

    2. Different Ceilings Require Different Naps

    While thick naps are perfect for textured ceilings, a 3/8-inch nap is excellent for smooth ones. Before buying roller covers, make sure you consider the surface of the ceiling and then buy the one that fits the bill. 

    3. Flat Or Matte Paints Are Best For Painting Ceiling

    As you already know, the market is saturated with varieties when it comes to ceiling paints. Different colors can go with different types of ceiling finishes, and mastering them all is almost impossible if you’re not a professional. 

    However, we suggest going for flat or matte paints because they hide imperfections better than others. Going for a satin or gloss finish ceiling paint is a big no-no because they highlight every dent, bump, and flaw present on the surface. 

    How To Paint A Ceiling Frequently Asked Questions ?

    How Many Coats Of Paint Does A Ceiling Need?

    Basically, a ceiling needs a minimum of two coats of paint, only then will it cover imperfections from the surface. 

    How To Paint High Ceilings?

    If you want to paint high ceilings, using a sturdy and premium-quality extension pole is the best bet. However, those using a brush for painting ceilings must use a durable step ladder to reach the ceiling. 

    Young Asian male construction worker Work as a house painter Painting the ceiling inside the house and using a white primer paint roller on the construction site. How To Paint A Ceiling Summing It Up.

    How To Paint A Ceiling Summing It Up

    There you have it - everything you need to know about painting a ceiling like a pro! 

    Without a doubt, painting the ceiling is the best way to add depth and element to a room. Though white is the most preferred option by homeowners, you can go for any other bold color like yellow, brown, blue, and red to add an understated effect to your room. 

    With that, we’ve reached the end of our guide on the topic. But before we sign off, here’s a last piece of advice - don’t forget to wear a face mask or respirator, safety glass, and gloves before starting your project. 

    And that’s it for today. Happy remodeling! 

    Getting a good night’s sleep after spending a long day at work surely feels like bliss. That is why you should make all the arrangements to make it as comfortable as possible. This includes getting a good dehumidifier for bedroom spaces. 

    However, we have come across many people who feel a bit skeptical about using a dehumidifier in their bedrooms. And if you count yourselves as one of them, then you will be glad to know that a dehumidifier can be used in the bedroom without any issue.

    Although, if you being skeptical try cat litter as dehumidifier for bedroom or any other places. They comes handy as dehumidifier, but have issues. Checkout our exclusive article on the particular topic to know more. 

    If anything, using a dehumidifier has a lot of advantages, some of which you might not be aware of. So, if you feel like your curiosity has been piqued by that sentence, then you are in luck because that’s what we have addressed in this article. 

    Let’s get started then, shall we? 

    Dehumidifiers And Their Types

    Modern air purifier in the bedroom by the bed, place for text. Dehumidifiers And Their Types.

    Before we get to the meat of the article, let us discuss a bit about what dehumidifiers actually are. If you are not as savvy in these matters, you might find this information helpful. 

    As the name suggests, a dehumidifier removes moisture content from the air. More than one type of dehumidifier exists today, and each type has a distinct mode of operation. 

    The refrigerant type dehumidifier uses a refrigerant to cool a metal plate. In turn, the plate captures the moisture from the air by the process of condensation. The dried air is then cycled back into the room. 

    Likewise, the desiccant type dehumidifier uses a special substance known as a desiccant. This is a substance that actively absorbs moisture from the air. Silica gel is used in these dehumidifiers, given that it is one of the most well-known and powerful desiccants. 

    There are other types of dehumidifiers too, such as membrane dehumidifiers and heat pump dehumidifiers, but they are not as common as the ones mentioned above. Regardless of the type, the basic principle and functions of this appliance remain the same. 

    Dehumidifiers Vs Air Conditioners

    Contrary to what some people might believe, a dehumidifier is not the same as an air conditioner. An AC removes moisture from the air and provides a flow of hot or cool air as required. On the other hand, a dehumidifier only helps to remove the moisture content from the air. It does not regulate the temperature inside the room in any way. 

    Yeah, we know what you might be thinking right now - if an AC can accomplish whatever a dehumidifier does and more, then why get a dehumidifier in the first place? Well, then allow us to tell you why.  For starters, it is significantly cheaper. 

    Compared to a conventional air conditioning unit, a dehumidifier comes at a relatively lower price. Not only that, but it is also way more energy-efficient, which helps keep your energy bills in check. 

    Should You Have A Dehumidifier In Your Bedroom?

    Yes, you should definitely have a dehumidifier in your bedroom since it will eliminate excess moisture and make it comfortable for you to get uninterrupted sleep. Thanks to its energy efficiency, you can safely run it for the whole night (and even throughout the day, if you wish). 

    A bedroom dehumidifier helps to considerably improve the air quality inside your bedroom. And despite not being able to make the air hot or cool, it does help in combating unpleasant room temperatures to a great extent. 

    In any case, the several benefits of having a bedroom dehumidifier have been discussed in greater detail in the following section, so we suggest you keep reading. 

    Advantages Of Having A Bedroom Dehumidifier

    1. Allows You To Control The Humidity Level

    The biggest and most obvious advantage of a bedroom dehumidifier is that it allows you to achieve the desired humidity level for your bedroom. Most dehumidifiers come with an in-built humidity sensor or humidistat that monitors and regulates the ambient humidity levels. 

    In that context, modern dehumidifiers come with automated controls that monitor and adjust the humidity levels on their own. You could control it manually as well but in this case, you need to know about the optimal measures for relative humidity. 

    Very little or no moisture in the air can be equally undesirable as high moisture content. High humidity inside your bedroom will make you feel sweaty and uncomfortable, while very low humidity can make your skin feel dry, which is equally uncomfortable. It can also cause respiratory problems by drying out the nasal passages and throat. 

    Therefore, the overall humidity level should be kept such that it is neither too moist nor too dry, which is where the dehumidifier becomes helpful. All you need to do is adjust the settings of the unit, and the appliance will keep all the humidity problems at bay while you sleep. 

    2. Removes Mold And Mildew

    It is a well-known fact that harmful microorganisms, such as mold, bacteria, and mildew love to thrive in moist environments. As such, the high moisture content in the bedroom poses a lot more problems for you than just being uncomfortable. 

    The growth of such organisms can cause respiratory problems, such as asthma, cough, and irritation of the eyes, nose, or throat. In extreme cases, it may trigger allergic reactions or other similar health conditions. All of this can make it a nightmare (no pun intended) to sleep in your own bedroom. And if you have a family, the situation can become even worse. 

    That is why using a dehumidifier is always a wise decision. Since it helps remove humidity from the room, it indirectly prevents the growth of mold and mildew, which could otherwise pose a serious health problem. 

    3. Removes Dust And Mites

    Besides removing moist air, a dehumidifier is capable of removing dust from the air as well. Dust accumulation inside the bedroom is never a good sign, as it causes respiratory problems. Moreover, the dust and moisture provide a favorable environment for dust mites to thrive. And in case you are not aware - dust mites are responsible for causing allergies and other health issues in humans. 

    Thankfully, a good dehumidifier takes care of these problems. There are a few fans inside a typical dehumidifier unit that continuously sucks the air inside the machine. Along with the humid air, all the suspended dust particles get sucked inside and ultimately get removed via the exhaust pipe. 

    This makes the machine relatively more versatile and eliminates the need for getting separate air purifiers for your bedroom. And since there is no dust inside the room, you won’t need to worry about dust mites either. 

    4. Removes Dank, Musty Odors

    Surely, you would not want to sleep in a room that has a repulsive, musty smell, right? That is why you should keep a dehumidifier in the bedroom since it can effectively get rid of these odors. 

    These smells usually emerge because moist air has a tendency to trap odors. It can also be due to a build-up of mold, which, in turn, grows in humid environments. Dehumidifiers remove moisture, giving you fresh, clean air free from odors. 

    5. Portable And Convenient

    Most dehumidifier models come with portable features, such as wheels, carry handles, and so on. They do not require separate installation either, so you can simply plug them into a wall outlet and start using them. 

    And because of these features, you can conveniently carry them around to another room as and when required. For instance, if you spend the evenings with family in the living rooms, you can shift it there and set it up. Similarly, you can move it back into the bedroom before going to bed. 

    Such features are also very convenient if you have to move around a lot. Unlike air conditioners, you can simply pack a dehumidifier up in your car and take it to your new house. There again, you can place it in your bedroom without needing to worry about installations. 

    In addition to the portability, they include features that make them easier to use as well. For instance, with features like timers, auto-start-ups, and shut-downs, you can sleep peacefully, knowing that the appliance will handle the operations on its own. 

    6. Easy Maintenance

    Many dehumidifiers today come with top-loading filters and easily accessible compartments so that you can quickly open them up and access the internal components. These features make maintaining the unit a breeze. 

    Every few months, you can open up the compartments and clean out the filters, which will keep your appliance working in top condition for a long time. On top of that, this aspect will help save a lot of time and elbow grease in case the unit’s reservoirs need to be manually drained. 

    Factors To Consider When Using A Bedroom Dehumidifier

    Factors To Consider When Using A Bedroom Dehumidifier

    As you can see from the discussion above, using a bedroom dehumidifier is a wise decision indeed. However, you do need to figure out certain aspects of your bedroom to get the best results. That is what we have discussed in this section, so if you want to know what these aspects are, then read on. 

    1. Placement

    One of the most important things to keep in mind is placement. As a general rule, the appliance should be placed in a spot where there is good air circulation. That way, it will take a considerably shorter time to recycle the air inside your bedroom. 

    Also, make sure to keep it slightly away from walls and corners. If you keep the dehumidifier too close to the wall, it might block the air outlets and vents, which can be detrimental to the machine. And if possible, place your dehumidifier near one of the windows or the door. This makes it easier to take out a drainage pipe and prevents making a mess. 

    Typically, we would suggest that you place it in a spot near the bed. That way, if you need to make some manual adjustments, you can do it from your bed without getting up. 

    2. Dehumidifier Size

    When looking to use a dehumidifier in your bedroom, the size of the unit is another major factor for consideration. The size of a dehumidifier is measured in pints, which indicates the amount of moisture that it can remove in a day. 

    To determine what size dehumidifier will best suit your needs, you need to consider two things - the size of your bedroom and the ambient humidity levels outside. If you live in an area with high humidity, then you will need a larger dehumidifier. Conversely, if you live in a dry region, a small dehumidifier will be sufficient for your needs. 

    In the same vein, a small dehumidifier will be sufficient for a small or average size room. That will allow you enough living space without feeling too congested. However, if you prefer, you can opt for a medium-sized dehumidifier for the latter. 

    For large rooms, though, a medium to large-sized dehumidifier is a must. If you get a smaller unit here, it will not be able to provide efficient dehumidification. Not only that, but it will also overload the unit beyond its capacity, which will affect its function in the long run. 

    If you want better clarity, we would suggest that you consult a dehumidifier size chart when making the purchase. Most dehumidifier brands provide a size chart based on both of these factors, so you will find it helpful when deciding. 

    3. Temperature

    We have discussed the sizes and humidity levels, so now you must be asking yourself - “at what temperature should I set my dehumidifier in the bedroom?” Well, to be honest, a dehumidifier can’t really control the room temperature, like we have stated before. But you do need to consider the temperature ranges within which you can safely use a dehumidifier. 

    You should never use your dehumidifier if the outside temperature is below 60 degrees Fahrenheit. In such a situation, the moisture collected on the cooling coils may freeze up, which will eventually damage the appliance. 

    On the other end, you should try to use the dehumidifier less when the ambient temperatures become higher than 100 degrees Fahrenheit. Using the unit continuously when it is so hot outside may cause it to overheat, which is never a good sign. 

    Should I Have A Dehumidifier In My Bedroom Frequently Asked Questions ?

    What is the ideal humidity level for your bedroom?

    According to experts, the ideal levels of relative humidity for any living space, including the bedroom, should be around 30 to 50%. Thus, you should adjust the humidistat on your dehumidifier to any value within this range to ensure optimal comfort.

    Should you keep your windows open when using the dehumidifier?

    Open windows draw in unfiltered air from outside, which can hamper the functions of the dehumidifier. So, you should never keep the windows open when the unit is running. That said, you can keep it slightly ajar to make room for the drainage pipes if there are any.

    Should you use an AC or a dehumidifier for your basement?

    Wondering what is better for a basement - bedroom air conditioner or dehumidifier? We would suggest that you go with a dehumidifier. The versatility of a dehumidifier makes it better suited to handle the environment of your bedroom, as well as your basement. And since it is not a living area, using a bedroom air conditioner for the basement won’t be worth it.

    Should I Have A Dehumidifier In My Bedroom Final Words

    Should I Have A Dehumidifier In My Bedroom Final Words

    A dehumidifier is probably one of the most useful appliances that you can get for your household. Not only does it keep out the sweaty humidity, but it also provides you with fresh, clean air.

    Thanks to its versatility and portability, you get a dehumidification solution for the entire house, including your bedroom. Once its turned on, you will get a comfortable and dry environment within minutes, which will help you fall asleep faster.

    And that brings us to the end of this article. We hope that it could clear out any skepticism you had about using dehumidifiers in your bedroom.

    Nothing can be more frustrating than having a small bedroom. The space feels cramped, and there's hardly enough space to fit all your things.

    If you're looking for inspiration to spruce up your small bedroom, you've come to the right place.

    We've listed 30 different small bedroom ideas to help you out! Pack up your things, and let's start maximizing every square footage of your small bedroom. 

    30 Stylish Small Bedroom Design Ideas

    Small Bedroom Design Ideas

    You could be desperately trying to find bedroom ideas to maximize space yet fail to find practical storage solutions. 

    We've all been there, and we more or less know how unbearable the feeling is! Worry no more because we've got some small bedroom ideas for your next room makeover. 

    1. Use a Raised Platform for Your Bed 

    Use a Raised Platform for Your Bed

    via : IKEAhackers

    If your room lacks valuable floor space, you can maximize your room's height instead. 

    A functional layout you can use in a limited space with the help of a raised platform. It's a great idea to put storage under your bed! Not to mention, you can easily store and access your things. 

    This is perfect for a tiny bedroom, such as your guest bedroom! You might even be interested in trying a floating bed design for a more modern theme.

    2. Trade Your Full-Size Bed for a Sofa Bed

    Trade Your Full-Size Bed for a Sofa Bed

    via : IKEA UK

    Every space matters in a small bedroom, and having space-saving furniture is always ideal.

    Trade your bed for a sofa bed instead. This is one of the best small bedroom ideas you can apply, giving you extra floor space during the day.

    During the day, you can use your room as a lounge or office space. And at night, all you have to do is lay your sofa bed flat and have a good sleep.

    This is one of the best small bed ideas, especially if you have a small bedroom. 

    PRO TIP

    Remember to try out the sofa bed and ensure it's comfortable enough to sleep in.

    3. Let Natural Light Through

    Let Natural Light Through

    via : BuzzFeed

    If you want to create the illusion of having a big room, don't be afraid to let natural sunlight in.

    With the help of a few layout and design changes, you can make your space look bigger. This is one of the best small bedroom ideas that can help save your electricity bill. 

    This lessens your need for an extra light fixture in your room and leaves more room for other accessories. 

    PRO TIP

    Use a blackout curtain if you don't want light getting through your room.

    4. Every Space Can Be Used as a Storage Area

    Every Space Can Be Used as a Storage Area

    via : Home Decor Ideas

    No space is big or small to be a storage area. We always appreciate the extra space where we can tuck all our belongings away. 

    Just because you have a small bedroom doesn't mean you have to sacrifice storage. Even the smallest of spaces can already make a huge difference. 

    You can use hidden storage solutions to create more closet space without taking up too much square footage.

    5. Window Sills Are Friends

    Window Sills Are Friends

    via : ArchDaily

    Your window sills aren't there for nothing; they're certainly not just there to collect dust.

    If your window sill is large enough, you can put a window seat to lounge on. It's a great way to catch up on your favorite books and even have a nap!

    You can always use it as an extra shelving space if it's not big enough. Add a few accessories, like a candle or your favorite picture frame.

    6. Use A Neutral Carpet Flooring

    Use A Neutral Carpet Flooring

    via : Lauren McBride

    Carpets are a great way to give your small bedroom a cozy feel. The soft carpeted floor signals your body that you're about to rest and relax.

    Trade in your dark carpets for a nice neutral shade. It can liven up your beautiful space and gives an illusion of having more space.

    PRO TIP

    Have your room carpet cleaned regularly. This helps prevent nasty mold and smells from building up.

    7. Expand Your Small Bedroom Using Mirrors

    Expand Your Small Bedroom Using Mirrors

    via : Pottery Barn Teen

    Mirrors are a crowd favorite when making any room look big. 

    This is why it shouldn't come as a surprise that putting up mirrors is highly recommended in small bedroom decorating ideas.

    Make sure to know where to put them and what shape the mirrors should be. Once you've found the perfect spot, your room will feel much bigger and brighter!

    8. Use a Multi-Purpose Storage Bed in a Small Space

    Use a Multi-Purpose Storage Bed in a Small Space

    via : Next Luxury

    A good way to get enough space in your small bedroom is by using storage beds. It's one of the greatest hacks for small bedroom ideas. 

    A multi-purpose bed is ideal for a smaller bedroom because of its functionality. You have a bed, storage, and even a dressing table in one. 

    You don't need to sacrifice storage to lie comfortably at night.

    PRO TIP

    Make sure the storage on your bed is enough to fit all your things.

    9. Less Is More in a Small Space

    Less Is More in a Small Space

    via : Petra Yoanna

    Time and time again, we've always mentioned how less is always more for small bedroom ideas. 

    Fewer things in your small room translate to more space to walk around and enjoy.

    Make sure to keep only the essential items in your room. Tidy up your space, and don't be afraid to declutter the things you no longer need.

    10. Make Your Curtains Stand Out

    Make Your Curtains Stand Out

    via : Target

    Just because you have a small bedroom doesn't mean it can't be fun. Liven up your wall space with the addition of fun and bold curtains.

    Don't be afraid to express your personality with fun and lively curtains! It can make your vertical space look a lot bigger. 

    Not only do curtains look good, but they also serve the practical purpose of blocking the light at night. 

    11. Add Some Throw Blankets and Throw Pillows

    Add Some Throw Blankets and Throw Pillows

    via : Amber Interiors INC.

    If there's one thing we love about small spaces is that it always makes us feel cozy. It sets our mood and signals our mind that it's time to finally relax.

    Don't be afraid to cozy up in your small bedroom by adding a ton of blankets and pillows. This is one of the most simple small bedroom ideas you can find out there that's highly effective. 

    You can even scatter cushions on the floor for that ultimate relaxing vibe!

    12. Build an Effective Storage System

    Build an Effective Storage System

    via : IKEA

    No matter how much storage system you have, if you don't know how to utilize them, it will all be for nothing.

    Make sure to have an effective storage system in place, by knowing which items go where. It keeps your things organized, and you know where to find them the next time you need them.

    13. Use A Loud Wall Hanging Decor

    Use A Loud Wall Hanging Decor

    via : BuzzFeed

    One of our favorite small bedroom ideas is putting up some decorations in our petite bedroom. 

    Wall hangings help draw attention towards a particular area, removing the attention from the small space. 

    If you want to have a clean and put-together look, we highly recommend choosing wall hangings that go with the theme of your room. 

    You can also go for natural materials to give your room a boho and chic look. 

    14. Give Your Small Bedroom Some Symmetry

    Give Your Small Bedroom Some Symmetry

    via : LLD-DESIGN LIMITED

    Even with a small space, you can still create the illusion of symmetry inside your room. 

    One of the best small bedroom ideas we can share is creating symmetry by utilizing your furniture. 

    You can add floor lamps on either side of the bed or put built-in shelves on either side. Using a side table also does the trick! 

    Creating symmetry makes your room look put together and clean.

    15. Add Some Plants

    Add Some Plants

    via : Apartment Therapy

    Consider adding some live plants inside your small bedroom. It can instantly lift your room and your spirits!

    You can add small pots of your favorite succulents and flowers to your side table. 

    If you don't want to put live plants, you can opt for fake plants to still achieve that natural feel.

    16. Skip the Bed Frame

    Skip the Bed Frame

    via : Karup Design

    Bed frames usually take up space in the bedroom. This is why we recommend skipping the bed frame in most small bedroom ideas.

    You can keep your mattress as is, even without the frame. If it feels bare, consider creating a gallery wall or a feature wall. 

    You can add more pillows on the bed, so it doesn't look too bare.

    17. Don't Get a Four Poster Bed

    Don't Get a Four Poster Bed

    via : TurnPost

    Four poster beds look visually appealing. It gives off this classic and quaint vibe, perfect for every bedroom.

    Unfortunately, we don't recommend four poster beds in small bedroom ideas. It tends to make the room look cramped, which is the opposite of what we want.

    This is especially true if the surrounding furniture is large and bulky!

    18. Install a Pull Down Bed or Wall Bed in Your Room

    Install a Pull Down Bed or Wall Bed in Your Room

    via : Luciano Correa

    Consider installing a pull-down/wall bed in your smaller bedroom at home. 

    You can do this for your guest room to utilize the extra space when you don't have visitors around.

    Check out interior design ideas for making the pull-down bed blend into the room!

    19. Use Your Built-in Storage in the Room

    Use Your Built-in Storage in the Room

    via : Amber Interiors INC.

    If your small bedroom has a built-in storage unit, use it! You no longer have to worry about needing additional store boxes or storage areas. 

    Place all your belongings inside the built-in storage, and assemble them properly. 

    20. Add a Floating Shelf to Your Room

    Add a Floating Shelf to Your Room

    via : Pottery Barn

    Add a floating shelf to your accent wall, making your room much homier. We love using floating shelves because they can serve multiple purposes. 

    Not only is it a good interior design idea, but it's also a good way to sneak in some extra storage in your small bedroom.

    Make sure not to overdo the floating shelves in your room. Remember, you don't need to fill every inch of the space with a shelf. 

    Create a Gallery Wall

    via : Color & Chic

    With all the wall space in the room, you're probably excited to fill it with frames and art pieces. It's your gallery of all your good memories.

    However, if you want to make these memories special and create an impact, put it all on one side of your room.

    An accent wall helps draw attention to that space alone. It also helps keep the room looking less cramped.

    22. Skip the Big Bedside Table/Dressing Table

    Skip the Big Bedside Table/Dressing Table

    via : JD Williams

    Bedside tables are a staple in any bedroom. It's the quintessential piece of furniture you'll find in every small bedroom idea.

    You won't need a big bedside table for a small space. A small table is enough for you to put your things. 

    It may not be what you envisioned for your room, but it's still useful. You can put your phone on top and even some of your favorite books.

    23. Have Your Furniture Measured

    Have Your Furniture Measured

    via : Purl Soho

    The beauty of furniture is that you can buy them in all shapes and sizes. Sticking to a general theme is a lot easier, thanks to the wide range of options you have.

    Because of this, it is easy to find furniture that can match your small bedroom ideas.

    Before you buy your piece of furniture, always measure it. Make sure it's the right size for the space you want to put it.

    24. Don't Be Afraid of the Statement Bed

    Don't Be Afraid of the Statement Bed

    via : My Aashis

    A big bed in a small space. Isn't that the opposite of what we want?

    Don't be afraid to go big on your bed, especially if it comes with extra storage underneath. You won't need a dedicated storage area anymore with a storage bed.

    You can always play around with the room layout to ensure your statement bed won't take up all the space.

    25. Loft Bedroom Layout

    Loft Bedroom Layout

    via : Da Vinci Lifestyle

    If you have adequate ceiling height, a great small bedroom idea is to transform your room into a loft space.

    Consider your loft space as a 2-in-1 solution for your bedroom ideas. You can dedicate your entire floor space as a working area by creating a small office space.

    Alternatively, you can also use it as a gaming area or a lounge where you can relax!

    26. Stick to One Color

    Stick to One Color

    via : Home Designing

    We know some of you are tempted to transform your room into a rainbow but stop right now. 

    If you want to make your small space look bigger, we recommend sticking to only one color. Or at least one color palette.

    Doing this makes your room look bright, clean, and easy on the eyes!

    27. Add Shelving Units

    Add Shelving Units

    via : Kasie Chelanne

    Never underestimate the power of having a large shelving unit in a small room. That's instant storage for you!

    It's also a good way to accessorize your room because you can practically put anything. Books, plants, mirrors, frames, candles, you name it!

    PRO TIP

    Always check the dimensions of the shelf you want and compare it to your bedroom wall.

    28. Utilize Every Corner

    Utilize Every Corner

    via : Urban Outfitters

    Every corner in your small room is a gold mine for extra storage room or room accessories.

    Don't leave the corners of your room in the dust. Instead, utilize every corner of it with your favorite furniture.

    You can push your bed to the corners to give you a bigger floor space. In the alternative, you can set up a corner table for a small office space.

    29. Make Your Accessories Pop

    Make Your Accessories Pop

    via : Sage & Sill

    Playing around with color for your bedroom ideas can transform a plain and simple room into a fun and lively one. 

    We recommend adding a few accent pieces in your room that can become the center of attention.

    It could be as simple as a bedside table, a floor lamp, or a table lamp!

    30. Be as Extra as You Want

    Be as Extra as You Want

    via : Apartment Therapy

    At the end of the day, your comfort is our number one priority. After all, you'll be lying on the bed and enjoying your personal space.

    If you feel more comfortable with more colors, shapes, and patterns, don't be afraid to go all out!

    You can unleash your creativity in designing your sleeping space the way you want.

    Top Tips for Designing Small Bedrooms

    We're sure you're excited and ready to start working on your small space. The different tiny bedroom ideas we've listed are enough to get you running to the home store.

    But before you do, we have some helpful tips to make sure you get the most out of your room.

    1. Have a Limited Color Palette

    There's no right and wrong color palette for your small bedroom. But one thing's for sure, stick to a limited palette and don't be all over the place.

    Having a limited color palette makes the room feel like it was professionally done. The colors are in-synch, and everything looks put together.

    We recommend going with a monochromatic theme, regardless of the palette. You don't have to worry about mixing and matching the shades anymore.

    2. Utilize Natural Light

    Believe it or not, natural light can immediately transform your room into a model unit straight from the IKEA website.

    Many overlook the importance of natural light to make the room feel much bigger and more homier.

    Play around with the room and check where the natural light hits. You can utilize mirrors and paint colors to improve the room's feel.

    3. Maximize Storage Space

    We've said it before, and we'll say it again, storage is everything to a small bedroom.

    One of the common problems we often encounter with a small space is the need for more storage options.

    Luckily, there are different storage solutions out there that can create adequate storage even in smaller spaces.

    You can use a storage bed to neatly tuck your things in the space underneath. You can also create a hidden wardrobe space in your room without looking messy!

    4. Consider Made-To-Measure Pieces

    One of the best ways to get all your furniture to fit inside your room is to have made-to-measure pieces.

    Instead of buying store-bought furniture, seek help from a professional to make the furniture fit only your room.

    Doing this helps odd-fitting items. More importantly, you can customize your furniture in the best way possible for your compact bedroom.

    Small Bedroom Design Ideas FAQs

  • Before we leave with our parting words in this small bedroom ideas article, we’ve answered some of the FAQs we get about styling small bedrooms.

    Keep reading, and you might learn something from what we’re about to share.

  • What's the Best Color for a Small Bedroom?

    For us, neutral tones and earth colors are perfect for small bedrooms. It makes the space look bigger and brighter at the same time.

    We recommend soft shades of yellow, blue, gray, and green. But if you want to keep it simple, white walls are just as perfect.

    Dark colors are also okay, and many people like them. You can choose between colors like brown, black, and navy blue bedroom ideas. 

    Although it won’t help make your room look bigger, it will give it a cozy vibe.

  • How Should I Arrange My Small Bedroom?

    There’s no right or wrong way of fixing your small space. You can be as minimal or eccentric with the interior design.

    But one thing’s for sure, you need to learn how to prioritize the essential pieces in your bedroom: clothing and shoe cabinet, storage space, bedside table, and bed, to name a few.

    This will make the room feel organized and complete in the long run! Even with limited floor space, you at least have everything you need in one space.

  • How Can Couples Style a Small Bedroom?

    Some couples usually quarrel about how to style their small bedrooms. With all the debate going on, having a good night’s sleep in their new space seems impossible.

    One great tip we can share, which all couples already know by now, is to communicate. Sit down with your partner and talk about your bedroom ideas and plans.

    Most often than not, the two of you may have different styles and visions. There’s no need to fight about it as long as you communicate and learn to compromise.

  • Empty bedroom with modern interior. Small Bedroom Ideas Conclusion

    Small Bedroom Design Ideas Conclusion

    You don't have to suffer in silence anymore just because of your small bedroom.

    A simple room makeover can transform your small space into a big one. Just stick to the best small bedroom ideas, and you'll be on the right track.

    We hope you enjoyed this article. Let us know in the comments which of the small bedroom ideas you want to try.

    Feel free to share this article with your friends and family who might be looking for small bedroom ideas to spruce up their homes.

    Related Articles

    12 Ways To Put Your Bedroom Corner Space To Good Use

    29 Brilliant Easy to Build DIY Platform Bed

    21 Mindbogglingly Beautiful Fairy Tale Bedrooms for Kids

    21 Super Small Nightstands Ready to Fit in Petite Bedrooms

    37 Simply Spectacular Tree Bed Designs to Pursue

    Recycled Pallet Bed Frames – DIY Pallet Collection

    15 Creative Small Beds Ideas For Small Spaces

    37 Smart DIY Hanging Bed Tutorials and Ideas to Do

    Bedroom Christmas Lights Ideas For A Cozy Atmosphere

    32 Dreamy Bedroom Designs For Your Little Princess

    100 Inexpensive DIY Headboard Ideas for Your Bedroom Design

    47 Stylish Floating Bed Design Ideas

    53 Incredible Hanging Beds to Float in Peace

    33 Epic Navy Blue Bedroom Design Ideas

    6 Best Vacuum Cleaners for Mattress

    33 Simply Brilliant Cheap DIY Nightstand Ideas

    Have you just finished building a new concrete driveway in front of your home? Then it is time that you gave it a fresh new look using concrete paints.

    The driveway is the main entryway to your home, so you need to give it a striking appearance by incorporating a few driveway paint ideas. That way, people coming to your house will have something to look at and admire. Moreover, if you make it durable enough, your driveway will stay attractive for a long time. 

    On that note, you can utilize different materials and finishes to enhance the overall aesthetic while simultaneously enhancing your driveway longevity. But if you are fresh out of ideas about jazzing up your driveway, then allow us to help. 

    In this article, we have discussed some of the trendiest concrete driveway ideas that you can try out. So, without stalling any further, let’s roll! 

    Concrete Driveway Paint

    Concrete Driveway Paint

    A painted driveway can make the exterior of your home look appealing to onlookers. However, you need to be careful when painting your concrete driveway since they have a reputation for developing cracks or other signs of damage too soon. And even if there are no damages, there is a high chance that the paint will get washed away after heavy rains or snowfall. 

    That is why you can’t just use any type of paint for your driveway. There are special types of paints that are suited for this purpose, which is what we have discussed in this section. So, if you want to know what they are, keep reading below. 

    1. Masonry Paint

    Masonry paint is a specialized type of paint that is designed to be applied on masonry surfaces, such as bricks, stones, clay, or concrete. It is composed mostly of silicon, acrylic resins, and other polymeric compounds, due to which it possesses a higher degree of durability and elasticity than conventional paints. Because of these properties, it is also known as elastomeric paint.

    Besides, masonry paint is available in a wide range of colors, so you can choose whichever color suits you best. For added brilliance, you can choose a color that is the same as the house color. Thus, the customizability alone makes it one of the best driveway paint products.

    Applying a fresh coat of masonry paint to your driveway is relatively easy. Since it is made for rough or uneven surfaces, you don’t need to prep the surface extensively before you start painting. Consequently, the time required for painting your driveway is reduced as well, even if you need to apply more than two coats.

    2. Epoxy Paint

    Epoxy paint is another great paint option for your driveway. This concrete paint contains durable epoxy resins that can withstand the toughest environmental conditions with ease. Apart from that, epoxy resins are highly versatile and elastic. So, the paint can withstand heavy loads for a long time without showing any signs of damage.

    That is why you can use it not only to paint your driveway but also to paint floors that have heavy foot or vehicle traffic. Plus, you can use it on the exterior walls to protect them from the elements, such as heavy rains or snowfall. 

    However, you do need to consider the thickness of the paint you want. A thicker coat will be more durable than a thin coat. But on the flip side, a thicker coating will cost you quite a lot.

    You can get the paint in different colors and finishes, so the potential for personalization is great. If you wish, you can opt for transparent epoxy resin, which can be applied over other materials to improve their durability. For instance, you can apply it over your garage floor paint to make it more durable than it currently is.

    One thing that you need to keep in mind, though, is that this paint dries rather slowly, especially if you apply multiple coats. Thus, if you are looking to use your driveway soon, this might not be the best option.

    Concrete Driveway Finishes

    Concrete Driveway Finishes

    Despite the popularity of driveway paints, many professionals recommend against them. They cite reasons such as high annual maintenance costs, and additional labor requirements, both of which are perfectly valid.

    However, this doesn’t mean that all hope is lost since you can go with some great concrete finishes for your new or existing driveway. So, if you are curious to know what they are, read on!

    1. Plain Concrete Driveway

    If you are a fan of minimalistic designs and finishes, then this one is the perfect choice for you. With the plain concrete finish, you get a no-frills look for your driveway. You can also complement it with a grassy lawn around the driveway or even a shrub lining along the edges.

    Achieving this finish is no hassle either since all you have to do is pour the concrete over your driveway area and allow it to dry. In this regard, we recommend putting an even spread of concrete throughout so that there are no irregularities on the surface. The presence of irregularities may make the driveway more vulnerable to damage and disrupt its uniformity.

    2. Polished Concrete Driveway

    This is one of the most attractive finishes that you can give to your driveway. It will give the driveway a lustrous and appealing sheen, which will considerably enhance its aesthetic. Not only that, but the polished concrete is also highly durable against flaking or chipping. It is resistant to sunlight and UV rays, which can make your driveway look dull over time.

    To get the sophisticated, polished look, you will need to put in a lot of labor. Polishing the concrete is often a multi-step process, which requires scrubbing the concrete surface with sandpaper, wire brush, or bonded abrasives. But we believe that the end results make all the effort worth it.

    3. Exposed Aggregate Concrete Driveway

    This is the exact opposite of a polished driveway since you get a very rugged texture from it. Because of this, it is skid-resistant, which implies that there is no risk of slipping or falling, even when the surface is wet or greasy. 

    Moreover, it is pretty attractive to look at since the aggregate materials used in the concrete, such as stone chippings and pebbles, are exposed to the surface. The outer layer of the cement paste is removed, which exposes the aggregate materials below. Likewise, it is relatively low-maintenance as well.

    4. Stamped Concrete Driveway

    You can use stamped concrete for your home’s driveway, which has a finish that can be regarded to be a hybrid of the polished and exposed aggregate options. In that context, it combines the best qualities of both, which makes it a perfect choice for your driveway.

    The stamped concrete finish involves adding a concrete color and texture separately, which helps it to mimic any material or pattern on concrete surfaces when applied. You can use a single color for simple textures or multiple colors for more complex textures. In fact, you can even go with gray or another neutral color to get a more simplistic texture. 

    Once the concrete is applied, it is pressed with a polyurethane concrete stamp to imprint the texture. After it is completely dry, you get a beautiful, durable, and low-maintenance finish that can withstand any weather exposure.

    5. Broom Finish Concrete Driveway

    This finish is somewhat similar to the plain concrete finish that we discussed before. In it, you apply the concrete layer over the driveway area without any additional preparation. However, there is one major point of difference that sets this apart from the plain concrete finish. And that involves running a stiff broom over the concrete surface before it dries up completely.

    Ideally, you would want to run the broom in a single direction for a more uniform texture. But you can also run the broom in a circular motion or any other random motion to create unique variations in the driveway texture.

    As you can guess, this makes the surface relatively rougher than plain concrete. The rough surfaces provide exceptional skid resistance to the driveways, which makes them safer for people and vehicles alike.

    6. Rock Salt Finish Concrete Driveway

    This is a traditional method of adding a very subtle finish to concrete driveways without using any complex tools or chemical reagents. All you need to do is pour some rock salt over the concrete after application. It leaves behind shallow indentations on the concrete surface, which gives it a pattern similar to weathered rocks.

    You need to pour the rock salt over freshly applied concrete that has not yet dried. Pouring it over dried concrete will have no effect other than messing up your driveway. Likewise, once the cement dries up completely, power washing the concrete is mandatory to dilute the rock salt.

    7. Slick Trowel Concrete Driveway Finish

    The slick trowel finish involves applying and fixing the concrete substrate with the help of a manual steel trowel or trowel applicator machine. Here you should keep in mind that there is a very limited window for applying this finish after pouring the concrete. 

    The surface needs to be hard enough to withstand the person or trowel machine. But it should not be hardened too much, or else the trowel won’t be effective.

    In the end, it gives a very rugged appearance to the concrete, which makes it durable enough to withstand bad weather conditions.

    On that note, an interesting aspect of this finish is that the surface texture is pretty smooth, despite having a rough appearance. And because of this, the slick trowel finish makes your concrete driveway incredibly easy to maintain. 

    The smooth surface texture prevents the accumulation of dirt and grime. That's why you can simply wash it with a hose and squeegee it off with a bit of soap solution.

    8. Engraved Concrete Driveway Finish

    If you want to enhance the curb appeal of your driveway considerably, then we recommend getting an engraved concrete driveway design. After you have applied the concrete over the driveway area, you can etch patterns on it using a sharp tool.

    You can etch any type of pattern over the concrete, which makes this finish extremely unique compared to any other type of driveway idea. However, the engraving process requires a lot of time to complete.

    Regardless of the pattern you choose, the engraving needs to be completed before the concrete has fully dried up. A similar principle is used for creating joints in concrete. These joints protect the concrete from cracking when it expands or contracts under extreme temperatures. Therefore, you get practical utility out of an engraved finish as well.

    Other Concrete Driveway Ideas

    Other Concrete Driveway Ideas

    You can go with more innovative and appealing ideas in addition to the paint and finish ideas discussed above. For instance, you could try using different materials alongside concrete, such as stones, asphalt, marble, and so on. They can effectively complement the appearance of your concrete driveway.

    Honestly speaking, the potential ideas that can be generated are limitless. But for the sake of convenience, we have discussed some of the most common and trendy ideas in this section that can significantly ramp up your property value.

    So, we suggest that you keep reading below to know what these ideas are.

    1. Stained Concrete Driveway

    Stained concrete is a very innovative way of refreshing the look and feel of your driveway. Not only that, but concrete stains can also be fairly versatile and economical compared to conventional paints or finishes.

    You can choose between two types of stains - acid-based and water-based. An acid stain reacts with the concrete to form a strong and long-lasting bond and is extremely resistant to fading or peeling. Conversely, a water-based stain dries faster, is comparatively safer, and is available in many colors. Regardless of your choice, a concrete stain will produce a very attractive and natural-looking finish for your driveway.

    Alternatively, you could go with conventional stained brick pavers as well, which are typically used alongside the concrete. They produce a more uniform stain and give your driveway a very rustic appearance.

    2. Irregular Concrete Driveway

    Asymmetric patterns and engravings are quite popular these days, which is why this is a great idea that you can use for your concrete driveway. There are two ways of achieving an irregular appearance - by stamping or by using stones and rocks.

    As we have discussed in a previous section, stamping can help to mimic different textures on concrete. Thus, if you use an irregularly-shaped stamp, you can give the concrete driveway an asymmetric finish.

    Or, you could simply use irregularly shaped stone pavers along with the concrete in your driveway for a more realistic feel. In that case, you should use enough concrete to fill cracks and gaps between the pavers adequately, or else the stones may come loose over time.

    3. Stenciled Concrete Driveway

    This is yet another idea that can significantly enhance the attractiveness of your concrete driveway. And the best part is that this can be done on a new as well as existing driveway. Using a concrete overlay or adhesive-backed stencil, you can liven up our new concrete driveway or refurbish an old one.

    Concrete stencils come in a variety of shapes and patterns, which makes them customizable. Besides, applying stencil patterns on your concrete driveway is fairly easy and doesn’t require considerable prep, which further adds to its convenience.

    4. Concrete Blocks On Driveway

    Instead of pouring concrete into your driveway, you can use pre-built concrete slabs. This idea is not only appealing but also serves a practical purpose. The joints between the concrete blocks protect your driveway from cracking under extremes of temperature. 

    Besides, if you use irregularly shaped slabs, you can create a striking asymmetrical pattern for your whole driveway. Apart from that, you can fill the gaps between the blocks with cobblestones, flagstones, or gravel for a contemporary look. You can even grow grass between the joints for a more unique appearance. 

    5. Slatted Concrete Paver Driveway

    A slatted concrete paver contains several gaps and holes on the surface. In addition to giving your driveway a distinctive look, the slatted concrete helps drain the water on your driveway into the ground below. This effectively helps in stormwater management and prevents the buildup of moss on the concrete surface.

    On top of that, if you use a neutral color tone on the slatted concrete and complement it with lush grass on either side of the driveway, you can give it a highly rustic vibe. Coupled with the water drainage aspect, this is one of the most eco-friendly driveway options to consider.

    Concrete Driveway Ideas Frequently Asked Questions ?

    How to remove paint from concrete driveways?

    If you are looking to refurbish or repaint your already-painted concrete driveway, you will need to remove paint from concrete driveways first. For that, you will need to scrape away the peeled and chipped paint with sandpaper or brush. Then apply a paint stripper, which will remove the paint coating from the concrete.

    You may need to re-apply the paint stripper multiple times in this regard. Just make sure to rinse away the paint stripper after each application. Also, ensure that the paint stripper you are using is compatible with the paint on the concrete surface.

    How thick should your concrete driveway be?

    Typically, a concrete driveway should be around 4 to 5 inches thick. However, the desired thickness of your driveway depends on its usage scenario. 

    If you have lighter vehicles, such as bikes or have light foot traffic on the driveway, a thickness of 3 to 4 inches is sufficient. For regular-sized passenger vehicles and heavier foot traffic, the driveway should at least be 4 to 5 inches thick. And for considerably heavy vehicles or storing multiple vehicles at once, the thickness of your driveway should be over 5 inches.

    How to avoid water from puddling on your concrete driveway?

    As a rule of thumb, concrete driveways should always have a sloped design to eliminate excess water from the surface. In this regard, you can keep the center of the driveway thicker than the sides, which will effectively prevent the puddling of water. Or, you could slope the driveway gently towards the street to drain the water outside your home.

    Alternatively, you can opt for a slatted concrete design for your driveway, which will take care of the water management issues altogether.

    What is the life expectancy of a concrete driveway?

    Usually, the average lifespan of a well-built concrete driveway can be around 25 to 30 years. However, it depends on usage and maintenance as well. If you use your driveway very frequently or you run heavy vehicles on it, the driveway will degrade faster than normal. Likewise, the lack of periodic maintenance will degrade the concrete driveway more quickly.

    The top finish or paint of concrete driveways has a slightly less lifespan of around 10 to 15 years. This is because the upper surface is exposed to harsh weather conditions, such as rain and sunlight. In addition to the regular usage, these factors take a toll on the top surface too.

    Does a concrete driveway need rebars?

    Rebar is a structural component that makes the concrete stronger and more resistant to damage. So ideally, it would be a good idea to use rebar for your concrete driveway. However, it is not absolutely necessary in all cases, especially if the ground below is firm. 

    The costs also need to be considered since using rebars on your concrete driveway can be considerably expensive. If your driveway won’t be having too much traffic, it will be more feasible to build your driveway without rebars.

    Concrete Driveway Ideas Final Words

    Concrete Driveway Ideas Final Words

    Like most other outdoor features, such as porches, patios, or pool decks, the driveway is an integral part of your home. And that is why we have discussed both the concrete floor paint ideas and the finishes you can use for your driveway.

    Some of these ideas are simple enough, and you can do them on your own, provided you invest the necessary time behind the task. But if you find the DIY process too complicated, you can hire a professional mason or contractor who can get the job done in a jiffy.

    With that said, we have arrived at the end of this informative guide about concrete driveway ideas. We hope you have been inspired enough after reading through it.

    So, until next time, adios!

    To give old wardrobes or tables a complete makeover, you can try your hands on chalk paint for furniture

    It is true that chalk paint is slightly different from other standard paints like latex or acrylic, and there’s a bit of a learning curve. However, once you get the hang of it, trust us, there’s no going back. This paint requires minimal prep work, and you can get started with just a few accessories. 

    Once the surface area is prepared, you can directly get to applying the paint on your furniture pieces. But as we have mentioned, there’s a slight learning curve, and you will have to follow a few steps. Study the material that you are working on, get the right brushes and paint, and you’re good to go. 

    To help you, we have prepared a beginner’s guide to use chalk paint. Let’s dive right in! 

    What Exactly Is Chalk Style Paint?

    Chalk Style Paint

    Before we go into the nitty gritty of chalk painting furniture, let’s first take a look at what it is. 

    Annie Sloan chalk paint is one of the oldest available paints out there, and we thought it would be a good starting point. It was originally manufactured by her and presented a luxurious and velvety finish. And the best part about using chalk paint is that you won’t necessarily have to prime or sand the furniture before applying the paint. 

    This ultra matte paint is mostly liked by people who do not like a glossy finish on their furniture. 

    It dries up super quickly on painted furniture and is preferred because of the versatility it puts on the table. And most of the chalk paint that you find on the market can be applied on a range of materials, such as wood, glass, fabric, ceramic, and so on. 

    Steps To Follow: Chalk Paint For Furniture

    Young woman painting drawer. Furniture repair. Do it yourself. Handmade. Chalk Paint For Furniture.

    Now, it is time we take you through the various steps involved in making chalk-painted furniture. 

    1. Choose The Work Piece Carefully

    In case you have no prior experience working with chalk paint, it is always best that you first practice on a tiny piece. Directly painting the furniture might lead to dire results. 

    Most people have experience using acrylic or latex paints. In case you are in the same boat, we suggest that you spend some time practicing how to use chalk paint, as it involves a significant learning curve. 

    Before applying chalk paint, it is always ideal to get acquainted with its properties first. You would not want to experiment with your luck on the final piece directly. So, it is best that you first practice and then select the piece that you want to transform. 

    2. Get Your Supplies In Place

    We suggest that before you start chalk painting, gather all your supplies and accessories required for the job. You won’t need to prepare a lot, as the paint does not generate any fumes. So, you can conduct the painting process indoors too, if there’s enough space. 

    To be able to paint in the house is a great plus for DIY enthusiasts as there are no elaborate processes involved. If you decide on doing the same, it is best that you keep some drop cloth handy. Or you can opt for a lint-free cloth as well. This will help you immediately clean stains when there are spills. 

    Special Tips

    When using chalk paint on a piece of furniture, you can make it sit on a wooden block. That will help you paint all across with much ease, especially the bottom half. You can make use of any type of paint brush that you like for the purpose. However, you will also find certain brushes that are made specifically for this.. 

    A professional painter would tell you that an angled paint brush is a great bet for chalk paint projects. 

    In case you take up a paint project that is big, it is best to use a roller and not a brush. Suppose you are painting kitchen cabinets or big wardrobes; it is best to use rollers as that will help you save time. When painting more intricate areas, we suggest you use a paint brush to ensure that all the nooks are painted well during the first coat. 

    Once that is done, use a roller when applying the second coat. Some people even opt for using paint sprayers too. In case you want to spray paint furniture, it is recommended that you thin the paint first. 

    3. Cleaning And Preparing The Piece

    Before you can apply chalk paints on furniture, it is crucial that you clean the surface properly. Unless you do that, the final output might be compromised. In the worst-case scenario, dirt and grime will show through the paint, and the color might not stick well to the surface. 

    For cleaning, you can make use of a number of materials. The most commonly used ones are denatured alcohol, Windes, and TSP. If the surface is not too dirty, you can simply use a soap and water mix. Once you are done with the cleaning, it is prep time!

    Remember that all materials are different and need to be handled differently. If you love chalk paint and want the results to be amazing, it is essential that you fill all gaps and holes during this step. You can consider using sand smooth or wood filler for this purpose. 

    Don’t believe anyone who says that chalk painting needs no preparation. For the colors to come out well, make sure you lightly sand all rough surfaces before you embark on the color process.

    Special Tips

    Many DIYers who have no prior experience in painting wood complain about how the colors bleed. There are some woods that are very dark in color, like mahogany, which might result in bleeding even after you apply multiple paint coats. 

    The solution? You simply have to use a sealant on the furniture piece before applying the paint. A primer or sealant is great as it will help prevent the wood color from mixing with the chalk paint and save time. 

    4. Time To Paint

    After you are done with the cleaning and prepping, now it’s time to have some fun! A word of caution, before you start painting, make sure that you remove all sanding dust that the light sanding might have generated. 

    For prepping the paint brush, run it under water before dipping it in the paint can. It is also essential that you give the brush a squeeze to ensure there’s no excess water. The brush should ideally be wet but not dripping water so that you can paint smoothly. 

    Now, it is time to check the color in the can. You should ideally be thinking of creating a thin layer on the furniture. And if you notice that the paint present in the can is very thick, just mix a few spoons of water and give it a good stir. 

    If you have used chalk paints before, you will know that they tend to become thick over time, so this is a crucial step to follow. 

    Coming to the painting style, most people like painting with wood grain. However, when you are renovating a piece of old furniture, you can opt for a crosshatch painting style that will help preserve the look. 

    Special Tips

    If you like an ultra-smooth look, you can put a foam cabinet roller to use. 

    We would suggest ensuring that the finish is proper, so consider lightly sanding between the coats. Do this before the last coat and before applying the top coat as well. For the ultimate finish, you can thin out the last paint coat by adding a bit of water to the paint. 

    Chalk paints are a great bet for DIY enthusiasts as the paint tends to dry up pretty quickly. This will make your furniture painting process quicker, and you will be done with it in a short span of time. The best part is that you will not have to spend long hours between the coats to ensure that they dry fast. 

    Also, keep in mind that the first paint coat might look a bit splotchy but there’s nothing to worry about. This blotchy look will vanish with the subsequent color coats that you put in. 

    5. Additions 

    Did you know that you can add interesting elements to chalk paint when taking on a furniture makeover project? This, however, is not a mandatory step.

    But you can consider using stencils, transfers, or graphics to give your painted piece a special touch and ensure that it stands out from others. 

    6. Apply Wax For Protection

    Unlike latex paint, chalk paint lacks a sealer. Therefore, it is best that you use clear wax on the furniture surface after you are done with the painting. A wax coat will ensure that the color does not fade and water causes no damage to it. 

    But before applying the wax, ensure that the paint coat has dried up completely. Also, get a separate wax brush for the purpose. These brushes are different from regular paint brushes and are specifically designed to apply wax coats. The only downside to these brushes is that you cannot use them for painting once you’ve applied furniture wax with them. 

    For a few projects, you have to be really generous when applying wax. So, we’d suggest keeping a paper towel handy to wipe off  the excess wax as you keep working. 

    Wax coating can be really useful when you are working with dark woods, as it will prevent the possibility of color bleeding. If you know how to apply glaze to painted furniture, you will face no difficulty with this step as the process is pretty similar. 

    Choosing Between Regular And Dark Wax

    When you choose wax to cover coffee tables or other pieces of furniture, you need to keep in mind that there are two choices. You can either opt for a dark wax or a regular wax, depending on your requirements. 

    As the name suggests, dark wax, when applied to furniture, gives off a dark tinge that makes the piece look dated. If you have a preference for old-world looks, this might work well for you. But keep in mind, when you decide on using a dark wax, you will have to designate a brush only for that purpose. 

    Once you use a brush for dark wax, there’s no way that you will be able to use it for regular wax or for other painting needs. 

    White wooden chest of drawers with vintage bronze handles under the desk in the interior of children's room, home office. Chalk Paint For Furniture Frequently Asked Questions.

    Chalk Paint For Furniture Frequently Asked Questions ?

    What can be used to seal chalk paint other than wax?

    There are a lot of people who do not prefer using wax on chalk paint because it involves going through a labor-intensive process. The finish that wax delivers is undoubtedly glamorous. But the time it takes is quite a lot. 

    If you do not want to put in all that time and effort, you can simply go for a poly coat. There are plenty of poly options that you will find on the market, and they do a pretty decent job. However, let us warn you that the final output is not as great when you apply a light coat of wax. 

    Apart from that, poly has a few other disadvantages. Many DIYers complained that when they painted poly on white or other light-colored furniture, they noticed that the top coat soon started to turn yellow. 

    However, yellowing of color sometimes happens because of the underlying wood, and to prevent it, consider using a primer. 

    What is the difference between chalkboard paint and chalk paint?

    Just knowing how to paint furniture with farrow and ball chalk paint to give it the ultimate makeover is not enough. Knowing when to use what paint is essential to give your furniture the looks they deserve. 

    For example, if you are trying to turn the big cabinet in your kid’s nursery into a canvas, consider using chalkboard paint. This color delivers a surface on which your kids can write with chalk and erase the writings when they like. 

    On the other hand, chalk paint is quite different. It is pretty similar to other regular wall paints, apart from the fact that it delivers a unique finish. So, even though the names are quite similar, their functionalities vary widely. 

    Is it essential to sand before applying chalk paint?

    Chalk paint is water-based, and you can directly paint it over a clean and dry surface. It can be applied even if the surface is already painted. And although not mandatory, it is best that you do some light sanding before applying chalk paint. 

    We also suggest that you use a wax coat as the final touch to give the ultimate sheen to your furniture. 

    As we have mentioned, since chalk paint is water-based, you will have no trouble cleaning the brush after you are done painting. You will not need to dip the brushes in mineral spirits to get rid of the color. Simply dip them in water, and the color will come off. 

    How much drying time does chalk paint need?

    The drying time required for chalk paints varies slightly from company to company. In case you are using Annie Sloan paints, it is best that you give it a day between paint coats to enjoy the best results. 

    It is true that the ‘curing time’ for chalk paint is less, and the coats will feel dry to the touch in a few hours. But when you are painting furniture, we recommend that you provide enough drying time between the coats to ensure that each layer solidifies properly and becomes durable. That will ensure that the paint lasts for a long time. 

    After you are sure that the coats are completely dry, you can proceed to apply a final wax coat or a poly sealer. This protective finish will further enhance the durability of the paint. 

    Is it necessary to thin chalk paint?

    Honestly, chalk paint is relatively thicker when compared to other standard paints that are available on the market. So, we would advise that you add some water to the paint to ensure that the painting process is smooth. 

    On adding water, the consistency of the paint changes, and it becomes easier for you to use the brush. Also, experts suggest that adding some amount of water to the chalk color and thinning it out helps in ensuring that the final finish is smooth. 

    Chalk Paint For Furniture Final Words

    Chalk Paint For Furniture Final Words

    That’s all we have for you today! We hope that you had a good time going through this informative read. 

    You can try and experiment as much as you want with chalk paints. Some people even use chalk paints for a dual tone where one color shows through the other. This can be really great when you are trying to create a shabby chic look. 

    If you have more questions, consider reaching out to the manufacturer of the chalk paint that you purchase. And make sure that you follow the steps we have mentioned for the ultimate chalk paint results. 

    Until next time, take care! 

    Art is a form of expressing one's feelings. 

    It has transcended across time, becoming a part of our daily lives. Wherever we go, we always get to see various forms of art. Take a look at your wallpaper. Isn’t it a form of art created by some artist? Or it may be a strategically clicked picture by a renowned photographer. Or it’s a selfie, and well, you are a work of art, too! 

    If you take a closer look, art is limitless, and so are the different artistic techniques and methods associated with art. So, can you paint oil over acrylic? Don’t worry beginners tend to get lost in the world of art and aesthetics. That’s where we come in. 

    After extensive research, we have curated this blog to guide you on the various oil paints for professionals, especially acrylic and oil paints techniques, as well as complete oil paints how to guides for beginners so you can bring life to your artwork. 

    FUN FACT | Did you know, there is a type of paper called yupo, which modern painters are shifting to from traditional paper? We have an existing article on how to paint on yupo paper to curb your curiosity. 

    So, you can relax and enjoy this read. 

    Types Of Paints

    Can you paint oil over acrylic

    Paints have the ability to transform any room or canvas into an artistic masterpiece. But have you ever wondered what the different types of paints are? There is a variety to choose from, and we are here to guide you. 

    Based on our research, paints are divided into two main categories - oil paint and acrylic paint. Here’s a simple informative guide on the two most commonly used paints and their applications: 

    Oil Paints

    Oil paint is a type of slow-drying paint formulated by mixing pigment particles with drying oil such as refined linseed oil. Linseed oil is well known for being flexible and highly resistant to cracks, making this oil best suited for making oil paints. 

    Moreover, one can change the viscosity of the paint by modification. In most cases, solvents such as turpentine or white spirit are used to make the paint more resistant and durable for a longer period of time. In order to improve the glossiness, some artists prefer to add varnish to the oil-based paint. 

    Applications And Tips To Remember While Choosing Oil Paints:

      • Oil-based paints offer a rich finish, boast water-resistant properties, and are long-lasting and durable.
      • It is highly recommended for trim work.
      • It is best suited for walls, windows, metals, doors, and stained surfaces for durability.
      • It is also easy to apply and use.

    Benefits Of Using Oil Paints:

      • Attractive glossiness
      • Ideal for high moisture rooms (ex. kitchen and bathroom)
      • Long-lasting

    Acrylic Paints

    In contrast to oil paint, acrylic paints are well known for being a fast-drying paint as they are made of pigments suspended in various other solvents like stabilizers, silicone oil, deformers, and many more, as well as acrylic polymer emulsion. In general, acrylic paints are a kind of water-based paints, but some tend to resist water when they dry up. 

    Moreover, the final acrylic work can either resemble a gouache, a watercolor, or an oil paint, depending on the amount of water diluted with the acrylic paint. Modifying the paint with acrylic gels, acrylic medium, acrylic gesso, and paste can also alter the dynamics of the paint. 

    Applications And Tips To Remember While Choosing Acrylic Paints:

      • Acrylic paints have strong adhesion to a wide range of materials such as wood, masonry, metals, and plastics.
      • It can dry very fast (it tends to take 5-20 minutes).
      • It can also retain color and resist the harmful effects of UV rays and the Sun.
      • Acrylic paints have a creamy, water-based consistency and smoothness.

    Benefits Of Using Acrylic Paints:

      • Water-soluble
      • Affordable
      • Quick-drying
      • Versatile as you can mix it with different mediums to get different results.

    Can You Paint Oil Over Acrylic?

    Over the last few years, artists have debated whether they should paint oil over acrylic or not. After years of research and testing, it has been proven that high-quality acrylic gesso and paints provide excellent adhesion to oil paints.

    Additionally, adhesion is rarely an issue when it comes to mixing oil paints with acrylic gels, gesso, and mediums. Keeping this in mind, we still recommend carefully modifying the two paints to get better results for your artistic photos and images on your canvas. 

    Guidelines To Remember While Using Oil Over Acrylics

    Here are some methods and techniques to remember while using oil over acrylic to get the best results on your canvas:

    1. Protect Natural Fiber Substrates

    While painting, we recommend applying three to four coats of acrylic gesso or two coats of acrylic medium. Papers, canvas, and linen tend to soak the oil from the oil paint, and this could result in premature deterioration of natural fibers. Wood substrates are highly resistant to oil penetration, but we still recommend applying acrylic sizing between the wood substrates for better protection against absorption. 

    2. Let The Acrylic Layers Dry Fully Before Applying An Oil Coat

    Based on our research, acrylic paints take a longer time to dry based on the number of coats an artist has applied to the surface. Thinner coats can dry easily within three to four days, while thicker coats tend to take a longer time to dry. We recommend waiting till the coats have completely dried up before applying the oil paint. 

    3. Avoid Using Any Soft Or Spongy Acrylic As A Base

    Since acrylic paints have the ability to stay flexible for an indefinite period, layers of oil paints on top can become fragile over the decade. Further, soft or spongy acrylic paints take a longer time to become rigid, and therefore it is recommended to avoid them as the base for oil paints. 

    4. Stay Away From Textures And Sharp Peaks

    Just like the previous point, gels and paste can soften if exposed to increasing temperatures. Moreover, ridges, sharp peaks, and pointy mounds could compromise the flexibility of the acrylic paints and make the oil overcoat brittle. 

    5. Multiple Layers = Better Stiffness

    Increasing the stiffness of the base has proven to be highly beneficial for oil paints. Adding multiple layers of acrylic paints can increase the stiffness of the base and improve the rigidity of the oil paints for a longer period. This is especially important while working with flexible support and thinner acrylic paints. 

    6. Matte Or Gloss Surfaces? 

    During our research, we observed excellent adhesion toward both surfaces. But in most cases, a matte surface provides better adhesion and toothing for any system. For better results, we recommend using matte acrylics over a glossy acrylic base for additional toothing and adhesion to your oil paint coat. 

    7. Avoid Highly Absorbent Acrylic Paints

    Lastly, some acrylics have a higher tendency to be absorbent such as the Golden Absorbent Ground. Such paints can easily draw out the excess oils from the top coat, leaving the layer more matte and friable. Moreover, this could result in potential cracking or flaking. Applying a layer of thinner acrylic or thinner oil paints could help in reducing the absorbency of these surfaces while making them more desirable for oil paint use. 

    Paint Oil Over Acrylic Frequently Asked Questions

    Paint Oil Over Acrylic Frequently Asked Questions?

    In this section, we will cover some of the most frequently asked questions related to acrylic paints and oil paints. 

    Is It Possible To Paint Acrylic Paint Over Oil-Based Paint?

    Under most circumstances, acrylic paints or water-based paints can easily peel off from the oil-based paint base, and therefore it is advisable to avoid such a method. The formula of acrylics doesn’t bond well with oil-based paints. Taking the right precautions and steps could help in achieving the right outcome. 

    Which Is The Most Commonly Used Support Medium for Oil Painting?

    In most cases, linseed oil is commonly used as a support medium for oil painting. The chemical structure and composition of linseed are best suited to achieve the desired results, but certain precautions should be taken. We recommend a certain amount of thinning of the solvent or the use of cold-pressed linseed oil to reduce drag and achieve a smooth finish. 

    What Types Of Medium Can Be Used With Oil Paint?

      • Turpentine
      • Oils from walnuts
      • Oil from linseed which is an excellent source for omega-3 acids
      • White spirit
      • Environmental-friendly solvents

    What Steps To Keep In Mind While Painting Over Acrylic Paints?

    Here are some steps you should follow while painting over acrylics… 

      • Before painting over acrylic paint, make sure to dry it completely
      • Remember to sand out any texture you want from the acrylic paint
      • Use multiple coats for better stiffness and firmness
      • Always wait till the humidity falls down and then dry the first coat
      • Always use small containers to store your gesso

    How Often Should You Clean Your Paint Brush?

    Based on our research, we recommend washing your paintbrush as often as possible for better longevity. Make sure to clean them thoroughly every time you decide to paint something new. Watercolors and acrylics can be easily removed with water. On the other hand, it is recommended to use chemical solvents to clean oil-based paints from your brush. 

    What Colors To Get As Beginners?

    As a beginner, we would recommend getting red, yellow, and blue along with white. Make sure to pick a warmer and cooler version of the primary colors, as it would give you better results once you start mixing them. In this way, the color combinations are limitless, and you can experiment to your heart's content! 

    What Should You Paint On?

    Painting has no limits, and you can paint on any surface as long as it provides proper toothing and grip to your paint. Acrylics are best suited for canvas, paper, wood, cards, and many more. The use of primer is mandatory while using oil paints since they tend to deteriorate the paper or thread of the canvas. 

    Which Paint Is More Affordable?

    Generally, oil paints tend to have a higher maintenance cost than acrylic paints. Acrylics, however, are easier to use, and painting mediums are not mandatory. 

    But on the whole, oil paints require various painting tools and solvents, which add to the maintenance cost. In addition to this, you will need to get a primed canvas or primer if you want to use oil paints. 

    Which Paint is Best Suited For Craft Projects?

    Based on our research, Acrylic paints are best suited for paintings and craft projects. Also, they are well known for drying fast, and you can apply them on most surfaces. 

    Can you paint oil over acrylic

    Paint Oil Over Acrylic Final Verdict

    Now that we are nearing the end of our informative blog, we hope you have a better idea of the different techniques and methods of painting your art. Different paints add to various dynamics of your art, and they can bring life to your imagination if used correctly. 

    But before we wrap up, let us summarize a few observations when it comes to acrylic paints and oil paints. Acrylics are easy to use and require less maintenance cost. Plus, they are well suited for quick craft projects. 

    On the other hand, oil-based paints are highly water-resistant and durable for a long period. But, we also suggest taking a few precautions and steps while painting oil over acrylic paints. 

    That said, we’ll be signing off now, but stay tuned for more informative articles. Until next time! 

    For today's artists, there’s no dearth of painting mediums for expressing their ideas on canvas. 

    One such medium is acrylic paints, which has attracted art enthusiasts owing to its intriguing composition and range of shades. Look around you or search the web— you’ll find a multitude of acrylic paintings by artists who can’t get enough of this exciting variety of paint. 

    So, if you’re yet to try it out for your paintings or have limited knowledge regarding its applications, now is the time to take the leap. 

    But we know there are many considerations to make and essential factors to be aware of if you wish to work with acrylic paints. So, we’ve tried to help you out by curating this comprehensive guide on the various ways to enhance your artwork using high grade acrylic paints

    Let’s find what is acrylic paint for artwork here together. 

    What Is Acrylic Paint For?

    What Is Acrylic Paint For

    Before we move on to discuss the various applications of acrylic, such as whether acrylic paints can be used on metals or not, we’ll help you develop a clear idea about this paint type and other vital aspects associated with it. 

    Let’s get started. 

    About Acrylic Paint And Its Main Ingredients

    Introduced in 1934, acrylic paint is formed primarily using three ingredients: an acrylic resin suspension, pigment particles, and water. The best part about this paint is that it possesses qualities of both watercolor and oil paints, which is why artists began applying it as an alternative to those in the 1950s. 

    Also, you can dilute it with water easily, which implies you can use it to create lighter shades for any specialized artwork. This paint can’t be regarded as a complex variety since the components mentioned above make up most of its composition. So, let’s briefly learn about the significance of each of them in the formulation: 

    1. Acrylic Pigments

    These pigments are responsible for providing color to all acrylic paints and are generally obtained from a natural source. But you can get synthetic varieties of these pigments as well. These minute pigment particles are immersed in the paints and are not similar in any way to the surface that they’re used on. That’s why you’ll need other components when applying the pigments to your canvas. 

    2. Acrylic Binder

    As the pigments won’t stick to any surface on their own, you’ll need something to ensure they stay on your canvas. And that’s where acrylic binders come into the picture. After the water has evaporated, the binder and acrylic polymer combine to form a coat that clings firmly to the surface or paper. 

    3. Water

    In acrylic paints, the water actually works as a vehicle to transport the pigment and the binder to the area where you wish to add the paint. When combined with the acrylic binder, it creates an acrylic polymer emulsion. Upon evaporation of the water, the paint dries to a clear film of polymers containing colored pigment particles. 

    Other Components Of Acrylic Paint

    Apart from the basic ingredients of acrylic paint, there is more to its composition. To ensure the pigments don’t float on the water surface, a paint dispersant is added to the formulation as it provides better consistency. Paint brands also often include other components to enhance the effectiveness of these paints. 

    Back in the 70s and in successive periods, artists began to use acrylic paints extensively, and since then, they have only become more popular over time. In this section, we’ve discussed the main reasons behind this immense popularity. 

    1. Elastic and Flexible

    This implies acrylic paints will contract and expand as temperatures fall and rise, without cracking or flaking in the artwork. And even after they’ve dried fully, they’ll remain equally flexible.

    2. Non-Toxic And Non-Flammable

    Standard acrylic paints don’t come with inferior-quality pigments or binders, which is why they aren’t flammable or toxic at all and don’t emit any kind of fumes. This makes sure that these paints are completely safe for kids and pets. 

    3. Fast Drying And Permanent

    Want to know how long do acrylic paints take to dry? The short answer is: fast. But acrylics also keep the colors intact over time, especially if you are using artist-grade quality. Another great benefit, they’ll never turn yellow in the long term, which often happens with oil paints. 

    Remember that some cheaper acrylics might lose their saturation with time, though they will not fade entirely. 

    4. Highly Water-Soluble

    The high water solubility of acrylic paints makes it easy to wash palettes and brushes, plus your hands using water and soap. That’s why you won’t need turpentine or paint thinners for the cleanup, unlike some other paints. 

    5. Water-Resistant Upon Drying

    Last but not least, they become completely waterproof upon drying, so rest assured your finished acrylic painting won’t be affected if it accidentally comes in contact with water. 

    The Types Of Acrylic Paint

    Acrylic paints are available to artists in a number of types, which actually signifies they come in different thicknesses. But the paint consistency is independent of its pigment content or quality. The difference lies in the binders applied in the paints — they might be semi-gloss, matte, or gloss. 

    Applying a gloss binder can make the paint transparent. On the other hand, matte and semi-gloss finishes are slightly milky and translucent when you lay down the paint. 

    1. Soft Body Paints

    Akin to their name, these acrylic paints are very smooth and thin in terms of texture, almost like yogurt. They facilitate smooth application and are perfect for combining with different acrylic mediums like flow improvers, retarding mediums, and texture gels, to name a few. 

    2. Heavy Body Paints

    These are the thickest and heaviest among all the types of acrylic paints and are also the most popular variety. Heavy body paints are similar to acrylics in that they retain brush strokes and marks and provide a feel of soft butter. Note that such paints also work well on rough canvases. 

    3. Fluid Paints

    These paints are available in bottles rather than tubes and come with the consistency of double cream. They’re ideal for painting fine details, staining, and glazing and might even be applied using airbrushes or sprayed onto your canvas. 

    4. Acrylic Gouache

    You shouldn’t confuse this variety with the regular gouache as they’re a lot different. Acrylic gouaches are efficient choices in case you wish to paint a large space with a single color. That’s why illustrators find these paints to be really useful for their projects. As they dry, they level out brush marks and dry to velvety matte finishes. 

    5. Spray Paints

    By applying acrylic spray paints, you can cover larger areas with thin paint layers while also controlling the amount of paint to lay down. This lets you paint either fine lines of paint or a lot in one go. Note that this type can also be used efficiently with other acrylics. 

    6. Open Acrylic Paints

    This is another variety resembling oil paint in that it dries slowly; hence you would be able to apply the same techniques as used for the latter type. Notably, some of these techniques include color blending on the canvas or surface and wet-on-wet paintings. 

    7. Interactive Acrylics

    Up next is a unique type of acrylic paint that you can wet again once dried, though it dries up at the same pace as the other types. Thus, you can slow down the drying time of these paints just by adding a little bit of the unlocking solution. 

    Note here that unlocking solutions are specialized chemicals that can help you modify or retouch a dry painting as per your needs. You may apply this solution using a spray bottle or brush. 

    8. Acrylic Ink

    Here’s another, more fluid variety of acrylic paint that’s used by grinding the pigment to a super-fine powder and suspending it in an emulsion. Note that this emulsion is just as viscous as water, which implies it can be used with pens, airbrushes, and normal brushes quite smoothly. 

    Also, acrylic ink colors are quite intense and ultimately provide a highly glossy look to an artwork. 

    Different Grades Of Acrylic Paint

    The various acrylic paints can also be combined to provide artists with better control over their application. After all, they might want to use these paints in their own way. Such applications and techniques are quite vast, which is why different grades of acrylic paint can be created using its different types. 

    Student Acrylic Paints

    This grade of paint contains binders in higher proportions than pigments, while mediums and fillers are also added to create more bulk. However, these ingredients might affect the saturation and opacity of the paints. Note that some may find them to be more chalky owing to the filler content. 

    Student grade paints are suited for those who prefer a more budget-friendly option, such as beginners or amateur artists. 

    Artist-Grade Paints

    Artist-grade acrylics are prepared using more of the binder and many other components that help enhance their quality. A point worth noting is the low color shift of these paints, meaning that they are less likely to turn darker with time, unlike the cheaper varieties. Plus, the greater binder content makes them quite affordable. 

    Professional-Grade Paints

    The professional-grade varieties undoubtedly have the highest quality and utilize superior pigments in their formulation. Note that even the other ingredients included are of the best quality, and the proportion of binder added is much lesser than the other paint grades. 

    The resultant paint is quite vibrant and offers numerous options to artists. 

    However, a point of caution is that they’re much more expensive than other grades of paint, though the price might vary from one brand to another. And based on the ingredients and pigments applied, the texture, opacity, drying time, and other qualities of professional-grade acrylics might vary. 

    Young beautiful smiling woman with dark curly hair sitting on chair. What Is Acrylic Paint For.

    Buying The Right Type Of Acrylic Paint

    First, you should know that choosing a particular brand or type of acrylic paint depends on various factors, including your preferred style, techniques, and surfaces. There are also some general considerations, which are as follows: 

    1. Quality

    The quality of paint you’ll need for your projects is a key factor, as it will determine how your artwork will ultimately turn out to be. First of all, it’s essential to consider how you want it to be — whether a low pigment content will suffice or you want the acrylic painting to be more vibrant. 

    The greater vibrancy and consistency of professional-grade paints make them suitable for seasoned artists who are looking to create masterpieces. Note that such paints will be easier to layer and blend, which implies they also offer greater versatility. Likewise, getting some student-grade and artist-grade paints will suffice if you’re a beginner in the field. 

    We’d recommend using artist-grade paints when you start creating paintings that you want to preserve in the long term. 

    Another alternative is to use the student-grade paints for just the earth colors, but make sure to use superior varieties for the more intense colors. On a side note, a few artists also use student colors for underpainting and apply professional-quality paints on top. 

    2. Viscosity

    Viscosity can also be referred to as the thickness or consistency of acrylic paint. That’s why it’s important to figure out the consistency you’ll need for the project at hand. Side by side, you should be clear about your personal preferences in this regard. 

    If you want the brushstrokes to be retained in the artwork, it’s best to go for heavy body paints. On the other hand, the fluid varieties are thinner though they come with a similar pigment concentration. And in case you want consistency somewhere in between, you’ll also find different mediums to combine with the paint to yield the desired outcome. 

    3. Lightfastness

    This quality tells you how well the pigment can resist fading on exposure to light. The varieties that fade gradually are often termed fugitive colors. Note that most acrylics have much higher permanence ratings compared to watercolor or oil paints. 

    While selecting the right paint for your projects, you should take into account some lightfastness standards. The ASTM International, formerly called American Society For Testing Materials, categorizes colors based on an assessment that simulates two decades of exposure to the gallery. 

    • ASTM I - Excellent permanence
    • ASTM II - Efficient lightfastness
    • ASTM III - Lightfastness not sufficient

    Except for when you’re experimenting, I’d suggest using paints with very good or excellent lightfastness. Remember that the ASTM rating will be mentioned on the jar or tube containing the paints. 

    4. Brands

    Certain brands might be better compared to others. However, with regard to the top-notch manufacturers in the business, it’s mostly about personal preferences. 

    5. Drying Times

    While acrylic paints are loved for their ability to dry very quickly, this property becomes a hassle in case the paint on the palette or brush dries out before you’ve finished the artwork. 

    Additionally, if you’re willing to combine paint and create a blending effect, it’s more convenient if the paint remains wet for a longer time. This is possible with retarding mediums or by using interactive acrylics, a newer type containing retardants that we discussed earlier in our guide. Such paints and mediums can slow down the drying time to a couple of weeks. 

    Notably, open acrylic paints are also convenient for those willing to replicate the look of an oil painting with acrylics. 

    6. Container Type

    Acrylic paints come in either jars or tubes, with the former option being more cost-effective as you get more paint with every purchase. However, the paint tubes are smaller and easier to carry. 

    Even the consistency of the two varieties differs slightly — while tubes contain paste-like paints, those coming in jars are thicker though they will flatten when kept on the color palette. 

     

    A Guide On Using Acrylic Paints

    1. Choosing The Colors You’ll Need

    As there’s a vast range of acrylic colors to choose from, any beginner may find it difficult to figure out those they need. Additionally, some colors are costlier than others, irrespective of their grade. That’s because a few pigments are more difficult to obtain compared to others. 

    But in most cases, you’ll find that earth hues are the most cost-effective options, while cadmium hues are the costliest. In case you’ve just started out with acrylic colors, we’d recommend going for a set of acrylic paints or only the following colors: 

    • Burnt Sienna
    • Alizarin Crimson
    • Cadmium Red
    • Cadmium Orange
    • Dioxazine Purple
    • Cadmium Yellow
    • Phthalo Green
    • Phthalo Blue
    • Titanium White
    • Ivory Black

    2. Selecting The Tools

    Unlike the paraphernalia required for creating oil paintings, you’ll need just a couple of budget-friendly tools for working with acrylics, which are as follows: 

    • Brushes

    The most suitable brushes for acrylics are synthetic as they work well with such paints. Notably, you’ll need two round and two flat brushes for painting with acrylics, a large and a small one for each type. 

    • Acrylic Paint Set

    Make sure that the set you’re getting contains all the shades of paint that we’ve listed above. 

    • Palette Knife

    You’ll need a tool to mix the paints properly, and a palette knife will be most suitable for the purpose. That’s because it won’t get clogged with paint, which might happen with brushes and damage their bristles. 

    • The Painting Surface

    Your painting surface should be clean and free of wax or oil, as well as small particles and dust that might stick to it. 

    • Plate Or Palette

    You’ll have to mix the color or put down color dabs on such an additional surface. 

    • Water

    You will have to rinse the brushes at certain points during your painting sessions. So, make sure to keep a cup of water by your side. 

    3. Some Essentials Of The Process

    Once you’ve gathered all the tools and equipment, you can start with an acrylic painting project. But in case you’re a beginner, it might take time to get accustomed to how quickly acrylic paints dry. 

    Fortunately, as we've discussed earlier, you can alter the drying time for some specialized acrylic paints. Make sure to extend the time to as long as you require by adding the retarding medium to the paint. 

    Increasing the drying time will let you work on the finer details in your painting for longer. You’ll also be able to blend various colors on the palette or canvas while the colors are still wet. 

    4. The Finishing Touch

    Some artists might want to varnish their painting once it has dried completely. Note that varnishing will seal an artwork and make sure that the colors retain their sheen. 

    Acrylic varnishes are the fastest drying variety and are made using polymer resins dissolved in an emulsion. Some solvent-based varnishes are also available, though they dry relatively slower. 

    Irrespective of the chosen varnish, you should ensure the painting is dust-free and clean before varnishing it. And once it’s completely dry, you will be able to wipe it down using a damp cloth before you begin the varnishing. On a side note, there are specialized brushes that you can use to carry out the varnishing and make sure you layer the varnish uniformly. 

    A semi-dry varnish can feel tacky, so propping up the artwork against the wall and facing it inwards will ensure small particles and dust don’t get stuck onto the surface. 

    What Is Acrylic Paint For Frequently Asked Questions

    What Is Acrylic Paint For Frequently Asked Questions ?

    Can you use acrylic paint on surfaces other than canvas?

    Yes, acrylic paints are suitable for painting on other surfaces, including cardboard, paper, glass, metal, wood, leather, and fabric. You’ll just need to clean the surface and remove oil, wax, and dust from wherever possible. 

    Since acrylic paints dry quickly, are they only fit for painting wet on dry?

    No, rather, you can use acrylic paints for impasto paintings which are actually thin paint layers that add texture. You should work fast, though, since the paint will dry quickly. Alternatively, the drying period can be slowed down, or open acrylics can be used. 

    What is the average shelf life of acrylic paints?

    Unused water-based and latex paints can last up to 10 years, while oil-based and alkyd paints have a longer shelf life of up to 15 years. Note here that since unopened paints haven’t been exposed to the surroundings, they will have semi-solids and liquids in the same ratio, though these components might separate over time. 

    What Is Acrylic Paint For

    What Is Acrylic Paint For Final Thoughts

    That was all about the different applications of acrylic paints and other essentials of using them the right way for your paintings. 

    Hopefully, you enjoyed this colorful journey just as we enjoyed researching all about this interesting variety of paint. Our guide will help you apply the different types and grades of acrylic paints to bring the desired effects to your artwork. So, go ahead and create your dream painting today! 

    But before we sign off, we’d like to remind you about an important requirement for working with any type of paint. Working knowledge of color theory, as well as the result of mixing different colors, is essential if you wish to apply a variety of acrylic colors to your paintings. So, make it a point to spend some time on this. 

    We’ll wrap things up for now. See you soon with another intriguing guide on painting. Take care! 

    The foundation supports an entire house, and it is essential that you use only the best concrete crack filler if you notice any cracks in it. 

    Cracks in foundation may appear for a number of reasons, and they will make your building look shabby. And, unless you treat the foundation problem on time, you might see bulging walls and in the worst-case scenario, the building might lose its structural integrity. 

    So, we suggest that you keep a regular check on the foundation wall and take note of any cracks, and use only the best crack filler to fix the issue. This will block any crawl space from water and won’t allow the concrete to contract or expand. 

    However, that’s not it! There are a range of other things that you can do to fix cracks in a foundation wall and we will tell you all about them. 

    So, let’s take a look! 

    Things To Do To Fix Crack In Foundation Wall

    Builder or homeowner repairing a wall. Things To Do To Fix Crack In Foundation Wall.

    1. Inspecting Your Foundation Cracks

    Can old concrete be resurfaced? We get this question a lot and before we give an answer, we will take you through the reasons behind it.  

    There are plenty of reasons behind a cracked foundation wall. And, to fix it, you need to find out why it is appearing in the first place.

    When there are instances of too much water, it starts to infiltrate the foundation walls. This phenomenon makes the concrete walls contract and expand when there’s a change in temperature. Alternatively, you might be in a situation where you find that the soil beside the foundation has settled. Together, factors like these weaken the concrete, leading to crack formation. 

    And, once the cracks start appearing, there is no stopping. Over time they continue to grow, and if you leave them for too long, they might become a severe problem. The reason behind a foundation crack can be easily identified if you take a close look at it. If you see horizontal cracks, they are most likely caused by settling soil. 

    Also, you might be in a situation where you find too much moisture around the foundation. This leads to water infiltrating the concrete, seeping through it to the other side of the basement floors. And, in the worst-case scenario, the water may start to create pressure on the foundation walls, resulting in vertical foundation cracks. 

    But, rest assured, cracks caused by these factors are mostly hairline cracks and won’t cause problems if treated on time. 

    2. Preparations For Repair

    Before you learn how to repair foundation cracks, it is crucial to get yourself acquainted with how to prepare for the process. 

    Get your hands on a flathead screwdriver or a stiff wire brush to clear off any loose material and broken bits of concrete around the crack. In order to ensure that the adhesive works properly, use a chisel and hammer to broaden the crack and cut under the cracked edges. This will provide more area for the patch to stick when the adhesive is applied. 

    Once you are done with these steps, get a garden hose and clean the crack with water. 

    3. Fixing Hairline Cracks

    Unlike fixing structural cracks, hairline ones are pretty easy to mend. If you notice one, go to the local supermarket and get your hands on some patching compound and vinyl concrete. To ensure that the bond between the patching material and the old surface is top-notch, you can consider applying concrete bonding adhesive. 

    After that, you can use an old paintbrush and apply the liquid to the cracks and around the edges. Next, you can use a putty knife and apply the patching compound in layers. And, while you are at it, do not forget to push the first layer into the cracks. For a long-lasting hold, we recommend that you allow drying time between applying each layer. 

    If you are not looking to follow such a lengthy process, you can consider going for a quick fix. You can make a cement mixture for fixing foundation cracks. In case you notice that the crack you are trying to fix is wide, consider adding some sand to the cement mixture. For that, you will need to mix one part of cement with three parts of sand and add enough water to make a thick paste. 

    In another container, mix cement and water to make a runny cement paint that you will have to use like a primer. Once the primer has dried off, you will have to apply the mixture properly into the cracked foundation. For this, it is best to use a putty knife. Next, you will require a flat-headed tool to flatten the mixture. 

    Ensure that you leave the patch undisturbed for an hour before blending it correctly with the surrounding area with the help of a float. However, if you are on the lookout for quicker fixes, consider using an epoxy seal instead. 

    4. Repairing Larger Cracks

    Not all cracks are of the hairline width, and some may even be wider. And, to fix a crack like that, you will need to be equipped with caulking materials like silicone, polyurethane, or latex concrete caulk. It is best to use a caulking gun to fill the cracks with it. 

    This method is very effective as it fills up the entire crack and does not allow the concrete to expand or contract due to changes in weather. After you are done applying, let it rest for a while and dry up. If you notice that the caulk has contracted and has not filled up the entire crack, you will need to reapply. 

    A structural engineer would attest to the fact that this method is extremely suitable for treating both horizontal and vertical cracks. 

    That said, while inspecting a crack, you might notice that it is wider than ½ inch. In such cases, you will need to use foam backer rods in addition to the concrete caulk. A foaming rod will act as a great support to the patch and will prevent it from sinking into the crack with time. 

    However, keep in mind that it should be placed ¼ inches below the surface. To fix the rod in place, you will have to use a putty knife to insert it into the crack. After you are sure that the foam rods are placed correctly, you can fill up the crack with caulk or apply a vinyl patching. 

    How To Fix Crack In Foundation Wall Frequently Asked Questions ?

    How to use hydraulic cement to fix foundation cracks?

    Using hydraulic cement is a great way to fix shrinkage cracks and stair step cracks. To use this repair method, you will first need to get your hands on a packet of hydraulic cement. Begin by mixing the cement with water in a container to make a gooey paste. 

    Once you are done preparing the mix, proceed to dampen the cracks using a spray bottle. After that, swiftly insert the mixture into the cracks using a putty knife. Now that the major work is completed, you will have to let the layer dry before applying a pure layer of cement over the crack. 

    If you use hydraulic cement to fix the crack, the structural integrity of the foundation wall will stay intact. 

    Is sealing foundation walls necessary?

    Filling the cracks with cement mixture and using patches won’t be enough unless you apply a proper sealant. For this, you can use a waterproof masonry sealer which will last for a long time. 

    A sealant is very crucial to prevent water from infiltrating the concrete and putting additional pressure on it. To apply the sealant easily, you can use a paintbrush and apply the coating directly over the dried patch. Once the first coat has dried, you can use a larger brush or consider using a masonry roller to apply another layer. 

    A lot of times, people wonder why cement cracks even after applying fillers. And, in most cases, this happens when they do not apply the sealant correctly or when the sealant is too runny. 

    Experts suggest that applying sealant on the entire surface is a pretty good idea as well. 

    wall cracks selective focus,cement fissure. How To Fix Crack In Foundation Wall Final Words.

    How To Fix Crack In Foundation Wall Final Words

    It is important to keep in mind that to prevent structural damage, you should try to prevent water infiltration to the best of your capabilities. To avoid foundation problems, also keep a regular check on the downspouts and gutters to see if they are functioning optimally. 

    Be it a horizontal crack or a vertical one, you must attend to it as soon as you can to prevent it from becoming a major problem. Small cracks may seem harmless in the beginning, but when left unattended, they soon expand in size. 

    We hope that the suggestions we have talked about in this guide come to help if your foundation walls develop cracks. And, if you liked reading this guide, do not forget to keep a watch on this space for more such reads. 

    Fixing cracks in foundation wall is not an easy job; likewise, figuring new clay sculpting ideas is not easy as well. Checkout our next article on finding clay sculpting ideas to enhance your DIY knowledge pool.

    Until next time, take care!

    When recreating landscapes on a canvas, painting grass lawns or meadows the right way can make all the difference. 

    But this is an area where amateur artists often struggle, as they can’t always recreate the different intricacies of a clump of grass accurately, even if they use the best professional  watercolor paints. Plus, there are several other important considerations, such as the shades to use, the variations to create based on the type of landscape, what to paint in watercolor landscapes, compostion, etc. 

    If you aren’t fully aware of such details, the quality of the painting might fall short of your expectations. That’s why we thought of compiling this guide on how to paint grass with watercolors to know about painting grass with watercolors, this will work with watercolor paints In tubes sets as well as watercolor pans. 

    Let’s start painting! 

    How To Paint Grass With Watercolors

    How To Paint Grass With Watercolors

    Characteristics To Consider While Painting Grass

    To draw or paint anything, it’s essential to observe it and identify some features that will guide your art. Here are the features of grass that you’ll need to take into account: 

    1. Lines

    While painting grass, the first thing to consider is the type of lines you’ll have to draw. Make sure to draw lines that are thicker at the lower portion and narrower towards the top. 

    2. Direction Of The Strokes

    All grass doesn’t grow in the same direction; some might be shorter, damaged, or bent. 

    3. Color

    You should try to add subtle color variations through different brush strokes instead of using just one shade of green, a mistake that beginners tend to make. 

    The Color Scheme

    Though grass can be other colors, like yellow or red, artists paint them green for the majority of their creations. 

    But they often combine several other colors with green so that the painted grass resembles real grass as closely as possible. The most widely used color scheme for painting grass of different shades is as follows: 

    • Lighter shade: lemon yellow + permanent light green
    • Darker shade: Prussian Blue + Emerald Green
    • Add a tinge of umber to get a brown shade

    At the start, make sure you have the light green, dark green, and umber paints ready for use. You will need two round brushes for the job — one of size 8 and the other of size ½. 

    Painting Grass With Watercolors - The Technique

    The wet-on-wet method is the simplest and most widely used option for painting grass and requires pre-wetting the lower portion of the canvas lightly beforehand. It can be useful both for painting simple scenes, such as long grass clumps growing near a lake, or more detailed landscapes, like an expansive meadow surrounding a farmhouse.

    The steps to follow for the purpose are described below: 

    Step 1

    Firstly, dab the light green color along the lower part of the painting to create the base. Then draw dense vertical brushstrokes a little towards the top that resemble the typical shape of grass blades. Keep in mind that you won’t need to go into the details at this stage. 

    Step 2

    Next, dab the dark green shade with the help of the brush point. But you shouldn’t cover up the first paint layer completely — remember when we talked about the importance of adding variations to the color? You’ll need to blend the colors in such a way that slightly darker grass blades are visible among the lighter blades. 

    Step 3

    At this point, you should switch to the smaller brush. Paint thin linear strokes using the lighter green shade initially, then switch to the darker shade later. Also, the lines should tilt in different directions and be of varying lengths. 

    Step 4 

    After you’ve painted the vertical strokes, the grass will seem as though it’s floating. To make it look like it’s growing from the soil, softly dab light and dark green shades towards the bottom. This will help combine the dark and light green colors while the paint is damp. 

    Step 5

    You can follow this by adding grass flowers on the top. It just requires painting dots around the tip of some grass blades. 

    Step 6

    Proceed to paint the soil by dabbing the burnt umber paint softly and blending it at the lower portion. 

    Step 7

    Now, you’ll have to enhance the depth of the grass by combining a little bit of burnt umber with dark green. Paint short vertical lines at the lower portion for this purpose. 

    Some Basic Tips To Follow While Painting Grass

    In place of the above method, you can also apply some fundamental theories and ideas for painting grass in different types of landscapes:

    1. Apply Directional Brushwork

    A simple yet effective method is to use brushwork that matches the movement and form of the grass. In case you want the grass to point upward, use upward brushwork. Likewise, if a strong wind is blowing the grass to your left, work the brush in a similar way. 

    Legendary artists like Vincent Van Gogh used vertical, strong brushwork to draw grass on a calm day, creating a strong stylized effect. 

    Alternatively, you can adopt a subtler approach with such brushwork, keeping the strokes vertical at the low portion of the sketch and flattening them over a distance. Then the painting might offer a better perspective. 

    2. Utilizing Underpainting Or Stained Canvas

    Some artists deliberately begin their paintings by staining the canvas using an earthly, dull tone such as burnt sienna, yellow ochre, or raw umber. Such a strategy provides them with the alternative to leave portions of the stained canvas more exposed in the final painting. It’s especially useful for painting different types of grass since the earth tone of the canvas mimics plants, rocks, dirt, etc. 

    3. Identifying Some Basic Shapes 

    The challenge of painting grass lies in the details it provides to the painting, that is, the different colors, highlights, shadows, lines, etc. You can overcome this difficulty by simplifying the grass down to some abstract and basic shapes. That way, you can recreate the form and structure of the grass in a better way. 

    The best examples of such art pieces are those where the grass is painted using the basic tones of dark and light. Remember that such artwork lacks finer details. 

    4. Applying Broken Color

    The term broken color is given to the method of building up a number of colors in different layers on a canvas, which makes the lower layers exposed. Such a technique generally involves painting the canvas with small color dabs until it’s filled. 

    When it comes to painting grass, this method lets you create the illusion of numbers without having to draw every grass strand separately. The great French artist Claude Monet had mastered this technique and used distinct color strokes that seemed like plants, rocks, grass, etc., in his paintings. 

    On a side note, applying broken color doesn’t mean you have to use several hues every time. You could also use a limited range of hues but create variations through their saturation. Thus, the green color could be made of several tones, such as dark, dull, and light greens. 

    5. Use Points Of Interest

    Another useful strategy is the application of flat color planes and the addition of small points of interest on the top. For example, in the Cremorne Pastoral watercolor painting by Arthur Streeton, the artist has depicted flowers, small plants, rocks, etc., that provide context and direct attention to the painting. Note that this technique can also wonderfully spruce up an otherwise bland area. 

    6. Identifying Important Portions

    While painting grass, you won’t require drawing each grass strand, as identifying and focusing on some important areas can be much more effective. For example, many famous artists have used remarkable details for the foreground in their landscape paintings but have kept it simple when painting the bushes in the background. 

    7. Utilizing The Physical Texture Of The Paint

    Apply the physical texture of the colors to mimic the grass texture you want to paint. You can build up thick and textured paints to create a rough foreground.

    This technique can be especially effective when it’s combined with certain contrasting strategies like:

    • Thick hues for highlights and thinner alternatives for shadows
    • Thick hues in the foreground and thinner paints in the background
    • Thick hues for warmer shades and thin paints for the cooler ones

    While using thicker paint, the small marks formed by the bristles of the brush can depict individual grass strands. But this will be more effective when created with brushes having firm bristles rather than those with weak and thin bristles. 

    Things to Consider While Using Watercolors

    Now that you know about the nitty-gritty of painting grass, we’ll touch upon some basic precautions to take while using watercolors for the purpose:

    • Buy specialized paper watercolor
    • Plan the colors beforehand
    • Keep the pencil sketch light
    • Protect the lightest areas
    • Allow the layers to dry
    • Clean the brush between colors
    • Replace the water regularly 

    Paint Grass With Watercolors Frequently Asked Questions ?

    What other colors can you use to prepare a grass green color? 

    To mix light greens, you can apply light blue hues like Cerulean Blue and a light yellow like Cadmium Yellow. The resultant color can also be made lighter using Titanium White. 

    As for the darker shades, you will need to combine a gray shade, such as Paynes Gray, with the above mixture of yellow and blue. Notably, Paynes Gray is a mixture of black and blue. 

    In case you wish to make it warmer, use equal proportions of Paynes Gray and New Gamboge in the mixture. 

    Does the color of grass vary with the location and the season? 

    Yes, both the texture and color of grass will vary with the location and season. While young shoots are green during early spring, long grass that’s scorched by the sun takes a light brown or ochre shade. So, keep in mind that the grass in a painting depicting a spring scene shall be different from that in a fall landscape. 

    Another point worth noting is that you should use strong colors as accents in the foreground instead of creating flat color blocks; otherwise, the grass might look artificial. 

    Can a fan brush be of any help in painting grasses? 

    Firstly, know that fan brushes have thin bristles spread out by a ferrule. They are particularly useful for blending colors, so you can apply them while painting grasses using the wet-on-wet technique. 

    How To Paint Grass With Watercolors

    Paint Grass With Watercolors Final Words

    We hope you enjoyed this colorful journey through the world of landscape paintings. So, gather the right paints and brushes, and let the magic unfold on your canvas! 

    Before we call it a day, here’s another tip for you: to create a unique texture when drawing grass, add some kosher salt just after you’ve painted it. Keep in mind that you’ll need quite a bit of paint to create the desired effect, as it would then mix with the salt to produce the necessary texture. 

    See you next time! 

    Contemplating whether to buy a dehumidifier for the bedroom

    Chances are that you’ve had to wake up due to sneezing fits in the middle of the night or may have observed mold growth on the bedroom furniture. The excess moisture in the air is the probable culprit and can be detrimental to your sleep cycle and long-term health. 

    Dehumidifiers are specifically designed to remove excess moisture in the air, so they’re an apt choice for homes with humidity issues. 

    But can these air conditioning devices improve the ambiance of a bedroom in such homes? You'll need to look at several vital aspects to get a clear answer to this question. 

    So, we’d recommend reading through this guide before making the purchase. 

    Benefits Of a Dehumidifier In Bedroom

    Benefits Of a Dehumidifier In Bedroom

    Your bedroom might already have an air conditioner that's keeping the air cool and 'comfortable.' So, it’s completely natural for you to wonder - why should I have a dehumidifier in my bedroom?

    Here’s why we’ll tell you to go ahead and install one: 

    1. Reduces Mildew And Mold Growth

    Excess moisture content in the air might cause extensive growth of mildew and mold, no matter whether your region experiences heavy rainfall or is relatively dry. While mildew growth occurs on top of a surface, mold might penetrate beneath the surfaces of any household item. 

    Some common spots where you may observe such fungal growth include wood, ceiling tiles, windows, carpet, upholstery, paper, or even drywall and wallpapers. So, if you don’t provide adequate protection to bedroom furniture, carpets, and walls, they might degrade and lose their appeal over time. 

    Know that fungal growth also poses the risk of health issues such as wheezing, irritation, congestion, and more. Moreover, it becomes more difficult to tackle with the passage of time, so you should prevent such growth by keeping a check on the moisture content of the air. That’s why using a dehumidifier can improve the air quality of your indoor space. 

    In comparison, an AC may not always be able to prevent mold growth as it doesn't come with strong dehumidifying properties. 

    2. Alleviates Symptoms Of Allergy

    The spring season often triggers allergies from pollen, dust mites, pet dander, and mold. As such, you might experience allergy symptoms, including dryness, runny nose, watery eyes, itchiness in the nose, throat, or eyes, and congestion. 

    Making the indoor air less humid can help prevent or reduce traces of allergy-causing particles. Ultimately, the air will be healthier, and you’re unlikely to sneeze and sniffle from allergies, which will help provide a sound sleep. 

    3. Reduces Pest Issues

    You shouldn't ignore pests infesting the bedroom- they're bound to cause health issues if not tackled on time. As per Pest Control Services Inc, a humid environment is one of the most likely causes of pest infestation. 

    That’s because termites and pests extract the water to survive — even water in very small amounts can help them survive for longer periods. Plus, remember that many pests can enter a home by chewing damp wood. 

    Removal of excess moisture from the air using a dehumidifier helps create a balanced environment, making your home healthier in the long term. 

    4. Lowers Energy Costs

    As dehumidifiers make the air less humid, you won’t need to run the air conditioner as frequently as before. The cooling equipment in the AC will also require less energy to maintain the temperature at the desired level in the house. 

    Notably, Energy Star Certified dehumidifiers are a step ahead in this regard, using much less energy while they run and letting you save more during summer. In fact, you can sometimes enjoy a relaxing night’s sleep with just the dehumidifier put on. 

    5. Reduces Dust Mites

    Considering the dust that homeowners need to tackle daily, the dust-reducing action of a dehumidifier is a significant benefit. Dehumidifiers are powerful enough to filter out the dust particles floating in the air. 

    When the air has less moisture, dust mites and bacteria can no longer thrive and spread in your bedroom. This will naturally result in a reduced level of pests such as dust mites, in turn reducing the chances of developing dust allergies. 

    6. Improves Respiratory Problems

    Did you know that too much moisture in the air can make it difficult to breathe? Excess moisture activates the nerves in the lungs to narrow the airways, which can naturally lead to breathing difficulties. Plus, the air becomes stagnant and starts trapping allergens and pollutants like mold, smoke, dust mites, dust, and pollen, which can set off respiratory issues such as asthma. 

    That’s why installing an indoor dehumidifier can enhance the breathing comfort of any space. In fact, dehumidifiers can be of great help to individuals struggling with symptoms of asthma. Healthline recommends maintaining the humidity level indoors between 30 to 50% to control asthma symptoms effectively. 

    7. Prevents Musty Odors

    A foul or musty odor in the bedroom is the last thing you’d want — it will not only disrupt your sleep but may also lead to long-term health issues. This is especially true for regions with damp climates or high moisture content in the air. As a cold surface comes in contact with the humid air, it might cause musty odors and condensation. 

    Dehumidifiers work by extracting the excess water in the air to bring the humidity levels back to normal. Thus, it won’t be long before the foul smell is gone after you’ve installed one in your bedroom. 

    8. Cleanup After Water Leakage Or Flooding

    Leakage or flooding of water is one of the most common issues faced by households. If the bath attached to your bedroom has a leakage, some of the water might make the floors slippery or flood the floors in the worst case.  

    A dehumidifier can come to your help in such situations, reducing the hassles, time, and stress of tackling the mess. This appliance can double up as a vacuum cleaner by drawing in the moisture and extra water to speed up the drying process. 

    Furthermore, it can help you deal with the immediate as well as long-term after-effects of flooding. A dehumidifier prevents mildew or mold growth throughout, which helps retain the durability and appeal of the walls and floors of the bedroom. As such, it’s highly useful for people living in areas with a rainy climate. 

    9. Dries Clothes Faster

    Sounds surprising? Indeed, dehumidifiers speed up the drying process by drawing excess water from the air and your clothes. This makes them a super-convenient option for drying all the laundry quickly. So, you can have your favorite outfit ready just a while after washing it. 

    Benefits Of A Dehumidifier In Bedroom Frequently Asked Questions ?

    What’s the best spot for a dehumidifier in a bedroom?

    You’ll have to decide where to put the dehumidifier in the bedroom based on the room size. However, the appliance is generally placed in the center and, if possible, close to the plug to enable proper air circulation around the unit. 

    It’s also worth noting that larger bedrooms will benefit more if the dehumidifier is placed close to the source of moisture. 

    What do you need to consider while choosing a dehumidifier?

    The model you choose will depend on the space where you plan to keep it and the humidity levels in your home. A small dehumidifier will naturally be enough for a small room, while you’ll require larger models for spacious areas such as basements or large bedrooms. 

    Also, make sure the model you choose is easy to operate and maintain. Homeowners with more unique and specific needs should consider purchasing a model with specialized features. 

    What are the signs that your bedroom requires a dehumidifier?

    Apart from suffering from allergy symptoms, you might want to consider some other signs of high humidity levels in your bedroom, including: 

    • The room doesn’t have enough ventilation 
    • The ceiling or walls have water stains 
    • The room smells of mildew 
    • Frequent condensation on the windows 
    • Black spots on the walls or areas having high humidity 

    Are dehumidifiers very loud?

    It’s no secret that appliances that use fans will produce some amount of noise — the higher the fan setting, the more noise you should expect. Dehumidifiers also work with a compressor, making them slightly noisier than ceiling fans. 

    Note that if you put the appliance in a lower setting, the noise will be insignificant. Anyhow, good-quality models won’t be so loud as to disrupt your sleep. 

    White air purifier in an apartment. Close-up, selective focus. Benefits Of A Dehumidifier In Bedroom Final Words.

    Benefits Of A Dehumidifier In Bedroom Final Words

    So, how about getting a dehumidifier for your bedroom now? 

    It will help you steer clear of the unhealthy air affecting your sleep quality and long-term health. Ultimately, you’ll feel healthy and rejuvenated from within. 

    Finding a budget-friendly model isn’t a problem either, provided you’ve figured out your needs. Make sure you read through some reliable guides to find the right choice. Also, scan some customer reviews of the model you’re considering to have a clear idea about its performance. 

    On our trips to art museums, most of us would have had the desire to paint like the Renaissance masters. 

    Most of them used best quality oil paints, a medium that doesn't appear to be that approachable compared to something like acrylics. But there's no need to worry, as the easy availability of oil paints and other art supplies today has made starting with oil painting rather simple. 

    In fact, oil mediums are making a comeback as many contemporary artists opt for their rich and versatile qualities. That's why we thought of creating this guide to familiarize you with painting using oil paints, especially if you're a beginner. We hope our step-by-step approach will help you create an art piece in a few sessions. 

    FUN FACT | Do you know that acrylic paints dry way faster than oil paints? 

    Thus, choosing oil over acrylic paints is a wise decision in this aspect. Check out our exclusive article how long acrylic paints take to dry to find out more on this topic.

    So, without further ado, let's get started with oil paints how to guide! 

    Step By Step Process Of How To Oil Paint

    Oil Paints How To

    The general conception is that it takes a lot of courage to start oil painting and pick up the numerous techniques to blend oil paints required to make the piece look good. 

    However, most artists state that oil painting is not that hard with a bit of practice. It does require a lot of patience as the composition of oils and pigments gives the paints a slow drying time. So, a painter needs to apply the paint in layers, often leaving gaps of a few days to avoid messing things up. 

    With time you'll surely begin to get habituated to the distinctive nature of oil paints. Nevertheless, we wanted to highlight some initial steps that can make the process of oil painting a tad simpler for you. So, let's begin! 

    A. Preliminary Steps

    1. Choosing Your Paints

    One of the first things you need to take care of is acquiring suitable quality paints. Like most other art supplies, oil paints are available in different grades. We suggest you steer clear of student-grade colors as they are of inferior quality, which can make your painting experience quite frustrating. 

    Instead, try purchasing mid-budget paints from brands like Winsor & Newton and Gamblin with good reviews. High-quality paint also ensures that you will get the expected vibrancy and blend-ability in a single coat. 

    Coming to the colors, you don't need a whole lot of them. A set with primary colors, along with black, brown, and white, would work just fine. The most common colors recommended by artists are cadmium yellow, yellow ochre, alizarin crimson, burnt sienna, cadmium red, ultramarine blue, titanium white, and mars black. 

    You can mix these paints in different combinations to create any shade for painting. Do stock up on white as it usually gets used up the quickest. 

    Before you jump to the step of creating a whole art piece, it can be useful to spend some time getting familiar with the paint. Playing with the colors will help you get a better idea of their vibrancy, thickness, texture, pliability, and drying time. 

    2. Gather Other Supplies

    Here's a comprehensive list of supplies that you'll require to create oil paintings: 

    • High-quality hog hair and synthetic paint brushes
    • Dropcloth
    • Primed stretched canvas
    • Solvent and linseed oil
    • Mixing palette
    • Palette knife
    • Paper towels
    • Easel
    • Apron

    These are the basic things you will need to have when planning to create an oil painting. One of the common mistakes made by people is to use the wrong brush with a specific painting medium. That's why we suggest you get brushes designated to be used with oil paints. 

    Most artists use hog hair and synthetic brushes while painting with oil colors. While hog hair helps add texture to the artwork, synthetic brushes let you create smooth layers of paint. You'll most likely require both variants to create a full-blown art piece. 

    However, there's no need to go out and purchase a big set of paintbrushes. Rather spend on some high-quality brushes with round, square, and fan-shaped bristles in a couple of sizes to experiment with oil colors. 

    Originally, artists had to stretch and prime their own canvases. But, these days, you can easily find pre-stretched and pre-primed canvases on the market. Even though it isn't necessary, we suggest getting an easel as it lets you set the canvas at a proper angle for painting with comfort. 

    Another essential thing to get is a solvent like white spirits or turpentine, which will help to thin out the thick paint. Always remember to wear latex gloves or nitrile gloves and a mask while using a solvent as it can be toxic for your body. 

    3. Set Up The Work Area

    Here are some of the things to keep in mind while setting up an area for oil painting: 

    • Choose a well-ventilated space in your home or work outdoors.
    • Be careful about opening a tube of oil paint as it may have fumes, and wear protective gloves made of latex or nitrile.
    • If possible, use non-toxic and water-mixable paints made without harmful chemicals.
    • Handle solvents with extra care and avoid getting them on your skin.
    • Set up your easel and canvas away from direct sunlight.
    • Select a proper position for your easel that isn't uncomfortable or hurts your back.
    • When painting indoors, you may also want to prep the floor by covering it with old rags or a plastic sheet to prevent oil paint stains.
    • Keep the drop cloth with you to clean spills or lift abrupt layers of paint.
    • Wear old clothes that cover your skin to prevent contact with oil colors.
    • If your skin gets in contact with oil paint, immediately wash it off using vegetable oil and dish soap.
    • Put long hair in a ponytail or bun to avoid it from getting in touch with the colors.

    4. Preparing The Canvas

    As you may know, most artists prefer to prime their canvas with a layer of gesso before starting to apply oil paints. That's because if you apply colors directly to the canvas, the porous material can soak up the oil, ruining the paint. 

    However, if you apply a thin layer of gesso before starting to paint, the colors will stay on the surface and last longer. The gesso also helps to make the application of the paints much smoother than painting directly on a bare canvas. 

    Gesso is nothing but a mixture of chalk, gypsum, and pigment that painters use to prime the boards before applying acrylic or oil paints. Usually white, gesso is also available in various colors, including black. 

    All you need to do is take a flat brush and apply a layer of gesso on the bare canvas. Wait an hour for it to dry, and top it off with a second layer if required. 

    B. Evaluating Your Painting

    As a beginner, you'll want to start with the basics of oil painting. We recommend choosing a relatively small object like a fruit or a vase as your first subject. Now, take an appropriately sized canvas and think about how to fit the object in the available drawing area. Let's check out some steps that can help you make the preliminary decisions for the painting. 

    1. Create A Rough Sketch

    One of the extremely helpful painting tips provided by professional artists is to always start with a rough sketch. If you don't feel comfortable beginning on the canvas, try drawing on a sheet of paper. 

    Try to compose your subject in a way that looks proportional to the canvas. It's best to start by sketching dominant lines, shapes, and focal points onto the surface with a hard pencil or charcoal. Remember not to apply too much pressure as it may leave an impression, which isn't desirable. 

    While sketching the subject on the canvas, make sure to leave enough negative or empty space for it to stand out. The areas may seem empty at first, but you can use them to add details later. Also, having a few overlapping shapes in an oil painting adds depth and makes it look realistic. 

    2. Figure Out The Light Source

    Those familiar with the oil paintings of renowned artists will know that one of their distinct painting techniques was to play with light and shade. On witnessing the artworks of Johannes Vermeer and Rembrandt, you may almost feel where the light source would have been. 

    As a beginner, finding the angle of light might seem a bit challenging for the first few paintings. But, we suggest you keep on practicing placing the highlights and shadows to get a more realistic outcome. Try using real objects as your initial subjects to grasp how light and shadows are formed and can change based on positioning. 

    Keep in mind that highlights or shadows may not be extremely bright or dark. You'll find a range of values rather than a strong definition in most cases. When you can depict that on a canvas, your oil painting is bound to become more lifelike. 

    3. Choose The Color Palette

    We asked you to purchase a limited number of oil paints because a new painter can quickly become overwhelmed by the task of choosing colors. By using the colors suggested by us, you'll be able to mix and create most shades. However, they may not be quite accurate at first. 

    It's best to observe the actual color of the object and check its nuances, especially under natural light. You may notice that the color needs to be darker if the painting is set in the evening or night compared to a sunny day. 

    4. Note Any Movements

    Does your sketch have any movements like rustling feathers or leaves? If yes, you may need to prepare to add brush strokes to create a sense of motion. We found making proper brush strokes was easier for those who have experience painting with other mediums like acrylic. 

    Oil Paints How To

    C. Beginning To Paint

    1. Mixing Your Paints

    Before you can layer the colors on your prepped canvas, you'll need to mix the shades. Oil paints are often known as a forgiving medium as they take several days before beginning to dry. So, you have a much longer time to work with them than other mediums like acrylic, which dry almost instantly. 

    It can be tough to mix the same shade twice, so we recommend mixing large batches at once and storing them in jars to use between painting sessions. Also, it’s advisable to mix oil paint using a palette knife to get an even shade and also avoid wastage of color. 

    New painters prefer to use color wheels as a reference for mixing their shades as they are quite handy. The wheels will guide you through creating primary, secondary, and tertiary colors by mixing the right paints. You can also refer to the brand website of your paints as it may contain more information on mixing colors. 

    One of the basic things you need to remember is that pure hues are colors that are yet to be mixed with white or black. So, you can add either of them to lighten or darken the hue. 

    To create a tint or a pastel shade, you need to add white to the color. On the other hand, mixing black will create a darker shade. You can then add white to the shade to create a new tone, which are colors primarily used to paint everyday objects. 

    2. Apply The Colors

    Yes, it's finally time to start with your oil painting. As we have told you already, the golden rule of oil painting is to start with thin washes of color and move on to thick layers. That's why you won't be able to finish a painting in a single sitting, as the layers need to dry in between sessions. 

    The average wait time is around three days before you can add a second layer. However, the duration may vary between brands, especially when using heavy body professional paints that may take weeks to dry. 

    Follow the thin-to-thick method and start filling the obvious shapes of your canvas. Use linseed oil or turpentine as thinning mediums, but don't go overboard and add small portions at a time to get the right consistency. 

    3. Try Out Oil Painting Techniques

    This is the best time to get your hands on different oil painting techniques as a beginner. So, let's have a look at some of them. 

    I. Scumbling

    In this technique, you take a small yet thick portion of color and apply it to the canvas with short strokes to add texture. For scumbling or dry brushing, you can take the color straight from the tube and apply it to the canvas without adding a thinning agent or medium. Many artists use this to soften the edges of their oil paintings as well as to add specific details. 

    II. Alla Prima

    Don't be fooled by its name, as this is nothing but the well-known wet-on-wet technique cherished by artists like Rembrandt. In this technique, the subsequent layers of an oil painting aren't allowed to dry, letting you get done with the piece sooner. Painters using this technique are commonly known for finishing a project within a single session. 

    III. Impasto

    This is primarily a technique used by painters to add textures as it requires you to apply the paint with broad and quick brush strokes. It's commonly used to create shadows, as well as add highlights and depth. Rather than using oil paint brushes, palette knives are often used for the impasto technique for a more defined outcome. 

    IV. Sfumato

    Hailing from the Renaissance era, sfumato is the direct opposite of impasto, as the technique adopts a much softer approach. The transition between colors is well-blended and often lacks distinct lines or borders. 

    A soft and clean brush is commonly used to apply new colors for optimal blending. Leonardo da Vinci frequently used this method, the most obvious example being the use of sfumato to paint the eyes of the Mona Lisa. 

    D. Finishing Your Painting

    1. Correct Mistakes

    A great thing about using oil paints is that you get around three to four days to fix any mistakes and wipe excess paint before the colors have dried. Use this time efficiently and make changes only after observing the painting for a considerable time. 

    2. Don’t Forget To Save The Paints

    Do you still have some colors left after your painting is over? Rather than throwing them away, scoop up the excess color into small jars to use for another painting. You can also use saran wrap to cover your palette and keep the paints fresh. 

    3. Clean Your Paint Brushes

    One of the common mistakes of new painters is to forget about cleaning their oil paint brushes. Letting the oil paint dry on them can be detrimental, especially if they are natural hair brushes. 

    Hence, make sure to clean the brushes with turpentine or paint thinners and a paper towel after you have finished painting. Follow it by rinsing your brushes with warm water and mild soap, then air-drying to retain their health. 

    4. Be Patient And Apply Varnish

    As we have said already, you need to learn how to be patient when beginning oil painting. Depending on the size of an art piece, you may need to wait for weeks or months for it to dry. A much longer drying time is needed for paintings with several layers of thick paint. 

    Remember to put your painting in a clean, dry place free from any disturbing elements to avoid damage. Once the painting is completely dry, add a coat of high-quality varnish to preserve the brilliance of your painting. 

    Oil Paints How To Frequently Asked Questions

    Oil Paints How To Frequently Asked Questions ?

    Do you need water while using oil paints?

    In the case of common painting mediums like watercolor, gouache, or acrylic, it's a must to have a pot of water by your side. But, that isn't true for oil painting, as water repels oil. Instead of using water, you'll need to stock up on solvents like turpentine and linseed oil which will help get a thinner paint for layering on the canvas. 

    Why does your oil painting appear dull?

    At times, even after investing in the best quality oil paints, a painting may end up looking dull or lackluster. This is due to a phenomenon called sinking, where the oil of later layers gets absorbed by a previous layer. It can happen for several reasons, including improper priming of canvas, using an excessive amount of solvent, or using too little medium. 

    To avoid dull areas in your area, make sure to prep your canvas well, and allow a layer of paint to dry before adding more layers. You can also try to fix the sunken or dull areas after they have dried by lightly treating them with a painting medium. 

    What is underpainting?

    One of the oil painting basics is knowing how to apply a very thin layer of paint on the canvas. This single shade acts as a background on which you can build up the other colors and thicker layers. The underpainting technique can also help an artist portray layers added to create depth and shadows. 

    Oil Paints How To

    Oil Paints How To Final Words

    That's everything we had to tell you about, starting with oil painting. We hope the guide will help you find your footing in the medium and clear any remaining doubts on oil painting basics. 

    As we have said already, remember to use the "thin to thick" or "fat over lean" method to ensure that your painting comes out good and doesn't develop cracks. Also, wait for enough time to let the painting dry before applying the varnish to prevent smudging of colors. 

    If you're still a bit confused about where to start painting, we recommend purchasing canvas boards and begin practicing the oil paint techniques. This will help you get better acquainted with oil paint qualities and paint texture. 

    Until next time, take care and have fun painting! 

    Do you want to transform your home and furniture without spending too much? Then it’s high time you consider the best paint for furniture

    Yes, you can now glaze your existing furniture to transform them all together and create a new ambiance in the house. Also, you can paint the furniture in a different color and then use glaze to match all the pieces of furniture. 

    However, you might be confused about the process and wondering whether to hire a professional for the job. Let us tell you that this can be taken up as a DIY project and can be done by one or two people together. No professional is needed if you are up and ready for the job with the right supplies. 

    You can save a lot of money this way, and you can easily purchase paint and glaze of different shades from local stores for the job. We will tell you about the entire process and share information about the materials as well in this guide. 

    So, read on to know more. 

    What Are The Best Types Of Glaze Applicators?

    What Are The Best Types Of Glaze Applicators

    Glaze can be applied with several applicators, and the choice will depend upon the type of surface you are working with, along with the desired texture. 

    1. Sea Sponges

    You can use sea sponges to dab paint over furniture like, for example, a dining room table. It will lead to a mottled effect overall, making it look aesthetically pleasing. 

    2. Paint Brush

    If you are looking for a striated finish, then dry paint applicators are the best. These paint brushes can be rolled or dragged on the furniture to get the required effect. 

    3. Plastic Sheets 

    Plastic sheets can be used to cover wet-colored surfaces, and you will be able to get a smushed finish. It is best to lay these sheets immediately after glazing so that you can get a mushy effect before the glaze dries up.  

    4. Rags 

    Rags can help you recreate a leathery finish. You will have to bunch them up to create the crinkly effect that you would generally notice in leather. 

    5. Wood Grainer

    Faux finishing combs and wood grainers can be used to create a stained wood grain effect. You will easily find them in any local paint supplies store. 

    Kinds Of Paint Glaze 

    Before we tell you how to paint wooden furniture, let us take you through the different kinds of glaze. 

    1. Antiquing Glaze 

    Buying authentically antique furniture may not be within your budget, and that is where the antiquing glaze comes in. 

    So, have you previously used colored wax on the top of furniture with chalk paint? An antiquing glaze is a ready-to-use option that will offer the same effect as colored wax. However, keep in mind that you are not supposed to mix this with paint like you would with clear glaze. 

    Instead, you can use a soft cloth to rub the antiquing glaze over the required area. Make sure the antiquing glaze gets into the details and crevices in the wood. After it has dried completely, use water-based polyurethane or wax to seal it well.

    2. Clear Glaze 

    That is the most common glazing mix that you can use with water-based paint. The white liquid medium can be mixed with paint to make it transparent when dry. Using this, you can also create depth, as the undercoat can be seen through the clear coat. 

    Moreover, you should know that adding a clear glaze to paint will take more time for the paint to dry completely. This is used for creating raised details and faux finishes for furniture. Just remember to seal the furniture with water-based polyurethane or wax after it has dried. 

    You can also use the paint and glaze mix to accentuate crannies and crevices on different surfaces. That is the reason why many carpenters use this paint and glaze to give old furniture pieces a complete transformation. Some users even use it for garage or front doors to make the surface imitate stained wood texture. 

    However, you should know one fact about this white glaze: it does not act as a sealer. While you might think this will give you a shiny finish, it will not. The glaze does not come with protective features, and you will need to use a sealer on top of it. Also, this glaze will have a satin or matte finish, and the type will depend on the brand you purchase. 

    3. Glaze Finish

    Glaze finish usually refers to the topcoat of polyurethane. A lot of brands use the term “glaze,” and you should not confuse it with a paint mixing medium. This will not create faux layers on top of the paint. 

    4. Gel Medium 

    Fine artists use gel medium or glaze to make their paint colors transparent. It is usually very thick in nature, and you should know that the thickness can vary with the brand. 

    5. Triple Thick Glaze 

    Finally, we have an option that will work as a shiny sealer for you. It cannot be mixed with paint but can be applied on top of it to get a shiny transparent effect. 

    How To Mix Glaze And Paint For Glazing Furniture? 

    You can mix paint and glaze to give your furniture a makeover. To do this, take one part paint and three parts glazing medium. The paint can be water-based, acrylic, or latex as needed for the project. And the glazing process needs a clear transparent glaze to ensure that paint colors are not disrupted by any other shade. You can mix them thoroughly before application. 

    How To Apply Glaze To Painted Furniture? 

    How To Apply Glaze To Painted Furniture

    This glazing technique can provide an antiquing effect on your furniture. Now before we take you through the process, let us tell you about the materials needed for the job. 

    What Are The Paint Supplies Needed For The Job? 

    You will first need to purchase water-based paint or acrylic paint for this. If you want a unique effect, mix some shades to create a color of your own. Other than paint, you will need, 

    • Sea sponge
    • Paintbrush
    • Valspar antiquing glaze mix 
    • Paper towel or rag pieces 
    • Stick for stirring
    • Plastic bowl with an airtight lid
    • Measuring cup

    You can get a paint roller to paint the base coat. 

    The Main Process For Antiquing 

    Step 1: Sand The Furniture Surface

    If boxes are kept on the furniture, remove them before sanding the surface. Also, keep all hardware away, and then you can sand the furniture pieces with 100 grit sandpaper. There is no need to sand it down to bare wood. All you have to do is make the surface rough. Then you can clean the furniture surface with a damp cloth or a damp rag and let it dry. 

    Step 2: Prime The Entire Surface

    You will need to cover the furniture surface with a good primer. If the old surface is covered in white paint and you want to paint it a darker shade, then use a black primer for the job. When you add the paint over it, you can get a better depth. 

    Step 3: Using Paint Or Glaze 

    You will now need the sea sponge to apply the paint in a thin layer. First, make the sponge wet and then wring out any excess water. You can take a tin and pour the furniture glaze or paint in it. 

    Then you can dip the sponge in the mix and rub it on the furniture. Keep turning it with your hand as you dab on the furniture surface so as to create a unique pattern. 

    Once you have painted a thin layer on the entire surface, let it dry completely before moving on. After the glaze dries, you can repeat the process and apply a second layer of paint or glaze. If you like the existing finish, then there is no need for an additional layer. 

    Also, if you add more layers to glaze furniture, the intensity of the color will increase, and it will look brighter. And if there you have used too much paint or glaze for the project, then wipe off excess glaze with a damp napkin. Remember that the extra glaze must be removed immediately before it dries.

    Step 4: Adding Sealer And Antiquing 

    After glazing furniture, you can use an antiquing glaze to accentuate and highlight the recessed panels. However, if you do not have a Valspar antiquing glaze or something similar, then use dark wax or soft wax for the job. 

    Step 5: Using Dark Wax 

    Initially, you should apply a layer of clear wax to the painted furniture. Then take a rag and use it to apply the dark wax in all the areas needed. If you have applied it to an area by mistake, you can always use clear wax to rub over it and remove it. It will act like an eraser and will be much easier to use. 

    Once you are happy with the finish, you can use a lint-free cloth to buff the surface and obtain a sheen finish. Also, the surface gets sealed because of the wax, and you do not have to use any other sealant. 

    Let it dry overnight, and make sure all the nooks are well-covered. If there are any smudge marks, use a cloth to buff them. 

    Can Glaze Be Applied On Chalk Paint? 

    Chances are you may not be able to see the detailing on a piece of furniture if you have painted it with chalk paint. The carving details may not be visible, and you may want them to stand out. That is exactly where glaze comes in, and it will offer a semi-transparent layer, which will highlight the crevices and details. 

    However, remember to apply the chalk paint and let it dry completely for 24 hours or more as needed. Also, read the instructions mentioned on the pack and follow them diligently. Once the paint has dried well and has been left for three to five days, you can apply the glaze. 

    Now, if you want an antiqued finish and shabby but chic-looking kitchen cabinets, then a single coat of chalk paint should be enough. But, if you are looking at a deeper and richer color, then at least two coats of paint are required. 

    Also, chalk paint often absorbs glaze, and you might find it challenging to wipe away excess glaze. You can get more control over such a situation by using a polyacrylic top material that will act as a sealant for chalk paint. Use a synthetic paintbrush to apply this protective layer and to make a huge difference. Let this layer dry well before you can use glaze over it.

    Usually, adding a polyacrylic layer should not take more than an hour or two, and you can continue with your project after that. 

    Dark Glaze V/s Light Colored Glaze

    A light-colored glaze will work well if you are looking for a rustic look with a faded appearance. It can provide a slightly worn-out antique look that will surely add to the aesthetics of the house. 

    For this job, you can opt for pearl or white glaze. The glaze, when applied on top of dark-colored paint, lightens the color tone. And if you apply it on light-colored chalk paint, then you will get an effortless and distressed look. But there is a catch here- light-colored glaze will not bring out the detailing on the original wood. 

    On the other hand, if you use a dark brown, antique, or black-colored glaze, you can create better shadows and highlight the details. So, if you are looking for that antique look, then opt for a dark glaze that can make the furniture look aged. 

    Dark glaze can be used on top of dark paint as well to provide a rustic look with all the carved details standing out. 

    Tips To Remember 

    While you might know how to apply glaze to painted furniture, there are certain factors to be careful about, and we will be listing them here. 

    1. Proper Ventilation

    The area has to be adequately ventilated while working with paint and glazing furniture. Otherwise, the smell of chemicals can give you bad headaches, and it is not good for your health. So, keep your windows open for 24 hours, at least even after the work is completed. 

    Because of the same reason, you should not sleep in the same room as the painted furniture.

    2. Clean Dirty Furniture 

    If the furniture you are going to work with has been lying in the dust for a while, then it will need a thorough cleaning before using paint for antique furniture. For this, a sponge or a damp cloth can be used. 

    However, if the furniture is very dirty, then it is best to use some dishwashing liquid for the job. Add some drops of it on a sponge and then wring it out well. Use it to scrub the furniture until it looks clean. 

    How To Apply Glaze To Painted Furniture Frequently Asked Questions

    How To Apply Glaze To Painted Furniture Frequently Asked Questions ?

    Can wax be used over paint glaze? 

    Dark, colored, or clear wax can always be used as a sealer over painted furniture or paint glaze. This will seal the surface and make sure your furniture makeovers are complete. Just remember that when you are using a wax sealer, always apply a thin coat and follow it up by buffing it properly with a soft rag. This will provide a sheen finish that will protect the furniture surface over the years. 

    What are the paint types that can be mixed with glaze? 

    If you wish to add some color along with transparency, then mixing acrylic paint is a good idea. Glaze dry over a longer period of time, giving you the space to use rags, sponges, and brushes for faux painting as well. 

    How long do you need to wait after painting and before applying glaze? 

    Typically, even if the paint dries quickly, you should wait for a day before painting another coat on top of the base coat. Then leave the furniture for three to five days to cure completely. After the fifth day, you can touch the surface to see if the paint has dried before you apply the glaze. 

    How long does glaze take to dry? 

    Apply the glaze to all the desired areas of the furniture. If you are using pastel or a white-shaded glaze, then the color of the furniture will change. In case it becomes too light, you can use a cloth to wipe the surface. Then let it dry for an hour or two before touching it. We recommend leaving it for a day before you use the furniture. 

    What is the number of glaze coats needed for furniture? 

    It is best to apply three coats of glaze for the desired effect. Now ensure that you provide enough time for every coat to dry well before applying the next coat. Also, every coat will harden the furniture surface slightly as the glaze contains binders. So, you will get a more stable base for the second and the third coat. 

    What is the thickness of glaze that one should try to achieve? 

    You will have to achieve “postcard” thickness to get the right amount of glaze. If it is not very thick, you will need more coats than one. However, some brands sell thick glaze, and one coat should be sufficient in such cases. 

    Can glazing cause splotches? 

    Yes, glazing can go wrong if you are not careful about the thickness of the layers. If you apply a very thick layer of glaze, then it might trickle down the sides of the furniture. That can cause blistering and uneven layers resulting in streaking and splotching. While the glaze can be transparent, it can lead to uneven texture and color. 

    Hence, always ensure you use the right amount and wipe the surface immediately if you think too much glaze is used. It is going to be water-based and should be easy to clean. 

    How to create a tinted glaze for furniture? 

    You may find a number of pre-tinted glazes on the market, but you may not come upon the exact shade that is needed. There is nothing to worry about, as you can create your own glaze. 

    To do so, purchase a tintable glaze from the store, which is absolutely clear. Then pour about half a cup of it into a container. Add five paint drops into the glaze and use a paint stick to mix it well. 

    If you are looking for a light tint, then add only two to three drops, and mix to check the color. Then add more color if necessary and test it on the furniture. Leave it for five minutes and check the shade. If you are not satisfied with it, then wipe away any excess glaze and create a different mix. 

    We recommend letting the glaze dry completely before adding more color to the mix, as the color can darken as it dries further. In case it is too dark, you can always add more clear glaze to lighten the shade whenever needed. 

    Also, adding a few drops of cream or white color paint to the glaze can help you lighten it. Check the finished result in clear daylight to see if the color is perfect. Additionally, make a note of the amount of paint color you are using if you want to create the same colored glaze for other pieces of furniture. 

    How To Apply Glaze To Painted Furniture Final Words 

    How To Apply Glaze To Painted Furniture Final Words 

    While you might want to opt for a polyurethane coating to keep the paint safe, remember never to choose an oil-based option. Although oil-based polyurethane acts as a sealant, it will yellow or darken the color of the existing paint. So, stick to water-based polyurethane, and there will be no change in color. 

    However, know that it is not mandatory to seal furniture before glazing. Sealing will only make the surfaces durable and works better for chairs and table tops which see a lot of traffic. Otherwise, you can skip sealing and finish the job even more quickly. 

    Finally, it is time to wrap up, and we hope you have all the necessary information about applying glaze to painted furniture. So, do not wait any longer and start looking for the right shade of glaze for the job. 

    Have a great experience. 

    Ah, the joys of scribbling away with colored pencils! Nearly all of us can recollect fond memories from our childhood when we used them to create artistic masterpieces. 

    In fact, some of us do it even as adults, either professionally or as a pastime. Besides being a viable source of income, it is a great stress buster. And it allows you to bond with your own children as they set out on their imagination journey. 

    But while doing that, it is crucial to keep the colored pencils in order so that you can find them whenever needed. You can store each set in a separate container and sort them by color so that they are easily accessible. 

    We have expanded on the above point in this detailed yet simple guide. So, if you or your child is having trouble keeping your colored pencils organized, this will help. 

    Let’s go! 

    How To Organize Colored Pencils

    How To Organize Colored Pencils

    As we have stated before, organizing colored pencils requires sorting the colors and storing them in separate containers. Additionally, you may need to consider the place where you keep them, especially if they are used often. 

    Regardless, we have expanded on each of these aspects below so that you can keep your colored pencil collection neatly arranged and easily accessible. 

    Sorting The Pencils

    The first step to organizing the pencils is to sort them out properly - either individually or in a group. Likewise, if you need any help with the sorting process, you can consult downloadable charts and color wheels. Or, simply create your own color swatches. They are great organizing tools for any type of coloring supplies, including colored pencils.

    There are different approaches you can take to accomplish this task, as we have described below.

    1. Sorting By Color

    In this technique, you will need to sort every colored pencil based on its general color family. For instance, you can separate all the red tones, like crimson, maroon, and other similar colors. You can do the same for the blue, green, yellow, or any other tones as well. 

    Make sure that each pile is separate and there is no intermixing, as it can mess up the sorting process. You can even make a separate pile for neutral colors, such as black, white, gray, or brown. To better ascertain the color and make the sorting process convenient, you can prepare individual color swatches for every pencil. 

    2. Sorting By Temperature

    The color temperature is another method of categorizing different color shades. When we say temperature, we usually refer to the two most common categories as depicted on any color wheel or chart - warm and cool colors. Generally, orange, red, and yellow hues are identified as warm colors, while blue, green, and purple hues are considered cool colors. 

    On that note, some of the neutral colors, such as black, brown, white, and gray shades have their separate category. This is because they cannot be considered to be warm or cool. But, you can put them in either of the two groups for convenience. And if you face any difficulty during sorting, you can consult different color charts. 

    3. Sorting By Color Intensity

    You can also sort the different pencils by color intensity. To do this, keep all the brighter colors, such as red, violet, or indigo, in one pile. Subsequently, you can sort the lighter pastel shades, like yellow, cyan, or lime, into their own stack. 

    As for the neutral colors, like black and white, keep them in their separate pile. Once you have sorted them, keep the bundles separated from each other to prevent intermixing. 

    4. Other Sorting Techniques

    Apart from the above techniques, you can sort the colored pencil sets based on their type or brand. This is especially helpful if you possess multiple sets of colored pencils. On the other hand, it may require more time and effort than the previous techniques. 

    Sorting by brands is relatively easy since the brand for each colored pencil is typically engraved on its body. Besides, different brands may use distinct designs and shapes for their pencils, which can also help with the sorting process. 

    There are two broad types of colored pencils - water and wax-based. So, if you want to sort the pencils by their type, you may need to refer to the packaging, as the type is normally mentioned on it. This is where things get a bit complicated since the packaging may get damaged, or you may have disposed of it soon after purchase. 

    In these cases, you might need to do some research online to determine the type. Some brands may mention the type on the pencils themselves, in which case, you can consider yourself lucky, as it will make the sorting process easier. 

    Colored Pencil Storage

    Colored Pencil Storage

    After you have sorted the colored pencils, you should store them in a suitable container. Now, there are different types of storage solutions for colored pencils, so you can choose any one according to your preferences. If you are feeling a bit creative, you can even make some DIY solutions for storing your colored pencils. 

    Anyhow, we have discussed some of the easiest and most convenient options below, so we suggest that you keep reading. 

    1. Cardboard Box

    In case you have lost the original packages of the pencils, then this is the best and simplest alternative. Cardboard boxes come in different shapes and sizes, so you can pick whichever suits your needs the best. 

    If you use small cardboard boxes, you can store each pile of colored pencils separately. But if you have a large box, you can create smaller compartments inside it by using cardboard cutouts, which will make it convenient to store the pencils. 

    2. Plastic Containers

    Using plastic containers to store colored pencils is another simple option that you can go for. Like cardboard boxes, plastic containers are also available in different shapes and sizes. So, you can get a box that best suits your needs. 

    You can store separate piles of colored pencils inside each box. We recommend that you use transparent containers for this purpose, as it makes it easier for you to see the contents inside. As such, you won’t need to fumble around with the boxes while coloring. 

    3. Mason Jars

    The shape and size of mason jars make it convenient to store colored pencils. Like the previous options, you can keep a different pile of sorted pencils in each jar. 

    In this regard, simply store them in these jars, or you may get a little creative. For the latter, you can join multiple mason jars in a staggered fashion with the help of sticking tapes or adhesives. Then lay them on their sides to create an attractive display of jars in your art studio. 

    4. Pencil Stands

    Pencil stands are a very convenient option for a table or desk. These stands often have a minimalistic design and come with prebuilt compartments for storing all of your art supplies. 

    You can also get stylish pencil stands that have distinctive designs for enhancing the appeal of your craft room. Likewise, you can go with different colors to match its décor. For instance, if you work on a wooden table, you can get wooden colored pencil stands to complement it. 

    5. DIY Pencil Caddy

    If you are seeking a bit of originality, make a DIY pencil caddy out of cardboard pieces or used toilet paper rolls. Using adhesives and sticking tapes, you can put cardboard pieces or toilet paper rolls together to create a custom storage solution for your colored pencils. You can even color the caddy for a more personal touch. 

    6. Pencil Carousels

    A pencil carousel can be considered to be an upgraded form of the simple caddy, with larger and more compartments. So, apart from colored pencils, you can easily store other coloring supplies like gel pens, paintbrushes, pastels, normal pencils, and so on. 

    You can get pencil carousels from any online craft store, or simply go the DIY route. To make it more unique, you can make a rotating carousel that will considerably enhance the appeal of your craft room. 

    7. Pencil Wraps

    Another interesting storage solution for your colored pencils is a pencil wrap. These are highly convenient pencil cases that are usually made from fabric or nylon. You can even make your own wrap with some cloth and a sewing machine. 

    On the inner side, there are numerous elastic flaps or pouches in which the pencils can be stored. Once you put all the pencils in it, roll the wrap into a cylindrical shape and carry it with you. The wrap is typically held together with a string or a Velcro strap.

    8. Zipper Bags

    Like pencil wraps, zipper bags are another convenient solution for storing and organizing your colored pencils. The bag’s exterior may be made from fabric or toughened polyester for enhanced durability. There may also be a strap included so that you can easily carry it with you. 

    Inside, there may be one or more compartments for storing your colored pencils, as well as other supplies. In some zipper bags, the compartments may be arranged like the pages of a flipbook, making it even easier to organize your colored pencils. 

    9. Drawers And Cabinets

    If you are looking for an all-in-one solution for storing your colored pencils and other drawing supplies, you should get a drawer or a cabinet. These are generally large wooden boxes having multiple compartments. 

    The compartments may be designed to store the pencils either in a pile or in a single file. Personally, we prefer the latter, since it makes organizing the pencils more convenient. Also, you can keep it separately or attach it to the wall like a display cabinet. 

    Accessibility Of The Colored Pencils

    Once you have sorted and stored the colored pencils, you need to determine where they should be kept. If you use them frequently, then the ideal place to store them is your art station. 

    Even if they are not used frequently, you should keep them in a place where you have easy access and can remember easily. That way, you won’t have to search high and low for your pencils if you feel like doing a bit of drawing and coloring. 

    Usage Of Colored Pencils

    Besides proper storage, you need to use your colored pencils carefully, or else they may get misplaced or lost. To avoid that, we would suggest that you pay some attention to the pencils when using them. 

    See to it that you take out only one or two pencils at a time from the pencil organizer. Likewise, make sure that you place them back into it once you are done with the project. 

    Also, you should only place the pencil back into the storage container to which it belongs and not some other place. You might find this easier to do if your boxes, jars, or bags are properly labeled. 

    How To Organize Colored Pencils Frequently Asked Questions ?

    Can you use colored pencils on canvas?

    Yes, you can use colored pencils on canvas, but not all colored pencils produce viable results when used on canvas. That’s why we’d suggest that you use oil-based pencils with harder cores. 

    Can you purchase individual colors if you misplace or lose a pencil?

    The ability to buy individual colored pencils may vary from brand to brand. That is why it is best to consult the brand’s website to learn more about this aspect. On that note, you might find individual colored pencils, but they might not be from the same brand you require it to be. 

    How To Organize Colored Pencils Final Words

    How To Organize Colored Pencils Final Words

    That is all we have to say about how to organize colored pencils. If you keep your art supplies in order, it will bring you a lot of satisfaction, not to mention the time it will save while working on an art project. 

    The best colored pencil brands like Prismacolor, Faber Castell, or Crayola use decent packaging right out of the box. And it is a good idea to retain the packaging boxes since they can make the organization process more convenient. 

    But it is fine if you want to use your own methods for this purpose, which is where you will find this guide helpful. And if you follow it correctly, you won’t need to worry about losing any of your colored pencils ever again. 

    Now it is time for us to wrap it up over here. Be sure to check out this space for any future updates. 

    Adios! 

    Besides coloring books and art projects, clay for sculpting is a unique way to develop your kids’ creative side. 

    Playing with clay improves hand-eye coordination, teaches play-based learning, and increases self-confidence. Adults can also take time out of their busy schedules to make funky and beautiful sculptures for relaxation. 

    However, selecting the right clay is critical, and the two best options among all clay types are air dry and polymer clay. In this guide, we have looked at the difference between polymer clay and air dry clay in detail so that you have more information while making sculptures. 

    What Is Modeling Clay?

    What Is Modeling Clay

    Modeling clay comprises a group of malleable products that kids, hobbyists, art students, professionals, including animators and potters, use for sculpting. Among various modeling clays, air-dry clay is probably the most popular or preferred option. 

    Thanks to its soft and spongy composition, air-dry clay proves suitable for making sculptures and can be molded into any shape. Hence, it is a popular choice, particularly for children's toys and beginner’s art projects.

    A sculpture or an art piece made using clay that air dries takes around 1-2 days to set, depending on how thick your art piece is. And once thoroughly air-dried, the clay has a porous texture, which makes it more resistant to breaking. 

    Another reason this clay is popular among artists is that it comes in many different colors, and you can even use acrylic paint for decorating it.  

    Pros And Cons Of Air Dry Modeling Clay

    Pros

    A. Easy To Use

    Air-dry clay has a smooth texture and doesn’t need much kneading. You can easily mold, craft, and sculpt funky or unique designs with it on the go. Plus, there’s no need for sculpting tools if you know how to use it. 

    If it starts to dry as you work, spray a little water on it to make it smooth again. But make sure not to overdo it, as you may end up with cracks in the sculpture. 

    B. Non-Toxic

    The most commonly used air-dry clays, including Jovi and Activa, are all-natural, paper-based, and non-toxic. So, using these will not put you at risk of developing rashes or allergies. 

    But the ingredients of an air-dry clay vary for different brands, and some contain gluten (like Crayola) which might cause allergic reactions depending on your medical history. Although air-dry clay is deemed safe for children above three years, keep a watchful eye to ensure they don’t put it in their mouths.

    C. Best For Beginners

    Irrespective of your skill level in sculpting or pottery, you can get started with this clay. Experiment with simple crafts like making air-drying clay earrings, bowls, pinch pots, or trinkets. 

    And if you want to improve your pottery skills - take a specialized course, read a book, or go online where you will find plenty of information related to air-dry clay. 

    Cons

    A. Not Waterproof

    Since air-dry clay is porous, it will eventually absorb water and deteriorate. Plus, sealing the clay won’t help much, as it merely slows down the process, so you can’t use it to make functional mugs, vases, or flower pots.

    B. Flammable 

    When exposed to open fire, air-dry clay does not ignite but rather chars and turns to ash. That’s why making ashtrays with this clay is not a good idea. 

    C. Fragile

    Delicate and small details like the ears and fingers of your dolls, flower petals, or other similar sculptures made with air-dry clay are fragile and break off easily. Even a careless touch of the finger can damage your sculpture. 

    What you can do is use armature, like wire for petals and fingers, or a sealant to make your project more durable and stronger. 

    What Is Polymer Clay?

    Polymer clay is hardened modeling clay, known for its quality, simplicity, and versatility. The clay, made from Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), is simple to use and becomes malleable and soft once you begin sculpting. 

    After you’ve finished making your clay sculpture, you need to cure or bake it. The best part about it is you won’t need a professional kiln fire, as your home oven works just fine. 

    Polymer clay is available in several colors and you can use it to make anything, be it keychains, beads, figurines, jewelry pieces, and other sculptures. 

    Pros And Cons Of Polymer Clay

    Pros

    A. Doesn’t Dry

    A unique blend of synthetic polymers goes into a polymer clay, so it doesn’t dry out, irrespective of how long you keep it outside. This makes it suitable for those who don’t like sculpting at a stretch and want flexibility while working on their project. 

    B. Repels Dust

    You can leave your clay sculptures outside without worrying about them hardening or gathering a layer of dust. Polymer clay is dust-resistant to a degree, and your sculpture remains cleaner and brighter much longer. 

    It is also a big bonus for those who work on complex projects that can’t be protected or covered. 

    C. No Kiln Required 

    As already mentioned, polymer clays don’t need a kiln fire to harden, and a home oven works perfectly fine. Compared to other modeling clays that need to be heated at high temperatures before they are ready, polymer clay only needs temperatures between 265 and 276 degrees Fahrenheit.

    Once polymer clay is fired up in an oven, its hardness is somewhere between air-dry and natural clay. Also, a properly heated polymer clay is slightly flexible even after it has hardened. 

    Cons

    A. Need Sculpting Tools

    Polymer clay is a bit tricky to work with compared to air-dry clay, and you might need specialized tools for sculpting. Although kneading and shaping polymer clay can be done by hand, tools like rubbing plates, press tools, clay cutters, and rollers are essential for detailing.

    B. Not Safe For Children 

    Although it is unlikely to cause allergies in adults, this might not be the case with children. The clay polymers may not suit kids’ highly sensitive skin and could lead to rashes or redness. 

    Not to mention, kids tend to bite anything they find appealing, which you can’t afford with any form of clay, let alone polymer clay. 

    Modeling Clay Vs Polymer Clay Frequently Asked Questions ?

    Can you mix polymer clay and air-dry clay?

    Yes, you can, but it’s difficult for polymer clay to stick to absorbent surfaces like air-dry clay. Sometimes, you can just squeeze polymer clay over the latter. 

    How long does an air-dry clay last?

    If you store air-dry clay properly, it can last a very long time. But for that we recommend wrapping the unused clay in a Ziploc or plastic bag before putting it in an airtight container. 

    Orange piece of polymer clay cutted by blade by woman hands on the white background. Modeling Clay Vs Polymer Clay Final Verdict.

    Modeling Clay Vs Polymer Clay Final Verdict

    When it comes to air drying clay vs polymer clay, which is a better choice for making sculptures? Our decision is in favor of polymer clay because it is more resistant to water, heat, or breaking, while offering greater flexibility when sculpting. 

    But for kids just learning the art of clay sculpting, they should start with air-dry clay. Polymer clay is a bit tricky to work with compared to air-dry clay, so you will need to enroll them in various courses or pottery classes available online.

    The bottom line is to let kids have fun while making unique clay crafts!

    If you are looking for the best clay for sculpting and the steps to making your own jewelry, look no further. 

    Everyone loves wearing stylish pieces of jewelry but making them is a satisfying form of art. Creating a personalized pair can be the next new hobby to tap into, and air-drying clay is the perfect medium to use. 

    Try your hand at making a few adorable, lightweight air dry clay earrings, and you'll find them easier to create than expected. 

    Clay Earring Making Process

    Unrecognized woman creating colorful handmade jewelry at home with clay and using tools. Clay Earring Making Process.

    Right off the bat, it is safe to say that making earrings out of clay is the easiest thing ever. It's beginner-friendly, does not require ovens or baking for long hours, and anyone can use the cutters to make the shapes. Most of the time, you'll have to smooth out and roll the air-dry clay with your hands. 

    Don't worry too much about getting them in the right shape when starting out. You should start with simple shapes such as round, rectangular, or square ones. Before starting, ensure all the materials and tools are prepared and ready for use when required. 

    Purchasing air-dry clay is the first step which is fairly simple since you can buy it in 2 lbs packets in stores. Approximately two pounds or one kilogram of air-dry clay should be enough to create 20 pairs of earrings. 

    Additionally, craft starter packs are available in local arts and craft stores which contain all the materials and tools required to make clay earrings. This will come in handy for anyone planning on making these earrings often.

    However, they aren't cheap, so they might not be the right choice for one-time use. As an alternative, it's always possible to use household objects as tools and shape makers. Now, let’s take a quick look at the materials and tools required for making air-dry clay earrings. 

    Materials Required

    • Air-dry clay
    • Earring hooks
    • Jump ring
    • Acrylic paint

    Tools Required

    • Clay rolling board
    • Clay rolling pin
    • Clay cutters
    • Craft pliers
    • Paintbrush
    • Shape cutters

    Stepwise Guide To Making Air Drying Clay Earrings

    Now that all the materials are acquired, you are ready to make custom handmade jewelry for yourself or friends and family. Here's the complete guide to making clay earrings using just a few steps.

    1. Roughly Divide The Clay

    If you are making clay earrings for the first time, it will help to find a sample earring of a similar size similar to the design you want to create. At the very least, they will eliminate the need to build from memory, and there will be a visual guide to help you construct earrings.

    Begin by pinching off a small piece of the air-dry clay and placing the rest in an airtight bag, so it doesn't dry out. If you leave it exposed to air, it might become useless and will need to be thrown away. Dry clay for jewelry and accessories is an absolute disaster, and there's no way to construct a good-looking and durable piece from it.

    2. Work With The Clay

    Firstly, take the piece of clay between your fingers and press to loosen it, and roll it into a ball shape. Then, press down on the ball to get a somewhat flat round disc to create the basic shape of the round earrings. 

    At this point, make sure to keep the flat disc at a thickness of at least ¼ inches so that it does not break after drying. Circles and round shapes are what beginners start with, but you can try other shapes like teardrops if you are confident. 

    Incidentally, many people try to smooth out the imperfections and nit-pick about the size or structure for too long. Don't get us wrong, but that's not a huge problem because handmade pieces are not meant to appear perfect. Allow a few mistakes here and there, as that will add to the raw beauty of an air dry clay earring. 

    Apart from that, remember to always use a sharp pin to poke a hole in one corner of the flat disc. This hole will serve as the holding point, and jump rings or hooks will pass through it. 

    3. Keep The Clay Aside To Dry

    Since there is no baking involved, the drying time may take longer than you’ve anticipated. It is by no mean an instant process, and some pieces do dry overnight because they have a larger mass. The smaller ones, like the very first air dry clay earrings you make, will take around four to five hours to dry completely. 

    At this point, the question arises, "How to harden modeling clay," and the answer is simple—just expose it to air. This is a characteristic of air dry clay, which is also the reason why it's a popular material in DIY projects. 

    Essentially, the clay that starts out as a darker gray color and eventually shifts to become whiter as it dries. 

    4. Paint The Clay Earrings

    Now's the time to unleash your dormant creative side and paint one side of the flat disc clay earrings. This is the only part of the guide that doesn't have any rules because you can cover it with anything you like. We'll leave the fun part of making air dry clay earrings to you, but we suggest looking up basic designs that are quick to pull off.

    For instance, the earrings can have stripes, flowers, leaves, polka dots, or a solid plain color. Usually, people make a matching pair, but you can bend the rules to create a unique print with variations for each earring.

    Sometimes, the basics aren't enough to make a gorgeous pair of air dry clay earrings which leads us to glitter, stones, and other accessories that stick with glue. Dig into your craft supplies and search for size-appropriate gems for your new earrings. After the paint and accessories are all dried up, it's time to move to the next step.

    5. Seal The Clay

    Now, sealing the clay after drying and painting is a pretty important step because of its delicate nature. The material is brittle and porous after drying and can break easily upon contact; thus, we seal it with a binding agent. 

    For sealing, take some mod podge and mix it with water until it becomes a slurry. Using a paintbrush, apply a coat of this mixture over the finished earring and allow it to dry. The mod podge itself is available in various types like matte, gloss, sparkle, or stain finish, but you can add some glitter to jazz it up.

    Make sure to follow this step to keep your precious handmade air dry clay earrings in good shape for a longer time. 

    6. Attach The Hooks

    After the clay, paint, gems, and sealing coat are all dry; it's finally time to add the earring hook and jump rings to the disc. Using craft pliers, insert the attachments and secure them by twisting them, so they can stay firmly in place. 

    Next, add the hook portion to the rings, and you will have a brand-new pair of homemade air-dry clay earrings. If you are considering gifting these earrings to someone, we suggest placing them in a sheer bag with a card that contains personalized wishes.  

    Air Drying Clay Earrings Frequently Asked Questions?

    Can I bake modeling clay?

    First of all, you may not need to bake the clay at all if it is an air-drying type. As the name suggests, it can dry completely by getting exposed to air at a comfortable temperature. But, if you have a clay type that requires oven baking, it can be baked for ten minutes at 275 degrees Fahrenheit with ¼ inch thickness. 

    Coming back to the question, "Can you bake modeling clay?"—yes, you can if they are oven-baked ones.

    What are some alternate tools to use?

    It's alright to use anything you find in the house for a project as simple as this. Any cylindrical glass can act as a rolling pin, and old toys or icing nozzles can replace the cutter shapes. Also, you can use a table to flatten the clay pieces and use sharp tools like an X-Acto knife to materialize the shape. 

    Faceless artisan woman making handmade earrings from home. Air Drying Clay Earrings Final Words.

    Air Drying Clay Earrings Final Words

    More than anything, you need to try creating air-dry clay earrings for the sheer enjoyment of the process. Grab a rolling pin and experiment with various shapes, and you'll have a dozen new pieces to add to your collection in no time.

    Moreover, let the rough edges be because it does not have to look super finished with pristine smoothness. We’re hoping you enjoy making air dry clay earrings as much as we do. See you next time!

    Colored pencils are some of the simplest coloring media to pick up and use in the world of fine art. Everyone who has ever learned how to write started with pencils, for one very simple reason: accessibility. 

    You can experiment with them wildly and even create photorealistic portraits with the right color pencils. But, before you leap into photorealism and all the wonders of fine art, you have to start at the basics. Don’t skip the basics - after all, you can’t learn how to run before knowing how to walk first. 

    Have your colored pencils ready, prepare to step into their marvelous world, and take your artistic skills to the next levels by mastering them. 

    Using Colored Pencils For Making Fine Art

    Using Colored Pencils For Making Fine Art

    1. Introduction To Colored Pencil Art

    A. Sharpening Colored Pencils

    What you must remember about colored pencils is to sharpen them regularly. A dull pencil won’t be nearly as effective at applying the techniques you are about to learn in the following sections. 

    Sharpened pencil points will enable you to modify the pressure you apply with each stroke to a greater degree. Moreover, the color they leave behind embeds itself more readily. With a fine point, lighter strokes are more easily visible and there are no chances of white streaks being left behind due to a dull tip. 

    Colored pencils are made out of wax or oil-based materials, which makes sharpening them an easy task. You can use an artist’s knife to sharpen your pencils’ tips, but do so with care, or else the tip may end up snapping off. Alternatively, the safer and often preferred method of sharpening colored pencils is to use a regular pencil sharpener. 

    B. Tip Hardness

    You can find three distinct types of colored pencils based on tip hardness: soft, hard, and specialty colored pencils. The cores of soft pencils are made from wax or clay, while those of hard pencils are derived from oil-based materials. As for specialty colored pencils, their cores are derived from graphite, the same material used in regular ones. 

    Core hardness determines the fragility of a colored pencil. Soft colored pencils are prone to snapping easily, while it is much more difficult to break hard ones. 

    3. Colored Pencil Techniques

    One thing that remains consistent in every colored pencil technique is uniformity. The aim of colored pencil techniques is to teach you how to keep your pencil strokes uniform, without varying pressure mid-stroke. Many artists often advise beginners to fill up entire pages with these exercises to further polish their skills. 

    There are three basic colored pencil techniques that will develop your muscle memory and improve your strokes while making art pieces. These double as shading techniques as well, making them invaluable to an artist’s repertoire. 

    A. Hatching

    Hatching involves drawing short parallel lines going in the same direction. The goal is to maintain the distance and length between each line with minimal variation. You can use hatching to convey a specific kind of texture (skin, cloth etc.) as well. 

    B. Cross-Hatching

    Cross-hatching is a series of hatchings overlaid on top of another, resulting in a crisscross pattern, hence the name. This technique is often used in art pieces to convey shadows and depth in an object, as well as textures. Cross-hatching is the bread-and-butter of colored pencil art. 

    C. Stippling

    Think of stippling as hatching with dots. Stippling serves as an excellent warm-up exercise before you begin practicing your art. Being uniform is not as important here, as controlling the exact shape and size of a point while being fast is not easy. 

    D. Back And Forth Stroke

    You can define this technique as hatching without lifting your pencil at all. It’s the universal technique, one that nearly everyone has used in their childhood. As someone looking to master colored pencils, you can use this technique to further increase your pressure control and uniformity. 

    Helpful Tips For Drawing With Colored Pencils

    Helpful Tips For Drawing With Colored Pencils

    Now that you’re well-acquainted with the basic colored pencil techniques, here are a few points to consider throughout your journey to mastering the medium. These are basics that you can build your fine art around, as they remain important even after you’ve fully mastered the usage of colored pencils. 

    1. Consider Pencil Type

    If you’re a complete beginner, you may be able to get away with using low-quality colored pencils. But, as you grow more proficient in the art, you will need to seek higher quality ones so that they provide the desired results. 

    Try to avoid low-quality pencils altogether, if at all possible. The kind of pencils you use will have a massive impact on the art you produce. If you are in it for the long haul, the comparatively steeper price point of the best colored pencil brands is well worth paying. 

    2. Paper Quality

    Next comes paper quality and how a colored pencil point performs on it. To practice the basic techniques, you can use low quality paper without hesitation. In fact, some would even insist that you fill up dull sheets of paper with hatchings, cross-hatchings, and stippling as they directly improve your skill. 

    But, when it comes to creating finished artworks, always use high-grade paper. Now, you may be wondering what determines the quality of a paper. The answer is simple: the texture and tone of the paper. 

    A. Texture

    More textured surfaces absorb more of the color from your pencils and vice versa. A rougher texture may limit your detailing capabilities at first, but once you adapt to it, the paper will help enhance your finished artwork. 

    The opposite is true when it comes to smoother paper. You’ll initially have an easier time detailing on a smooth paper but lose out on multiple color applications for more complex pieces. 

    B. Tone

    White paper seems a no-brainer when approaching art, but you’ll be forced to use darker shades in order to convey depth. If you use a toned paper instead, you’ll be closer to both ends of the spectrum and have an easier time with highlights as well as shadows. 

    3. Practicing Pencil Pressure

    The techniques mentioned in the previous section help you achieve a uniform stroke. To practice pencil pressure, you should start by varying how hard you press the tip of your colored pencil. By adjusting the pressure applied to the sheet of paper, you’ll have a higher degree of control over what color values you want to use. 

    Pencil pressure can make or break the depth of an artwork. Conveying lighter hues becomes much more difficult if your hand isn’t trained to uniformly apply pressure. The converse is also true, as a darker color would require a lot of constant effort from an untrained hand. 

    3. Blending Your Colors

    Blending is the process of creating a seamless transition between two different color values. It’s done by overlaying one color on top of another in a slow, methodical manner. This process is crucial to painting in general, not just colored pencils. 

    There are plenty of ways to blend colored pencils, and each method gives a different look to the blended area. You can use kneaded erasers to erase the seam between colors, use colorless blender, apply the lighter color over the darker shade, carefully smudge multiple colors together- the list goes on. 

    Furthermore, you can opt to blend colors together at any point during the workflow. All you need to do is ensure that you don’t accidentally transpose the hues somewhere they don’t belong. 

    4. Layering Your Colors

    Layering colors provides more depth to any artwork. Be it portraits or elaborate landscapes, the manner in which you distribute colors matters a lot to make your piece feel more natural. 

    In portraits, layering can often be difficult to achieve since the human face only has so many color variations. The shades you can work with are fewer and you will have to work intricately with shadows to create the necessary contrast, depending on the lighting setup. 

    Landscapes have enough variety in shades to not have as much of a problem. That said, a scene may lose all of its depth if the wrong values are chosen. 

    In either case, remaining vigilant is important to succeeding with your artwork. 

    5. Work Your Colors Up Slowly

    Any lighting setup can be segregated into three parts: highlights, shadows, and midtones. Now, these parts have subcategories that work in tandem to create a natural, realistic artwork. But, initially, you must not worry about those aspects at all. 

    Lay out your colors one step at a time, after which you can begin refining your piece. With colored pencils in particular, you’ll be able to use the additional pressure control to further enhance these aspects of the work of art. 

    6. Stroke Direction Determines The Flow

    Consider the drawing of a cylinder with winding lines going down its length. Note how it directs your eyes downwards, and it is all because of the stroke direction and where the lines taper off. 

    Stroke direction gives the viewer an idea of the form of an object. As an artist, your objective is to create an illusion of depth and bring a natural quality to a flat drawing. With a medium such as colored pencil, there’s a lot more freedom in expressing your flow with the way you shade objects. 

    Mastering this will make you a seasoned artist in no time. 

    7. Burnishing

    When using a colored pencil, you may have noticed that it leaves behind white dots in the midst of the color. This happens when the ‘tooth’ of your paper pops out of the surface. 

    Burnishing is the process of pushing these teeth down and transforming your colored pencil artwork into a true painting. The irregularities disappear and your artwork is complete. 

    You can get specialized tools for burnishing to add a finishing touch to your artwork. 

    7. Detailing Is The Last Step

    It’s a mistake a lot of beginners make, which is to concern themselves with the details from the get-go. If you start adding intricate details to your artwork right away, it’s a surefire way to end up with a difficult-to-fix mess later on. 

    The first step should always be to sketch, i.e. to plan ahead. It’s in this stage that you make the most changes and do most of the heavy lifting. Once you know what the finished artwork may look like, start applying flat colors, followed by lighting setups, blending, and refining. 

    Once you have your colors ready and figure out how light hits the subject, you can start detailing. It is the most time-consuming part of the drawing process, but by no means is it the most difficult. Develop your colors and values one step at a time, and before long, your artwork will appear gorgeous and full of life. 

    8. Remember To Be Patient

    An important tip to remember is to be patient with your progress. It is said that an average person needs several hours of practice to master something. With a medium that demands a meticulous approach, like colored pencils, you should remain patient through the learning process. Learning how to organize colored pencils will also streamline the process. 

    It will take time before you start seeing leaps and bounds of improvement. But, all that hard work will be well worth the result. 

    How To Use Color Pencils Frequently Asked Questions

    How To Use Color Pencils Frequently Asked Questions ?

    How do I make my colored pencil look more solid?

    With colored pencils, heavy pencil pressure will create a more solid or brighter look. 

    If you’re overlaying the color on top of another, you may consider swapping to a different contrasting color that would achieve the same result. This is because the base color quickly blends with the one you lay over it. 

    What is the difference between blending and layering?

    Layering is what you do at the beginning of a project, just after the sketch. Essentially, it is a color map of your artwork and conveys a sense of depth to the image. 

    Blending, on the other hand, is the refinement of all the colors you’ve applied in an artwork. It’s one of the last stages of your piece and it adds to the finer details of a drawing. 

    Mastering both is key to the success of any artwork, so it’s a good idea to practice them regularly. 

    How can I apply more layers to a finished colored pencil art?

    You can use a small amount of solvent over your existing base layer to add multiple layers of color once it has dried. It has the added benefit of making your pencil artwork resemble paintings. To put it concisely, it is a fast tracked version of burnishing. 

    However, solvents can dissolve or fade the colors on your canvas. So, apply a light layer of it on your art to prevent it from causing any damage. 

    How To Use Color Pencils Conclusion

    How To Use Color Pencils Conclusion

    Simple to use, difficult to master: such is the way of colored pencils. We develop a natural affinity towards pencils because of our early experiences with them. Because of this, it always feels as if we’re covering known territory when using them. 

    However, it would be wise to not expect instant expertise with them. Like every field, colored pencil techniques demand time and patience from your end. It’s a gradual process, one that will eventually lead to a moment of epiphany when everything falls into place. 

    Art is a culmination of the artist’s experiences. The moment it clicks and you find that direction, you will become unstoppable. 

    Like our article? Checkout our next article on other topic such as, comparing size of dehumidifier for bathrooms to get a perfect balance. Dehumidifiers are helpful for artists who needs climate control to paint their way to excellence.

    Tiles, artwork, paint for bathroom ceiling and walls - all these are imperative for giving the most functional room in the house a stylish makeover! 

    Yet bathrooms are often the most overlooked when it comes to interior design. And while most homeowners may not agree, designing and styling a bathroom plays a key role in making the house feel comfortable and relaxing. 

    Utilizing your bathroom wall space aesthetically further enhances the overall style of your house. Thankfully, the possibilities of doing so are endless, and you will find something that suits your tastes in the list below. 

    So, here’s how you could bring new life to your bathroom! 

    24 Unique Bathroom Design Inspirations

    Unique Bathroom Design Inspirations

    Level up your bathroom with these aesthetically pleasing designs and suggestions. From tiles and artworks to unique textures, these are sure to make your bathroom more pleasant. 

    1. Floor Designs That Lead Into Your Bathroom Wall

    Line your bathroom floor with new tiles for a fresh look. Abstract or geometric, these will create a premium look that withstands wet conditions while being striking to behold. Use vibrant stone tiles and experiment with different colors and designs for a look unique to your bathroom. 

    2. Using Decorative Murals

    Hand-painted murals will freshen up a typically dull bathroom layout. You can use stencils and paint brushes if you are not comfortable with free-hand painting just yet. The best thing about this method is that do-overs are easy and convenient. 

    So, show off your creative skills with hand-painted murals and give your bathroom a fresh look. 

    3. Using A Limited Color Palette

    Color-coordinating every element of your bathroom will make it stand out in its own right. The curtains, shelves, wall and floor tiles, and artworks or murals can all be of a single color or two, channeling elegance out of simplicity. 

    4. Save Wall Space With Shelving Essentials

    Shelves save space, give your bathroom a neat look, and are an interesting break from the monotonous bathroom layout. Coordinate colors, find designs that suit your fancy, and just go for it. With a spacious and aesthetically pleasing shelf, your bathroom will have the perfect addition to the otherwise boring wall tiles. 

    5. Bathroom Wall Tiles

    Wall tiles come in all shapes and sizes. As far as color and textures are concerned, you can play around with them to your heart’s content. 

    Regardless of the color and design, tiles create a stylish and striking look for bathroom walls, and with the right color combinations, you add visual interest to your bathroom walls. Using the color wheel, you can find which colors complement each other the best and use them for interesting color and texture variations. 

    6. Unique Mirrors

    Mirrors reflect the light around the bathroom and make the space look larger than it is. With the correct lighting setups, this can end up making your bathroom look brighter and more lively. Combined with an appropriate wall texture, these will prove to be a fantastic décor choice. 

    Note that bathroom mirrors are available in a myriad of designs and shapes. These will be a practical and fancy addition to the bathroom walls. 

    7. Bring About Visual Variation With Artwork

    If hand-painting a mural is not your thing, check out some pre-made designs for your bathroom walls to bring their aesthetic appeal to a new level. Position it strategically so you can have a leisurely eye on the artwork while bathing. 

    Whether you choose painterly classics or abstract bursts of color, these will bring about a great change to your bathroom. 

    8. Use Different Designs For Each Of Your Bathroom Walls

    Using complementary colors, you can create a unique bathroom design where the walls have different colors or textures across the board. You can make your bathroom truly uplifting and colorful with the right combinations. 

    9. Using Sliding Screen Doors

    Prominent in Asian cultures, you can fit sliding doors to your bathroom to change the usual design formula. With sliding doors, you can stretch the designs on your bathroom walls onto the door screens for an effortlessly neat look. 

    10. Using A Combination Of Wallpaper And Tiles

    Bathroom wallpapers have been increasingly popular in recent times. So, tile the wall where the chances of it being wet are high and use wallpapers to bring about a sophisticated look. 

    There are no limits to wallpaper designs. They add a unique visual flair to the bathroom without causing any worry about durability. 

    11. 3D Patterned Bathroom Wall Textures

    You can use 3D patterned textures on the walls to bring a striking change to your bathroom walls. These can be softer or more prominent, as per your tastes. 

    12. Vary Your Bathroom Designs With Different Materials

    By mixing natural materials with man-made ones, you can create a premium feel for your bathroom. 

    You have the freedom of creating harmony between different textures or going about a more plain but elegant look. The depth added by the texture and material variation is unmatched. 

    13. DIY A Slatted Wood Accent Wall

    This is perhaps the easiest bathroom wall idea to DIY reliably. All you need is a few planks of wood and a nail gun to make an accent wall for a premium look. 

    14. Create A Contrast With Wainscoting

    Painted or slatted, wainscoting can make your bathtub pop with an interesting use of texture and color. Wainscoting makes your bathroom feel more sophisticated, and when combined with wallpapers, it can lead to a very cohesive look. 

    15. Accentuate The Background With Paint

    Combining dark-painted walls with bright bathroom tiles or vice versa will spruce up your bathroom like nothing else. A lot of people ask us, “Do you need special paint for bathrooms?” 

    While you can use paint for bathroom tiles, there’s more that you can do with them. Try experimenting with the colors and contrast them for striking results. Transform your bathroom into a spa with the right combination! 

    16. Experiment With Repeated Patterns

    Human minds like repeating patterns. There’s a kind of satisfaction to them that we just can’t get enough of. Even with a monochrome palette, you can bring life to your bathroom walls by repeating the same pattern across the room. 

    By replicating the pattern on your bathroom wall on the shelves and ceramics, you’ll produce a result that pleases the mind. 

    17. Using Plants To Enliven Your Bathroom

    Greenery can make your bathroom feel richer. Using bathroom-friendly plants has the added benefit of making the space feel more breathable. 

    So, hang up a few plants to instantly make your bathroom wall more lively. You can choose to dedicate a corner to them or spread them around the room. 

    18. Fill Up Empty Space With Monograms

    Be it initials, elaborate symbols, or a single letter; a monogram can complement your bathroom wall textures with its simplicity. Contrast the details on your wall with the elegance of a monogram’s simplicity. 

    19. Recreate Stained Glass Paintings With Tiles

    Another alternative to painted murals, you may use a pre-painted set of tiles that make up a beautiful painting once put together. The tiles can stand on their own with their unique textures and shapes. You can combine them with a mural for a truly artistic spin on a modern bathroom. 

    20. Personalize Your Bathroom With Wall Decals

    A simple sticker can make all the difference. With custom bathroom wall decals, you can get rid of the empty space on your bathroom wall and bring forth a personal touch. 

    21. Tiled Accent Walls

    The idea here is broadly the same as with slatted wood accent walls. The difference is that these are significantly tougher to DIY, and you will likely need professional help. A simple accent wall with interesting textures may be just what your bathroom needs to make it feel fresh. 

    22. LED Cabinet Mirror

    A cabinet mirror hides away bathroom storage without taking up excess space. The mirror is lined with an LED ring light to enhance the designs on your walls as well, making it an ideal choice for your bathroom. 

    23. Something That’s Just Out There

    Cover the whole room in cabinets, or line the walls with wine crates. You can opt to make your bathroom utterly wild in all the right ways with dramatic lighting setups and unconventional décor. Have your shower curtain on rails or make pixel art from bathroom wall tiles - let your creativity run loose! 

    24. Mixing It All Up

    You can use some of these bathroom wall ideas, or you can use all of them. Have differently styled wall tiles and combine them with a painted backdrop, or you can use repeated textures with different color combinations. The great thing about bathroom wall designing is that you can experiment with them until it suits your taste. 

    Things To Keep In Mind With Bathroom Walls

    Things To Keep In Mind With Bathroom Walls

    The list of bathroom wall ideas is endless. You can scour Pinterest boards for hours and still find new ways to decorate your empty wall space. 

    But even with an inexhaustible supply of things to implement, there are a few things to consider when decorating your bathroom. The size and shape of your bathroom, usage, longevity, and design you're using, all play a crucial role in this. 

    1. Size Of The Bathroom

    Depending on the size of your bathroom, using the ideas listed above may have differing challenges. Since most washrooms are smaller, the decorations should match accordingly. You wouldn’t want all the available space to be occupied by a single cabinet. As such, the space in a modern bathroom will define what kind of décor would suit it the best. 

    1. Storage

    Minimizing clutter in a bathroom can be challenging since it's usually the smallest room in a house. As such, storage is an essential factor when it comes to bathroom designs. A mirror cabinet is always a great pick, as is an integrated storage unit. 

    Building the latter, though, is a more suitable way to save space in a bathroom. It's a fusion of style and function, after all. 

    1. Humidity And Moisture

    Naturally, washrooms are wet and humid places. Modern bathrooms take this into account during the design process. It would be best to keep any decorative articles that cannot tolerate humidity out of your bathroom. 

    1. Lighting

    The lighting makes all the difference when it comes to the appeal of a bathroom. Since bathroom tiles reflect light significantly, the best way to go about this would be the minimalist route. Small wall-mounted lamps will make a dramatic change to your bathroom décor. 

    1. Suitable Colorway

    A defined color palette goes a long way in defining a bathroom's atmosphere. You may use a color wheel guide to pick the right tones and contrast them without compromising on the looks. 

    Colors inspire a certain kind of mood in people. Using the right colors, you can generate a relaxed atmosphere by mixing and matching different tones. 

    1. Experiment All You Want!

    Trying out different combinations is all part of the fun. You can use bold patterns, uniquely shaped mirrors, a small photo gallery on an empty wall, framed windows, or go monochrome - the list goes on. 

    There is no reason why you mustn’t go wild with colors and design options! So, analyze the space of your bathroom and decorate it accordingly. 

    Ideas For Bathroom Walls Frequently Asked Questions

    Ideas For Bathroom Walls Frequently Asked Questions ?

    How can I make sure I have enough space for my ideal layout?

    Consider consulting a professional to have your desired layout fit your bathroom. They will help you chalk out the path to your perfect bathroom décor. 

    If your bathroom is too small, chances are you’ll have to rethink the approach to the design. Sometimes, all you’ll have to do is swap a few things around to finalize it. If not, you may build storage units into your wall to save space for this purpose. 

    How can a bathroom design be future-proofed?

    It's generally advised to incorporate practicality into your bathroom design, but doing so without compromising its style is where things get tricky. 

    The most crucial detail is to keep ample space to move around. Keeping the bathroom from feeling cramped is essential. You can add overhanging cabinets and use creative ways to hide storage (as in a mirror cabinet). Other design choices, such as sectioning off the shower completely, can add to the future-proofing aspect of a bathroom. 

    You may also use high-quality taps and shower faucets, so you won't have to worry about replacing them for a long time. 

    What are the best lighting setups for bathrooms?

    Working in layers of lighting will get you the best results. Task lights are used for utility, such as above your bathroom mirror and sink. 

    Use ambient lights as overhead fixtures to create a calming atmosphere. Generally, these are overhead fixtures that bounce light off tiles and other reflective materials. 

    Moreover, with accent lights, you'll be able to highlight a particular area of your bathroom. Be it artwork, the bathtub, or the mirror; these will make the defining feature of the room pop even more. 

    On the other hand, decorative lights are smaller bulbs and pendant lights that add to a bathroom's overall look and feel. Hang these on your accent wall or simply across the ceiling to bring a dramatic shift to your bathroom's mood. 

    Be sure to use ample lights for the best results. It's wise not to overlook lighting since it can single-handedly define the mood and feel of your bathroom. 

    Ideas For Bathroom Walls Conclusion

    Ideas For Bathroom Walls Conclusion

    The kind of décor you choose for the bathroom brings forth a part of your personality and gives it a visual flair that can’t be found elsewhere. 

    The easiest way to go about this is to dedicate a corner of your washroom space and hang paintings or plants to enliven the space. Add depth to it with vanity fixtures and proper lighting, throw in some tiles, and you’ll have your desired bathroom layout ready. So, get ready to make a statement with your bathroom with the ideas listed in this article. 

    However, no matter what you choose, it’s crucial to plan the changes ahead of time. With a professional's help, you can mix and match the efficiency and style quotient of your bathroom. 

    And before you know it, your dream bathroom will be ready for use! 

    Featuring a lightweight and compact design with a powerful built-in compressor, the BougeRV Portable AC is an option to consider for van life. Its adjustable dual outlet design and extendable hose give it a versatile quality, making it a feature-packed portable air conditioner for all situations.

    The summer heat can quickly put a damper on all the fun of exploration when on a camping trip.

    And since summer is the time to go out and explore, the heat can be quite uncomfortable. That’s where portable air conditioners can be quite useful, giving you and your party a nice cool breeze.

    So, to see if it can help you stay cool and beat the heat, read my BougeRV Portable Air Conditioner Review!

    BougeRV Portable Air Conditioner Review

    BougeRV Portable Air Conditioner, 2899BTU Tent Air...
    • 【Take and Go】: With an Ergonomic handle & compact air...
    • 【Enjoy Cool in Summer】: Built-in the powerful Panasonic...

    Design: Compact And Convenient

    Featuring a compact stereo-like design, the BougeRV portable AC is meant to be carried around without any hassle. And the ergonomic handle atop the air conditioning unit further adds to its mobility. The air conditioner is longer than it is wide, making it fit easily in the boot space of any car without requiring extra space. And its low weight makes it even easier to carry.

    This portable air conditioner is operated using a touch panel that is responsive and easy to use. You can switch between AC and thermostat modes instantaneously, and the same goes for the fan mode.

    It comes in a yellow-and-black color scheme, which is not a color option often seen in air conditioners. You may use it as a cooling device in a Recreational Vehicle (RV), camper van, camping tent, and more.

    Cooling Capabilities: Quick And Functional

    Rated at 2899 BTUs, the BougeRV air conditioner has a high cooling capacity that can be activated through a touch-operated control panel.

    In hindsight, it aims to be as powerful as your office or home air conditioners packaged in a small unit. Its powerful Panasonic compressor makes its operation pretty quiet in all modes. Plus, it can start cooling within 15 seconds of turning it on, which is quite fast.

    The unit also comes with three fan speeds and a cooling mode that can reach temperatures between 60 and 86 degrees Fahrenheit. Its high air output rate, combined with the adjustable thermostat, allows the air conditioning unit to cool down spaces up to 54 square feet. That said since it is a small unit, larger spaces may take a while to have a cooling effect.

    A prominent feature of this portable AC is its dual outlet design, with an inlet port on either side of the unit. The other port seen close to the inlet port is the outlet port, to which you have the option of connecting a vent hose. This allows you to extend the reach of what would otherwise have very little coverage area.

    Much like a home air conditioner, the BougeRV air conditioner lets out warm air from the exhaust port while expelling cold air from the outlets. You can also adjust the angles of the dual exhaust ports, ranging from 30 to 180 degrees, in increments of 30. This allows the air conditioner to cool air in nearly all directions.

    In typical camping tents, you can have the AC facing your direction, with the exhaust port allowing hot air out through the window. 

    Noise Levels

    As for its driving noise level, the BougeRV portable air conditioner lets out around 45 dB of noise at its lowest fan speed. On a higher driving mode, it may reach up to 65 dBs, which is still relatively quiet.

    I rarely noticed its whirring noise unless the environment was completely silent, which only happens at nighttime during a camping trip. During the day, it may not even be noticeable that the unit makes any sounds.

    Outdoor Performance: Requires A Power Source

    The BougeRV portable air conditioner is designed to be used outside as well as indoors. As such, it comes with features to handle any outdoor or indoor situation.

    You may use it by connecting it to a number of different power sources without much trouble. And since it’s a 24V and 10 amp unit, the air conditioner uses very little power to bring the temperature down in your space. This makes the AC energy efficient, which is a critical feature for any outdoor portable model.

    Additionally, the portable AC comes with a 360W AC adapter if you ever want to connect it to the power supply of your home. As such, it can be used in your patio and garden as well, giving it applications beyond camping trips and exploration.

    Being a portable plug-in-and-run type of air conditioner, the BougeRV air conditioner requires no setup or installation. It works much like a home air conditioner, with the sole difference being the unit works in an outdoor setting. Thus, this portable unit can work for several hours, as long as it has access to a power source.

    There is a slight caveat to its small size and portable design, which is its lack of an electrical battery for off-grid use. Since it is not a battery-operated AC, you will have to find a wall outlet to power it from. This can be a bit troubling if you don’t have a portable power station or battery pack while you’re out camping.

    Price: Premium Range

    Like the BougeRV portable refrigerator, the BougeRV is a premium product for all the features that it comes with. Its price competes with other portable air conditioners like the Zero Breeze Mark II, albeit without a few key features. The feature-packed BougeRV is a decently hefty investment.

    That said, the high build quality and cooling volume provide the desired returns on investment.

    Brand Name: BougeRV | Model: 2899 BTU Portable AC | Product Dimensions: 25.79 x 12.99 x 19.29 inch | Voltage: 24 Volts | Noise Level: 50 dB | Coverage Area: 54 sq. ft.

    Verdict

    If you’re a frequent camper, you may look at the BougeRV Portable Air Conditioner as a dedicated cooling device for camping. Its 2899 BTU rating may seem a little low at first glance but has sufficient cooling power for smaller spaces.

    With its dual outlet design, the air conditioner can cover many directions without issues. Its vents can be adjusted to a large degree, and it features outlet hose support to extend its fast cooling effect.

    Its compact size, low weight, and long handlebar lean into its use as an outdoor cooling device. The BougeRV portable AC was designed with several settings in mind, and it functions sufficiently in them.

    To sum up all the information, the BougeRV portable air conditioner will perform well in most scenarios, so long as it has access to power.

    Nothing takes the wind out of your creative sails like finding that your sculpting clay has hardened to unusability. But solutions like clay softeners can help the best clay for sculpting become limber and ready to use again. 

    Besides, there are many other simple ways to make your hard clay soft again, such as using plasticizers and fresh clay. Even if it has become rock-solid, the clay can be rejuvenated for use again. The point of no return with clay is quite far, and it can be revived to pristine condition in most cases. So, dive in to know about them! 

    Squish Test To Gauge The Stiffness Of The Clay

    Before anything else, it’s important to check the stiffness of the clay so that you can employ the right technique to soften it. And here’s an easy way to do that.

    Squeeze your polymer clay between your palms to check if it’s still somewhat squishable. The clay can still be restored if edges can be worked with. Being still a ways away from the point of no return, you can try a few things to revive it to its former glory using some of the methods mentioned below. Just ensure that the method you use is compatible with the material your clay is made of.

    But if the clay feels as stiff as a brick, the chances of revival are slimmer. Nevertheless, you can still try to work with it.

    How To Soften Modeling Clay?

    How To Soften Modeling Clay

    Clay softeners are perhaps the easiest and most accessible option to bring your polymer clay back to a perfect working condition. But it is far from being the only way to restore the softness of polymer clay. 

    In the following sections, you'll find several ways to make your modeling clay usable again.

    1. Using Clay Softeners

    Clay softeners come in both solid and liquid varieties and should be added to the clay once it has been warmed a little.

    Add a few drops of liquid clay softener (like the Sculpey clay softener)  or a small piece of solid clay softener to your warm clay: one part softener to five parts of clay. Knead until your polymer clay has reached the desired consistency.

    Something to remember while using a clay softener is that it dilutes the color of the clay it is applied to. If you wish to retain the color of the clay, limit the amount of softeners added. Alternatively, you can mix in colors meant for clay to have it retain its vibrance.

    2. Using A Rubber Mallet

    If the clay you're working with is not rock-hard, you can use a hammer to smash it until it starts to move again. Throw your clay in a zip-lock plastic bag and put in a little bit of elbow grease. You can also add a small amount of fresh clay to make it work.

    Remember that your clay will break into pieces if it is too hard. So, warming it up before using a mallet is preferable, as it reduces the chances of the clay being brittle.

    3. Using A Food Processor

    Chop up your hard polymer clay into small bits, chuck it into a food processor, add a softening agent (like petroleum jelly) and blend away. The blades of your food processor will work the softening agent into the clay, softening it and making the pieces usable again. Use the blender in short bursts to effectively have the softening agent do all the magic.

    Take the pieces out of your food processor and knead them together. The clay should be usable again.

    4. Mixing With Fresh Clay

    You can also mix fresh, soft polymer clay with hard clay. Like softening agents, these can cause the color of your clay to fade. Hence, try to ensure that the fresh clay is of the same color as the hardened one.

    5. Using Heat

    You can simply use your body heat, which is surprisingly effective in softening modeling clay.  But this will only work if the clay isn't too hard. 

    You can also use a hot water bottle for this purpose. However, ensure that the clay doesn't become too hot, or it will harden even further.

    Once warmed up, knead the clay with your hands until it is of the desired consistency again.

    6. Using A Conditioning Machine

    You can use a conditioning machine if the clay is slightly hard. A conditioning machine compresses the clay to make it limber, smoother, and workable again. Pasta machines will work just as well, as they flatten the clay and release the air trapped in it. You can use the pasta machine repeatedly to create layers of clay of your desired thickness, which is ideal for making handcrafted materials.

    On the other hand, moderately hard polymer clay can be softened by working it well enough.

    Why Does Modeling Clay Become Hard?

    Many factors contribute to modeling clay hardening. For instance, polymer clay contains plasticizers that make it limber. Over time, it loses these substances, causing them to become Other reasons for old polymer clay becoming hard is being left out in the heat for too long and aging. If stored in a warm place, the clay bakes and may not be salvageable anymore.

    Drying up is also a common reason for hard clay. If stored long enough, the clay will eventually harden and need restoration.

    The Troubles Of Working With Hard Clay

    Once hardened, clay will be tough to work with, as it becomes brittle and begins to affect the overall quality of the project. Even if you manage to sculpt something, there will be cracks and deformities on the surface of the sculpture once it’s baked.

    This will, in turn, affect its durability, but that is not the only problem. Firstly, you'll need more effort to model and condition the clay, which will cause undue hand fatigue or strain. The clay won't bend and shift quickly, no matter how much effort you put in.

    The Different Kinds Of Modeling Clay

    Hands of young black man in apron flattening piece of clay with rolling pin on board while sitting by table with supplies for handwork. The Different Kinds Of Modeling Clay.

    Clay can be broadly classified into four categories: polymer clay, air dry clay, natural clay, and oil-based clay. When it comes to modeling vs polymer clay for sculpting projects, the former, along with air dry clay are the most common kinds of clay. Natural clay is used to make ceramic products, while oil-based clay is favored for its malleability.

    Each of these clays behave differently when dried and require various methods for revival once hardened. Oil-based clays react to mineral oils the best when softening, while air dry and polymer clays can be made limber with softening agents.

    Air Drying Clay Vs Polymer Clay

    When it comes to air drying clay vs polymer clay, there are a few key differences you may want to be aware of. Polymer clay is generally more favorable to work with since it won't dry as quickly, nor will it become brittle upon drying. Air dry clay is a mixture of glue and clay that air dries, while polymer clay needs to be baked due to its plastic base.

    As far as the revival process is concerned, air dry clay can often be restored with water, while polymer clay must have its plasticizers replenished for it to become limber again. The degree to which either can be restored is different, and each method has a unique effect on the type of clay.

    How To Soften Polymer Clay That Has Aged?

    Polymer clay can last a long while, so clay that has aged enough to be rock-solid is something of a rarity. Nevertheless, it can be restored to a usable condition fairly easily with the use of plasticizers.

    Using Plasticizers

    Polymer clay contains plasticizers that keep it soft. And over time, the clay will lose enough of their plasticizers to make it rock-solid. Hence, adding them back to it will make your polymer clay workable again. In this regard, mineral oils and baby oils are some of the more common plasticizers that you can find on the market.

    Kneading some mineral oil or baby oil into your hardened clay will gradually soften it up.  However, if you mix too much of these oils into the polymer clay, you’ll end up with a blob that cannot be sculpted with.

    Hardened Natural Clay

    Unlike polymer clay, natural earth clay can be restored relatively easily. It will take a lot of time to fully revive, but the result is well worth the effort.

    Reviving Natural Clay

    With this method, you will be able to reuse your hardened earth clay within a day or two. For this, you’ll need a bag of clay, a large bucket, mortar and pestle or hammer, water and a container to store the clay slurry in.

    Break the stiff clay into small pieces and grind it down using mortar and pestle. Mix the powdered clay in water and make a slurry out of it. Ensure the sludge is not too diluted, as it can become difficult to manage afterwards. Leave it out to dry until the clay has regained its malleability.

    Stiffening Polymer Clay

    Working with polymer clay that is too soft can be a mess. Likewise, it can be difficult to shape if it is too sticky or slimy. This happens if there is an abundance of moisture in the environment or if the weather is too warm.

    Since polymer clay consists of plastic, warming it up softens it considerably. Hence, the first solution to making it stiff again is to cool it down by putting it in the refrigerator for some time. Alternatively, let the clay sit in a cool room. If it does not make the clay workable again, you can move on to a different solution.

    Another option you could try is to mix fresh polymer clay in the hardened batch. This will even out the excess moisture, reducing the sliminess to a considerable degree. Make sure to use an ample amount of fresh polymer clay; otherwise, the stickiness will linger in the mixed clay.

    The last resort would be to squeeze the excess moisture out of your polymer clay. To do so, flatten the clay and sandwich it between two sheets of paper. Place a heavy object on top and leave it for a few hours. The paper should absorb the surplus fluids from your clay, making it stiff enough to be worked with again. 

    However, keep in mind that removing too much moisture from your clay can make it brittle and unfit for use. It would be advisable to be careful while using this method.

    How To Make Modeling Clay Soft Again Frequently Asked Questions ?

    Can clay be revived if it has hardened completely?

    If you’re working with polymer clay, you can try using solid and liquid clay softeners or plasticizers to restore it. To restore air drying clay, you may use water and heat to revive it.

    Though it takes a long time, clay can harden to the point of no-return. Hence, we’d suggest keeping your expectations tempered when working with old clay.

    Can a microwave be used to restore dry clay?

    Yes, a microwave oven can be used to heat up hard polymer clay. Use the oven in short 10-second bursts until the clay can be kneaded with your hands. Do so until you get the desired consistency.

    Since you’ll be essentially heating up plastic when heating the clay, let fresh air into your microwave afterwards. This will help remove the harmful chemicals from the oven.

    Can you use lotion as a softening agent?

    You can use lotions to help knead the clay, but they don’t generally contain plasticizing oils, which is why they won’t do much to soften the clay. It would be better to use mineral or baby oil instead.

    How effective of a clay softener is olive oil?

    Olive oil, when used in moderation, can be pretty effective. A few drops of olive oil will be enough to make the clay malleable. Knead it in properly and it should be good to go.

    How To Make Modeling Clay Soft Again Conclusion

    How To Make Modeling Clay Soft Again Conclusion

    No matter the kind of clay you use, the process of restoration is nearly always universal. It all comes down to the composition of the clay, which is what determines how one can make it usable again.

    For amateurs and professionals, polymer clay is an ideal clay for sculpting and artifact creation. It lasts for a long time and can be worked with even after it has aged a bit. Owing to its contents, the clay can be restored to its former glory with no troubles.

    This guide has listed a few of the ways to restore your clay to working condition again. You can experiment with the methods detailed here and see what works the best for your needs. 

    The ways to make an air conditioner more energy efficient are several, involving steps like ductwork upgrades and ceiling fan installations. However, simple steps like regular maintenance and keeping curtains closed matter more in the long run to save money on utility bills.

    Air conditioners can consume a lot of energy, and during the summer heat, your electricity bills can shoot up high enough to cause worry.

    Luckily, there are several easy tips and tricks that you can perform to improve your air conditioner efficiency and reduce the financial load. These range from maintenance and servicing to simple lifestyle changes.

    So, let’s take a look at a few ways to improve your air conditioner efficiency and save up on energy expenses.

    12 Air Conditioner Efficiency Tips To Reduce Energy Bills

    12 Air Conditioner Efficiency Tips To Reduce Energy Bills

    1. Have Your Air Conditioner Serviced

    Air conditioner units have several complex parts that make them work, and if any of them are faulty, it can lead to higher energy consumption. There’s nothing worse than the air conditioner malfunctioning during a heat wave in summer months, and a poorly serviced AC will be prone to working incorrectly.

    Be sure to make regular service calls for air conditioner repairs or cleaning air filters. The frequency of this needn’t be more than once a year, and by having your AC serviced, you will see a marked improvement in its performance. A well-performing air conditioner will consume just enough power to cool your room without any signs of slowing down.

    2. Outdoor AC Unit Maintenance

    It’s important to note that the outdoor unit for split ACs requires just as much attention as the indoor unit. Having the outdoor unit cleaned can add years to the lifespan of the home appliance while improving its efficiency as well.

    Additionally, the area surrounding an outdoor unit can have trees and debris blocking the vent, which can lead to a host of issues. Keeping this area clear will help your air conditioner unit work properly. Simply rake away the shrubbery and dust once a few weeks, and you’re done.

    This is a step exclusive to larger air conditioners such as wall-hung or mini-split air conditioners. By virtue of including all the functional components in a single unit, portable air conditioners require no outdoor units and thus, require no outdoor maintenance.

    3. Insulate Your Walls And Attic

    Insulation can do wonders for the efficiency of your portable air conditioner by helping to trap cold air during summer. Once the air inside a room remains cool, the air conditioner doesn’t have to consume as much power to keep it cool. And considering the fact that ACs consume the most power during summers, insulation can help reduce energy bills.

    Not only that, but insulation is also beneficial for trapping warm air during winters with no warm air escaping outside. There are no real downsides to insulating your walls and attic.

    4. Upgrade Your Ductwork

    Central air conditioning systems use a network of ducts to keep the whole house cool. If the ductwork of such air conditioners is exposed, the cold air inside them can quickly become warm before it reaches the desired room. This can render the whole point of a central air conditioning system moot.

    Insulating your ductwork can help mitigate this issue, making your air conditioning system more cost-effective. This can bring a big difference in the energy bills you receive during the summer.

    5. Invest In A Smart Thermostat

    Smart thermostats are a great way to reduce your overall air conditioning costs and save up on your electricity bill. These allow you to program schedules for your AC, as well as set it to turn on or off when the room reaches a certain temperature. When you’re away, the programmable thermostat can sense it and signal the air conditioner to either ease up on the cooling or turn it off. 

    Thermostats have been a part of regular households for quite a while, but many people neglect to adjust their thermostats during hot weather. All too often, thermostats are left at the lowest possible temperature setting, which causes them to run continuously. This issue is completely resolved by using a programmable thermostat after a one-time setting adjustment.

    6. Keep The Curtains Closed

    The warmth from direct sunlight can reduce how effectively an air conditioner cools a room down. The fact that blocking the sun can help cool the room down is something that may fly under people’s radars.

    Optimizing your ambient temperature by limiting the sunlight is as simple as drawing your curtains, window blinds, and solar screens. This will have your home cool down significantly more quickly, and consequently, your air conditioner will not have to work as hard.

    7. Avoid Using Heat-Inducing Appliances

    Cooking stoves, ovens, dishwashers, and the like produce a lot of heat, which can reduce the effectiveness of your air conditioner. The air conditioner has to compensate for the added heat and consumes more power as a result, adding to your cooling costs. Moreover, running these devices during the day will wear out your AC even further.

    It’s always best to schedule your use of such heat-producing devices so that they are in use when the temperature is not as high. This will reduce the workload on your AC system, improving the performance and energy conservation in the process.

    8. Invest In Ceiling And Portable Fans

    With a ceiling fan in the room, an air conditioner doesn’t have to work as hard to maintain airflow. Once your air conditioner has cooled your room down, consider turning it off and using a ceiling fan instead. Or, if you have a portable air conditioner, you can switch to its fan mode as well.

    Along with portable fans, ceiling fans consume less energy, saving up to 40% of the air conditioning bill. The only real caveat with portable fans is that you have to worry about positioning them well.

    Tip

    When installing a smart ceiling fan, it’s important to ensure that the blades are angled to push air downwards. There’s no use for a fan that throws air upwards and away from the user, is there?

    9. Planting Trees Around Your House

    The principle behind using trees for your home is similar to that of curtains in that they block a lot of warmth produced by direct sunlight. The only difference is, trees are of a larger scale than curtains.

    If you have an attic, there are very few ways of keeping the crawlspace from becoming the warmest part of your home. Of course, this makes trees a permanent solution to this problem, providing your attic with much-needed shade and blocking out the UV rays.

    It’s important to remember that you won’t see immediate benefits in your energy bill, as trees are very much a long-term solution. According to the United States Department of Energy, trees can improve the efficiency of your air conditioner by up to 10%, which is a sizable amount.

    Tip

    Consider planting birch or red maple trees, should you opt to use this as your solution. These provide enough shade to cover a good portion of your home, making them a viable long-term solution.

    10. Correctly Place Your Thermostat

    Thermostat placement can be the deciding factor in how well your Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning, or HVAC system works. By placing it on the right wall in your home, you can make sure that the cooling system doesn’t activate too frequently or too sparsely.

    For instance, if you place the thermostat on a wall that receives heat through factors like solar exposure, the battery-powered AC will turn on frequently. On the other hand, if the device is placed somewhere that remains constantly cold, the thermostat may not turn the AC on when needed.

    To make sure neither of these instances occurs, you may place the thermostat on a centralized wall that is a few paces away from the windows.

    11. Close Off Leakage Points

    Cold air can leak through openings left in your home, no matter how small. The biggest culprits of this issue are cracks and openings in doors and windows, allowing cool air to escape through. Additionally, the foundations of your home, where the meeting point of brick and siding is, can cause cool air to leak.

    The best way to ensure there are no leaking points is to have a professional perform an energy audit. These audits will give you a complete picture of the state of the home and its energy efficiency, giving you room for optimization. Consider using caulk or similar sealant to close off these leakage points.

    12. Pick The Correct AC Size

    If you’re looking to purchase a new air conditioning unit, choosing one that is sized correctly can save money on utility bills. An AC unit that is too small for a room will have to work harder to maintain its temperature. On the other hand, a cooling unit that is too large will consume too much power to condition the space properly.

    You can gauge if your future AC is of the right size or not by looking at its BTU (British Thermal Unit) rating. Every AC receives a BTU rating that increases by a factor of 20 for every square foot of living space. A 2,000 BTU air conditioner can cool a space of 100 square feet well, while larger rooms can require more than 20,000 BTUs.

    The rating also increases with the size and weight of the air conditioning unit, in addition to the size of the room. Thus, the energy consumption of larger air conditioners increases as well. The energy consumption also varies based on the height of the ceiling, solar exposure, and heat-producing appliances in the room. You can look at the energy star rating for gauging energy consumption as well.

    Air Conditioner Efficiency Tips Conclusion

    Conclusion

    There is virtually no end to how you can optimize your air conditioner's energy consumption. The ones listed above are just a few of the simple ones, and if you’re up for it, you can opt for more involved steps. Installing solar panels is one such intricate step for energy-efficient use.

    In most cases, the smaller and less intricate options are all that matter. These small steps add up and eventually, you’ll be looking at energy savings in the thousands of dollars. It’s all just a matter of keeping up these small habits. Balancing comfort with cost-effectiveness is always a wise step, and you can save money by starting with the air conditioner.

    If you found this guide insightful, consider checking out our review of the Zero Breeze Mark II portable air conditioner.

    When it comes to the best clay for sculpting, many people prefer to side with modeling clay. 

    Both children and adults like this flexible material as they can make fun sculptures out of it. And the popularity of the clay has led companies to introduce various types of modeling clays catering to different age groups. 

    Most associate modeling clay with its pliability, which is preferred for children as they are able to reuse it to make new things every day. But, that might not be true for someone who wants to preserve their project. 

    That's why today we're here to discuss whether you can bake modeling clay. We hope this guide will help you in figuring out if modeling clay would be the best for your projects. 

    Can You Bake Modeling Clays Of All Types?

    Woman hands showing dot on orange ball made by tooth stick to create orange fruit from the polymer clay. Can You Bake Modeling Clays Of All Types.

    One of the things you need to know before purchasing any modeling clay is that all variants can't be baked or hardened. The most common colorful kids modeling clays available on the market are meant to be reused, so they can't be baked. They usually have an oil-based formula that prevents the material from drying out. 

    Having said that, there are options available that allow you to either bake or air dry them to make the clays non-pliable. A popular option is polymer-based clays, which are preferred by artists and sculptors. The projects made using polymer clay can be baked as per instructions provided by brands to harden them within minutes. 

    Another alternative is air-dry modeling clays. After creating a project, you need to let it sit for a period of 24-48 hours, during which the moisture will dissipate to harden the clay. 

    At times, packaging for modeling clays can be vague, and brands don't mention whether they can be hardened. Before making the purchase, check the package to see if it mentions drying or baking. 

    We also want to point out that it isn't a good idea to try clays that don't explicitly mention the baking process. Doing this can be especially hazardous when the material contains toxic compounds. If in doubt, check out the recommendations of professional modeling clay artists about which modeling clay would be best for preserving projects. 

    Two Ways To Harden Modeling Clay

    Even though you may not be able to harden modeling clay by baking, you can try other techniques. These would require you to get a few extra things, but they are a handy and economical way to harden projects made from modeling clay. 

    1. Use A Polymer Clay Sealer

    A polymer clay sealer is one of the best ways to harden modeling clay figures to preserve them for a long time. You just need to brush the sealer on your project and wait for it to dry. The sealer would make the project much less pliable than before, but be careful while handling your sculptures as they may get damaged if you apply too much pressure. 

    2. Dip Them In Resin

    Do you love making tiny knick-knacks or jewelry using modeling clay? If yes, dip your models in a layer of quick-drying resin to make them non-pliable. 

    All you need to do is get a pack of quick-drying resin and mix it according to the manufacturer's instructions. Then, carefully dip the items into the resin and put them on a dust-free surface. Wait for them to dry, and the resin should create a transparent, waterproof coating over the modeling clay. 

    Remember to be careful when using resin, as some can be toxic. Always follow safety precautions and never involve children while working on resin projects. The good thing is that resin becomes non-toxic after curing and doesn't react with your modeling clay pieces. 

    How To Bake Modeling Clay Items?

    Make sure to get a modeling clay that can be hardened by baking in an oven. Usually, the package of such clays will provide you with detailed instructions related to the temperature and duration needed to bake the sculptures until they are completely hardened. 

    Some brands even create video tutorials of the procedure to make the process simple for you. The general rule is that the clay items should be baked at a lower temperature, and the drying time would depend on their thickness. Most sculptors agree that when in doubt, you should bake the items for a bit longer for them to harden fully. 

    Here are the detailed steps based on the basic instructions provided by modeling clay brands: 

    A. Preheat The Oven

    The first step is always to preheat the oven as per the baking instructions provided by a brand. In case you decide to combine clays from different brands, use a lower baking temperature out of the two instructed temperatures to prevent overbaking the sculptures. 

    B. Prepare The Baking Surface

    Based on the different methods we studied, most brands recommend using an aluminum foil-covered metal cookie sheet as the baking surface for modeling clay items. You may also try to use other materials like parchment paper, but make sure it doesn't have artificial colors as they may seep into your projects. 

    C. Provide Support To The Pieces

    Want some pieces to harden in an upright position? Use rolled-up pieces of aluminum foil to prop them up to prevent the pieces from toppling. Sculptors even prefer to use oven-safe glass and ceramic pieces as support for fragile items that may fail to remain upright. 

    D. Baking The Items

    This step is pretty simple, as all you need to do is put the pieces into the oven and wait for them to bake for the specified duration. Most brands recommend baking clay items for 15 minutes, but you may need to wait a couple of more minutes for thicker pieces. You can also choose to glaze or paint the pieces before baking. 

    Remember not to open the oven immediately after the baking time is over, and let the pieces cool down before checking on them. If you feel that the sculpture isn't fully hardened, re-bake it for 10 more minutes. 

    E. Dunk Pieces In Ice Water

    While going through the different methods used by polymer clay artists, we found that some prefer to dunk their pieces in ice water right out of the oven. They believe it helps prevent thermal shock and makes the pieces shinier. But, this step is completely optional, and you may skip it if you're a beginner. 

    For the process, sculptors usually take out the clay pieces as soon as the baking time is over. Then, they use a pair of tongs to place the pieces in a freshly prepared ice bath. The pieces should be completely submerged in water, and the bath should last for no more than 30 seconds. 

    Can You Bake Modeling Clay Frequently Asked Questions?

    Can you bake air-dry modeling clay?

    Even though air-dry clay isn't supposed to be hardened in the oven, some advanced sculptors still prefer to do it to reduce the drying time. However, the baking temperature should be less than 175°F to prevent the clay from overbaking. And make sure to leave the oven door open to let the moisture in the clay escape. 

    What’s the difference between sculpting clay and modeling clay?

    In strict terms, modeling clays aren't meant to be baked or hardened. On the other hand, sculpting clays are nothing but natural air-dry clays that harden when exposed to air. If you're looking forward to preserving your clay projects, try using beginner sculpting clay that can be suitable for everything from sculptures to pottery items.

    Can modeling clay melt in the oven?

    No, most modeling clays, including polymer clays, shouldn't melt in the oven, but the modeling clays of the plasticine variant may melt due to the oils present in them. So, before purchasing any modeling clay for permanent projects, ensure it's free from the plasticine compound. 

    Can You Bake Modeling Clay Final Words

    Can You Bake Modeling Clay  Final Words

    That's everything we have to tell you for now. We hope that all the details on how to harden modeling clay will help you create long-lasting craft pieces.  

    As you might have noticed, the best method to have non-pliable, hardened modeling clay items is to choose the right clay. So, spend time researching different types of clay to pick one that suits your crafting projects. 

    Until next time, take care, and goodbye! 

    Lacking space at home is a dilemma that most owners may face especially when there is simply no option of building an additional room and while others have attics to a use for storage, the use of under stairs have become a popular choice for the ones that do not. It is an ideal and ingenious way of utilizing the spare space under the stairs, not to mention a lovely addition inside a home. If the need arises for any additional storage at home and if the space under your stairs may be available than here are some clever and attractive under stair storage designs that you will surely find inspiring.

    Free Under Stair Storage

    1. Simple and classic cabinet design

    Under stair storage can be as simple as having compartments that can fit items to be stored. These compartments can be concealed by cabinet doors that fit the shape of the under stairs. Even with plain white paint these useful under stair storages can be just as lovely and useful as any customized cabinets.

    1. Simple and classic cabinet design

    Source

    2. Storing shoes and jackets in style

    Having immense drawers able to slide outwards and unravel an immense collection of jackets and shoes would be insanely practical, how do you see it ?

    2. Storing shoes and jackets in style

    Source

    3. Storage and reading nook for kids and adults

    Storage areas do not need to be boring or less attractive. This under stair storage design hits two birds with one stone- having an area that can be used for storage and a reading area inside the home. This idea is a great way of maximizing all the space while complementing the whole interior design of a home.

    3. Storage and reading nook for kids and adults

    Source

    4. Easier access to home cleaning equipment storage

    Not all homes have proper storage areas big enough to hold large cleaning equipment and materials. This under stair storage can hold big cleaning items inside a home and still have space for other cleaning items. The storage is also very discreet, making it perfect for people who do not want to let anyone else see where the cleaning items are.

    4. Easier access to home cleaning equipment storage

    5. Under stair storage rack for convenience and style

    Storage areas under stairs can go for drawers but having draw out racks can also be an option especially for people who want to have more than drawers and/or compartments for under stair storage, people that need this area as an open display to showcase various items. This is also a lovely change and a way to revamp for those who already have an under stair storage.

     

    5. Under stair storage rack for convenience and style

    Source

    6. Under stair cupboard for the rainy days

    The kitchen is not the only place where cupboards can be found, under stair storage is also a perfect place to store food and keep the stash for the rainy days in a safe and accessible place.

    6. Under stair cupboard for the rainy days

    Source

    7. Wine and beverage storage under the stairs

    Wine storage inside a home may not be always an option especially with restricted home space. Having this wine and beverage storage is genius and can be an amazing part of any home that guests will truly envy.

    7. Wine and beverage storage under the stairs

    Source

    8. Under stair storage for the fresh produce

    Under stair storages are mostly used for items that can be seasonal but it is also great for items that are used every day. With clean, white and mold free interior and spacious shelves, this can be the perfect storage for fresh produce and other dry foods used for everyday meals.

    8. Under stair storage for the fresh produce

    Source

    9. No drawer no problem

    Drawers are very common way of designing a storage, but it is not always the most practical option. Having just shelves can be a great alternative to having drawers. These shelves make use of all spaces and the woven baskets add as lovely and useful decoration for the under stair storage.

    9. No drawer no problem

    Source

    10. Personal locker for each member of the home

    This under stair storage design is perfect for people who want to organize personal items as much as possible. It gives enough space for each individual and can hold items that are used every day. A grab-and-go design that is perfect for a busy household.

    10. Personal locker for each member of the home

    Source

    11. Multi-purpose and clever under stair storage

    While drawers, shelves, and cabinets are common under stair storage, combining these three and adding more function to the under stair storage is just as lovely. This idea for under stair storage with TV rack gives more space for other furniture and also have space for other decorations at home. This is perfect for apartments or homes that have small living rooms.

    11. Multi-purpose and clever under stair storage

    12. Maximizing work and storage space

    There are homeowners who would want to have their own space as an office or work area. When space is limited, using the under stair space can be a wise and beautiful option. It adds aother functional area of a home and more storage area for important items. The idea is also stunning even with its limited space.

    12. Maximizing work and storage space

    Source

    13. Elegant under stair bookshelf for the bookworms

    Creating a library may not be possible for most homes and having bookshelves can take up space that can be used for other items or furniture inside a home. Using the under stair is a perfect use of spare space and have a mini library at home. The under stair bookshelf can be filled with more than enough books and magazines for any bookworms.

    13. Elegant under stair bookshelf for the bookworms

    Source

    14. Lovely display of memories and storage for knick knacks

    There are some decorations and little displays that define a home and give a personal touch. The under stair can be a perfect place to place these photos, personal knick knacks and decorations. Adding small drawers gives more room for storage of items that are needed inside the home.

    14. Lovely display of memories and storage for knick knacks

    15. Not-your-typical pet home

    Pet sleeping areas may also take some space. Though this is not a typical storage idea, this is unique and gives space to pets. It is a perfect way to keep pets tucked in while keeping the whole home in order.

    15. Not-your-typical pet home

    16. Simple pull out storage for fragile items

    Fragile items at home, such as plates and bowls, can easily be stored inside the under stair pull out storage. The storage is strong enough to hold fragile items and big enough to have space on multiple layers for numerous items. The setup also looks modern and can be a great addition inside a home.

    16. Simple pull out storage for fragile items

    Source

    17. Perfect shelf for a reading corner

    Most of the time, spaces under the stairs are not used or left empty and do not necessarily look appealing for the rest of the interior design. Creating shelves and storage or compartments under the stairs where books and other small items can be placed allows it to look more attractive. Add cozy chairs and the under stair storage becomes a perfect backdrop for a reading corner.

    17. Perfect shelf for a reading corner

    Source

    18. Open under stair compartments for seasonal items

    Having a place for seasonal items that can be accessed easily and in an organized manner can be done by having under stair storage. The compartments are big enough to hold items big and small. This type of storage also creates a discreet space where items can be pulled out anytime when needed or in season.

    18. Open under stair compartments for seasonal items

    Source

    While the simple designs may not be extraordinary solutions they are insanely useful and they will definitely make your everyday life easier. What do you think about them and how do you use the under stair storage ? We would love to hear from you !

    The forest is not just the usual definition of a large space of tree signifying the untamed beauty and power of nature. Because this sublime beauty of a forest holds the secrets of time and the evolution of beings that were there when no humans existed.

    But have that time really passed into oblivion or are the mysterious woods really that uninhabited? Or, are they actually doorways to the realm of unimaginable wonders?

    Artists have actively sought to capture this enigmatic forest aura in numerous art forms since time immemorial, but not a single depiction seems to have failed to amaze us. The developments of the digital art mediums have redefined the effects depicting the forest environment, opening up an enormous scope for stunning new designs!

    And if you’re looking to create just the thing, then your search ends here! Because we have brought you a list of 51 breathtaking ideas for the enigmatic forest concepts for your art!

    So sit back and go through what we have to tell you about them all!

    Forest Concept Art

    1. The Forest of Tree-dwellers

    The concept of houses made in the trees is usually a pretty fun thing to think about, probably connecting us to our childhood memories. However, over here the idea is to create a forest that is entirely consisted of cottages built on trees. The structures look like a bit inspired by the Japanese art style. The digital work lays the foundation of an unusual rural setting beautifully with the world of the rest of the forest inhabitants.

    Image via artstation.com

    1. Of the Mythical Beings

    The mystical forest of the untamed forces manifests to those who feel their presence with the deepest emotions of love and reverence for their abode. The forest draws you in and makes you a part of itself revealing its wonders to you. The feeling is probably that of fear initially which gives way to an awe-inspiring, yet at the same time, a humbling experience. To depict this takes for one to play with varying depths of colors and incredible layout pattern.

    Image via Tumblr

    1. Forest Lights

    To depict the enchanting lights in a darker sylvan environment, a scheme of darker colors should be allowed to unfold naturally on a layout that accentuates the levels of saturation showing the variations for these tones. Once you’ve created the layout, etching out the positioning, the figures are going to be fairly easy. The formation of lights will take a bit of patience and experimentation with positions and proportions.

    Image via Pinterest

    1. Tunnel-vision of the green

    A forest done in absolute green tones could stand for many things- the good, the beautiful or dangerous elements. A streamlined vision of the path winding through such a place could evoke the most profound sense of mystery if done using just the correctly balanced-out color palette. Complimentary earthy tones will emphasize the natural hues of the forest making an incredible overall visual impact. The order for light-to-dark tones will depend on the symmetrical positioning of the spaces in the scene.

    Image via Pinterest

    1. Snow-toned

    A snowy forest with medieval elements could be a tad bit tricky to manage than most natural scapes. The colors to balance out the natural white tones can be tough but with little understanding of the cool and neutral-toned palette is going to help you immensely in creating the snowy forest. Natural depths of gray and blues contrasted with the warmth of the morning colors(since it isn’t night) is just what you need in the right proportions to fill up the many layers of this particular scene.

    Image via artstation

    1. The sun-filtered forest

    The effects of sunlight filtering through the dense foliage and dropping to the forest-floor in strands of brilliantly green gold can absolutely hypnotize the eye and captivate the heart. The play of stunning greens and gold tones set against a more darker, and somewhat “haunting” setup of ominous looking forest realm will bring about the kind of balance that the world would rarely have witnessed. This balance is the true magic line that divides the spheres of mystique and drab reality.

    Image via creativeuncut

    1. Earth and warm-toned primal forest

    The earthy colors to paint an old and primitive forest require a well-studied and thought-out approach with the overall design and layout. The fundamental structure of the forest will provide you with an idea of the saturation levels of the colors. This decides the effect that the darker and the lighter tones will create. The setting depends entirely on what order you follow with the varying color intensities. The positioning of the trees will give a decisive touch to the element of mystery in such a setting.

    Image via blogspot

    1. Watercolor effects to draw a forest mystical

    One of the most attractive creations in the department of enigmatic forest creations is that of the watercolor effect that you could easily achieve using the digital art medium. The effects that the blend of such colors will provide can give you all the scopes of developing further on the theme of enigma and mystery to accentuate the visual impact of the scene. The elements of magic in this image will depend significantly on the proportions of the object depicted. That is what is going to tell the story.

    Image deviantart

    1. An unusual forest village

    The secret village of mysterious beings in an equally enigmatic forest setting that can be one of the most stunning ideas for cryptic forest concept art. The mystery of the inhabitants further intensifies with the effect of the green, swampy setting that is lighted up with this beautiful colony that looks not of this world. The brilliance of the layout is coded in the color scheme and an idea that follows the division of the realms of the humans from that of those who aren’t.

    Image via Facebook

    1. The secret forest temple

    The legend of the secret temple hidden deep within the recesses of the primitive forest evokes the kind of primal sense of fear mixed with a sublime feeling of absolute awe in the wake of the magnanimity of the structures and the history of the beings that constructed it. The human amidst this is a foreigner, but they will respect his feelings, expecting the same for him. The forest is not his territory and to portray this in art will take more than just the dead-set rules and expected plan of action.

    Image via conceptartworld

    1. The Darker Forest Ground

    The darker parts of the jungle would no doubt pose a challenge for the artist. The color scheme for these areas should be panned out on the kind of layout that allows you to coordinate them with the natural tone of the jungle. The immediate requirement to create such a design is a technique of comparing the levels of saturation and contrast between the naturally darker tones of the forest. The cohesive element for the structure is contained within the calculated dimensions of the layout itself.

    Image via concepartworld

    1. The Futuristic Forest World

    Next up we have an image that immediately strikes us being pretty futuristic-almost like a prediction of how our familiar world will change in the upcoming times. This kind of a forest setting almost displays the intrusion of something foreign into the area of something that used to be uninhibited, wild and raw in essence. The proliferating alien colonies in the forest look breathtakingly beautiful and yet at the same time present a viciously fearful setting that might just spell doom for the rest of the human race.

    Image via 3dtotal

    1. Blue Horizon

    The experimentation with the calmest hue in the color spectrum for creating the mysterious forest concept could give you simply spectacular results. If you’re trying to define a multilevel forest structure that also demarcates a border between the entrance or familiar grounds of the forest and a deeper level that marks the beginning of a more mysterious realm, this kind of a blue color scheme that mixes seamlessly with every tone of gree, could work wonders for your  creation.

    Image via deviantart

    1. The solitary forest waterfall

    The lonely waterfall in the dark recesses of the forest stands to be enigmatic is its sheer origin. It could be the visiting grounds for god knows what kind of creature, but at the same time it looks hauntingly beautiful is whichever way you want to look at it.  The structure and the proportions of the overall design are almost set ablaze with the beauty of the tiniest ray of glimmering daylight that is sparked off the water intensifying the mysterious aura of the setting even more.

    Image via Tumblr

    1. The mutant forest

    The setting for the otherworldly mutant forest setting almost reminds you of something straight out of a Lovecraft or Stephen King book. Trees like no normal forest trees rooting around huge glowing orbs monstrously can draw the unsuspecting wandering in, closing off the exits to this perpetual maze, ending all hopes for the human figure all at once. This eldritch setting could be depicted fantastically well if you laid out a calculated pattern for the overall structure. As long as you get the pattern right, the color scheme is not going to pose much of a problem.

    Image via inprnt.com

    1. The Secret of The Snowy Forest

    Although we have previously discussed the techniques which you could use to get a snowy forest, this one could be a challenge to the artist, owing to the textural variations. The image is undoubtedly created on a digital platform but the textures achieved are those of acrylics and oil paints. This could be easily achieved with the modulation and manipulation of the textural settings on whatever software you’re using.This balance between the cool and warmer tones accentuating the darker tones and impressionistic touches for the scene is the key factor creating this visual enigma.

    Image via blogspot

    1. The Ultimate Gothic Forest Setting

    The Gothic forest is probably the most beautiful and stunningly spectacular setting when it comes to enigmatic concept art for forests. If you have the just the perfect play of colors going on with the natural dark forest tones, then this is a concept you can seldom go wrong with. The gigantic figure of the weeping angel that you do see in the image is the focal point on the picture with the ultimate enigma being the presence of the burning lantern in her hand regarding the origin of it.

    Who lights it every day in the forest? What does the relic signify? All of the lives of the inhabitants of this forest seem to be going around it, and it almost seems like a protective figure to them for that reason.

    Image via Pinterest

    1. The Hermit’s Cottage

    The solitary cottage in the dark depths of the forest is one of the widely popular themes for the enigmatic forest setting. The literal sense of fear that it might evoke on the mind is the feeling that this image seems to stand for. The color scheme is evidently all dark for this one, the real deal with this is the kind of layout you have to decide on for the environment surrounding the structure. If it is placed towards the mouth of the forest, it’s not gonna be that impactful. To signify the dark recesses of the forest to signify the location will require a more controlled way of depicting the colors, for instance, the forest mists and the green glow of the creek.

    Image via deviantart

    1. The fun treehouse in the woods

    We have already discussed one of the enigmatic concepts regarding treehouses earlier. This is a more relaxed and a more traditional depiction of our familiar treehouse. This one actually carries a fun tone and is not that serious in the kind of visual impact it creates. This is why it gives you a certain degree of freedom when it comes to playing with the colors than the rigidity found in traditional layouts and schemes. The residence of the unknown inhabitant of this forest is surrounded by an almost “fairy-tale”-ish aura that makes a wonderful overall visage.

    Image via jeromino

    1. The Forest Nymph

    The Nymph of the sylvan world is an incredibly beautiful figure that holds her reign over numerous legends, stories, and lores. The forest of this spirit-figure is as her beautiful as she is. Although there can be a wide range of interpretation regarding the nature of the figure, this kind of an image creates a mystery that further deepens with an equally enigmatic silhouette of the “seeker” going towards the nymph. The color is kept in a surreal texture that easily mesmerizes the eye, and the entire scope is warped a bit inwards to accentuate the “zen”-like feeling evoked by the setting.

    Image via Tumblr

    1. The mystical fireflies

    The depiction of the fireflies in the forest is the traditional depiction of a mysterious setting that is depicted in an endless number of fanarts. The play of colors can be kept to just the very basic that won’t require much experimentation on your part if you want to keep it simple. However, placing the dots to create the fireflies could be something that you have to be aware of, especially at places you want to throw in a bit of sun-rays for that matter. The saturation of the dot colors should stand out boldly against your forest setting, accentuating the enigmatic leading pathways inside the forest.

    Image via conceptartworld

    1. Depicting forest animals

    The animals of the forest could be a challenge as it requires for you to portray both the essential beauty and spirit of the forest as well as the vital energy of the life forms that inhabit this beautiful realm. The proportions and dimensions of such a forest scape should no doubt be a sprawling one that sustains the life forms and majestically displays them in their natural situations to the human eye. The structural cohesion and integrity will require for you to invest the major part of your focus to details of the overall form and design.

    Image via conceptartworld

    1. The grandeur of the forest temple

    The image of the lost temple in the forest that could be viewed from atop a hill or a plateau is a famous concept for enigmatic forest art. This structure that seems to belong to the Mayans or the Incas is depicted as being situated near a huge waterfall deep into the jungle. The tribal designs and patterns for the jungle are of the utmost importance when etching out such a design. The epic design and the grandeur of the whole scene will depend on how well you position the different structures and the pathways to the temple through the forest as well as the overall view of it.

    Image via blogspot

    1. The cabin in the snowy woods

    The image of the lonely cabin in a clearing surrounded by deep, lush forest areas in a winter setting evokes an incredibly serene and calm feeling. The mountain range coupled with the snowy white visage on a lonely knight stirs up a deep sense of romantic mysticism in the heart. But, the only element of utter shock in the entire picture is the splintering of the ice grounds on which it stands without no visible boundary separating it from the waterbody.

    The uncomplicated color pattern for this could be brought about beautifully, especially using digital software which can give you any sort of texture for portraying the beauty of the setting.

    Image via behance

    1. Surrealistic magnificence

    The utter beauty of the surrealistic forest setting captivates the eye in a way that no other art form can. The vivid colors contrasting the glowing effects can pan out stunningly, given that you grasp the requirements of the overall layout which may be tricky to understand, especially because of the mystical, otherworldly figures you’re supposed to represent. This mysterious forest is unlike any other and has an unstoppable brilliance that pervades into the sensual realm of whoever beholds the scene.

    Image via tumblr

    1. The Glowing Forest Waterworks!

    The depiction of lively, cheerful, brooks and creeks cascading through the upturns and features of the forest and merging into great fall, can make anyone give up on the drab human existence in the city and become a prisoner of its beauty for the rest of their lives. The depiction of this setting of marvelous beauty, complemented by jutting, imposing features, going up to the sky, showcase a unique balance between the elements of nature. The only thing about this one is the positioning of these features and the control that you have to exercise to depict the waterways.

    Image via deviantart

    1. The Silhouettes of The Forest

    This image is one of the simplest one to recreate or develop upon. Unlike the intricate layers of textures that generally go on to create an elaborate forest setting, this kind of a layout is going to give all the scope etching out a brilliant image for an enigmatic forest image. The simple dark layers forming the silhouettes are accentuated by the vivid red veins that mark the tree branches pooling out into a glaring forest pathway that guides the curious wanderer deeper into its realm. The entire thing is set against a beautiful tone of green background that intensifies the riddle for us.

    Image via Tumblr

    28.The forest of the Titans

    This is a unique concept of the forest that can evoke raw feelings of fear and awe in equal measures when transcribed in visual art. The titanic, earthbound, frighteningly humanoid relic structure with their palms outstretched and glimmering in a single strand of sun ray and set against a colossal cascade is something that creates a haunting the atmosphere for every human eye.

    You may only think that the only beings that can fearlessly tread this ground are the mysteriously glowing figures of the mystical beings, but there might be so much more for the mind to explore. The challenge lies in sketching the intricate pathways that connect the almost tipping boulders that form this realm.

    Image via kotaku

    1. The Impressionistic Touch

    The great thing about digital art media is the numerous kinds of textures that one could create when it comes to depicting natural scapes. The variations in the colors and tone that you could achieve from the default slots as well as customize upon is literally endless in this. What we have over here is an impressionist rendition of a beautiful forest area depicting spring colors in full bloom. The touches for creating the texture specifically create an intense, romantic feeling that tugs at your imagination and makes you want to be the lonely wandering figure inching towards their idealistic quest.

    Image via instagram

    1. The Forest of the Wendigo

    Well, whether the Wendigo is just an urban legend that keeps campers from sleeping, we cannot tell, neither can we say that the lonely traveler has ever had the ill-fate of coming across one. But what we can say is that the awesome concept of this monster figure can create a spectacularly haunting forest atmosphere. The key factor to set the scene is the subtle depiction of the monster figure-only the silhouette-coming out of the dark forest at night to meet the lonely camper. It is taller than the trees.

    The only popping visual in this entire setting is the vividly colored tent and the silhouette of the camper inside, ignorant of his fate. This play of silhouettes is what sets the story for the sequence and the setting.

    Image via vk

    1. Down the Forest River

    The forest river is a fantastic concept for depicting the real mysterious realm of the forest. The green aura of the atmosphere reveals a rare tone of the color when it hits the light, reflecting back off the surface of the water. And this is exactly what you have to reveal when you go for the concept. The character that is sailing down the river is the cohesive element for all of the elements of the scene to come together in unison, irking the curiosity of the viewer. The statistics for the layout is extremely essential to create this kind of an image.

    Image via blogspot

    1. Arthur's Eden

    King Arthur’s destiny was set in the stone from which he had pulled out the Excalibur. But the concept of the riddling circumstances amidst which he became the ultimate Knight figure has been repeatedly projected in art since the birth of the legend itself, portrayed in a million different styles, toggling between traditional and digital art forms. The enigmatic forest setting with the Sword in the Stone, waiting silently for its claimant is an exceptionally charged emotional visage for an enchanting forest concept.

    Image via visualart

    1. Classic digital forest lights

    There are numerous stunning ways to depict forest lights and mystical forest realms using the digital art media. The layouts for creating such spectacular designs are fairly uncomplicated. The only thing that is required is a deft hand at layering up and controlling the saturation levels of the colors.

    The scene can be given a surrealistic touch by changing the dimensions and proportions of the setting, which could include warping, manipulating the structure and modulating the tonal variations. The silhouettes of characters provide a depth to the scene, intensifying the mystery of the setting.

    Image via instagram

    1. Forest Joojoos

    As had been discussed earlier, the depiction of mythical characters and figures require an understanding of the kind of aura that you are aiming to create in relation to the nature of the beings you want to create. Rather than looking like vicious creatures emerging from the dark, “joojoos” can look pretty adorable and in all possibilities, can turn out to be the “good guys” if you obeyed the rules of their forest realm.

    Image via blogspot

    1. Acrylic strokes on digital media

    Acrylic strokes or oil-paints effects are one of the coolest effects to work with when you want to etch out nature sketch in the digital medium. This provides a free play of all kinds of brush strokes available by default in the software, or you can customize your own strokes for that matter. It also provides an excellent scope for experimentation with natural colors bends for trees or foliage in general. The mix of color attained by this medium is truly remarkable.

    Image via deviantart

    1. The kingdom of the forest spirits

    To portray an entire kingdom and civilization of the unnamed beings of the forests takes for one to decode the complexity of the structural layout. The grandeur achieved in the style, form and the overall structure of each of the elements in the scene can only be replicated when the artist can exercise complete control over the handling of the cohesive factors while depicting such an epic concept in color. The only simple factor in the entire concept is probably the color scheme, but that too needs to be manipulated according to the requirements of the tone and atmosphere of the setting.

    Image via artstation

    1. The Enchanted Forest!

    The mystical environment of the enchanted forest lit up with the floating, glowing orbs and specks creates an absolutely hypnotic environment for the human eye and soul. The mystery of the entire setting deepens when the question regarding the nature of the tiny “winged-beings” who can be glimpsed through the dark foliage is questioned. The magnificence of this setting is expressed with carved monoliths with beautiful haunting designs and the presence of the unaware human forms on the horizon of the boundaries.

    The depiction of the entire setting runs on an extremely intricate layout devised on meticulous calculations of the tiniest details. This could the most spectacular challenge for any artist.

    Image deviantart

    1. Where the elemental force abounds

    To etch out the true spirit of a realm that is controlled entirely by the raw, elemental forces staying in mutual harmony with the mortal beasts of the place is the highest form of art. One has to understand the fact that it isn’t just the depiction of the animals, trees, rocks or the immediately comprehensible facets of the setting that holds the central place. What essentially matters in such a setting is the vital balance of the auras belonging to both the worldly and the otherworldly elements residing in the forest, that is reflected in the astonishing, powerful visual impact created by the image.

    Image via Pinterest

    1. The Revolt of the Monstrous Roots

    The theme of the evil or monstrous trees is an incredibly popular theme that is depicted in literature and art of all forms alike that include both textual and visual representations found in books, movies, and stills. The mysterious forest path going through the glowing, slimy green trunks of gigantic trees creates an aura of suspense and doom. The portrayal of the human figures has been made to look tiny, being drawn in by sheer curiosity to this vicious form, which seals the fate for them and sets the tone of story for us.

    Image via tumblr

    1. The heart of the forest

    The fascinating thing about portraying the structure of trees in any kind of art medium (be it traditional or digital) is that you could give it your own interpretations expressed through all kinds of forms and designs. What we have here is an epic structure of trees in the forest that looks like a gateway to a different world against an electrifying shade of neon light blue. This natural portal beckons the protagonist of the story deep into the mystical world of heavens know what residing on the other side to it.

    Image via designm

    1. The Forest Cove

    Following the unusual fairy lights through the deep recesses of the mystical woods, the solitary wanderer finds a gigantic cove exuding a shocking blue glow that is reflected off the turquoise waterway in the forest. The setting is eerily beautiful even with the ominous sense of foreboding in the human mind regarding the nature of whatever lies in the cove. This perfect balance of dynamically powerful feelings that are evoked upon witnessing such a scene spells the level of grandeur of the concept itself.

    Image via Tumblr

    1. Lively Greens!

    A forest done in resplendent, radiant shades of green provide the artist with two main benefits- first, the scope to experiment enormously with the natural colors and textures of the wood; and second, the ease to confidently set the aura of the atmosphere as they work on it. To accentuate the mysticism of such a structure, the artist can play with proportions by adding the element of mysterious creatures and the draw out a layout of immense dimensional difference between the figures and the forest.

    Image via pgntree

    1. Setting the position of the view

    Positioning the view for the onlooker's eye is unquestionably the most significant aspect of any art piece, especially for a visual still in both traditional and digital forms. The present image of a lotus fall cascading through a forest opens up the view from a lower angle in the foreground that focuses on the effect of the texture of water and the elements in it, rather than the epic fall in the background itself, that is placed in relation to what we immediately see when we see the image.

    Image via Pinterest

    1. Playing with single colors and monochromatic textures

    The experimentations with single colors for a natural scape fundamentally requires for the artist to be extremely well-read and skilled in playing with textures as well as the saturation and opacity of the chosen color. The portion done in a brilliantly or shockingly bright color looks twice a much beautiful against a black and white setting than a piece that consists of several things going on with bright lights.

    To add a sense of awe, over here the gold color has been used to depict the human and the supernatural figure going at it. The visual drama is created with proficient handling of controlling the levels of saturation of the colors.

    Image via twitter

    1. The theme of the relic in the forest

    A popular style of depicting a riddling setting of a forest or solitary mountain range is adding the element of a seemingly strange structure-a relic that apparently hints at the presence of a similarly unknown civilization that had lived in the past or may still be dwelling in the recesses of this realm. The requirement for portraying this well lies in the positioning of the relic in the forest and the positioning of the view that will emphasize the aura of this enigma for the viewer.

    Image via Pinterest

    1. The roof of the hut in the forest

    This present image somewhat adds a contemporary touch to it, in the sense that it is almost photographic and interprets the significant portion of the theme through just a slice of personal space, like that of a small part of the interior of a forest-dweller’s home. The immediate effect and question created are about the origin and ownership of this place. Who lives here? The atmosphere of suspense intensifies with the depiction of a lush, untamed growth of forest foliage on the bamboo roof of this makeshift place.

    Image via Pinterest

    1. Guardian of the Forest

    The figure of the ultimate guardian spirit of the forest is one that demands the portrayal of all other elements of the image to be in a perfectly cohesive structure around it. It’s almost like a build-up where each of the elements of the forest is created in a way that anticipates a final mega and ultimate expression in the figure of the guardian spirit. This can be a breathtaking forest visage concept that works entirely and solely on the factor of extreme control exercised while creating the overall setting.

    Image via heartit

    1. Miyazaki’s Forest!

    For those acquainted with the brilliance Hayao Miyazaki’s and Studio Ghibli’s creations have probably tried to depict Princess Mononoke’s realm and put Totoro and No-Face from “Spirited Away” in it! But nevertheless, this is one concept that stands to be one of the greatest forms of inspiration for creating the forest realm of riddles since its creation. But the icing on the cake for this one? Of course, the adorable figures of the forest spirit beckoning you towards their home!   

    Image via Pinterest

    1. The Ethereal Glow of the Sublime Forest Realm

    Portraying the true forest atmosphere is indeed one of the daunting tasks when it comes to the enigmatic forest concept art factor. Apart from the importance of moderating the textures of the scene in the appropriate levels, the tonal changes and variations of the colors should be in accordance with the emotions that you’re trying to depict. The solitary human figure stands for the myriad emotions that anyone would feel on witnessing the utter magnificence of such a place.

    Image via Pinterest

    1. The doorway in the forest

    The portal to a world beyond that which you know reveals itself to those who can feel the power of the forest entirely with their own power of true emotions. The lonely wanderer or the forest dweller might catch a glimpse of the residents of that other world and the sparkling glory of their visage from a distance, but they know that that is sacred ground and obeys the rules of the forest. The depiction seems to express the harmonious existence of these two worlds and the mutual respect that their residents have for each other.

    Image via Pinterest

    1. In unconventional colors

    An enigmatic forest setting can be depicted in a spectacular way using unique colors and textures. The variations of the colors and the balance that is achieved between the play of colors and textural cohesion owing to the manipulation of the saturation of hues in the different layers is the fundamental aspect of the image that the artist should focus on. The mythical feature of the centaur glimpsed poised on in the setting evokes a haunting sense of mystery and the yearning towards getting acquainted with that sort of preternatural beauty.

    Image via Tumblr

    Conclusion

    So that was what we think are some of the most stunning ideas for a mysterious forest art concept. We did try to decode the techniques for you to learn up on them more. We hope you liked our efforts.

    Till next time!  

    53 Best Medibang & FireAlpaca Brushes & Textures For Digital Artists

    25 Best Free GIMP Brushes for Drawing & Painting Digitally

    20 Free FireAlpaca Brushes for Digital Painting & Drawing

    21 Best Manga Studio & Clip Studio Paint Brushes [Free Download]

    Best Free Aseprite Tutorials For Pixel Artists & Game Designers

    21 Best Paint Tool SAI Brushes and Textures 

    Speed Paintings 101 |What It Is, Tips, Tricks, Tools & Video Tutorials

    54 Best Photoshop Brushes | Best Drawing & Painting Brush Packs

    80 Best Procreate Brushes for the Realm [Free & Premium Brush Sets]

    14 Amazing Free Krita Brushes and Brush Packs for Digital Art

    11 Best Color Theory Books for Artists Everywhere

    13 Websites With Copyright and Royalty Free Art to Consider

    Types of Digital Art Right Now Explained

    25 Best Concept Art Books for Artists Everywhere

    8 Best Cartooning Books For Artists Today

    5 Types of Concept Art to Consider Today

    10 Epic Tips & Tricks for Concept Art Portfolios Today

    67 Surreal Castle Concept Art Depictions to Surge Inspiration From

    16 Best Pixel Art Programs and Software | All OS

    77 Epic Knight Concept Art To Inspire You

    You can run a portable air conditioner continuously for as long as you need but is recommended to keep some limitations in mind so that you can avoid issues with the unit.

    Let’s face it - using an air conditioner has become a necessity these days, given the prevailing weather conditions.

    However, setting up a conventional AC unit can be a cumbersome task. Because of that, people are switching to portable air conditioners nowadays, which offer great cooling minus the hassle of traditional ACs.

    That said, these machines are not as heavy-duty as normal ACs, which is a trade-off for their portability. So, that automatically brings the question - how long can you run your portable AC continuously without encountering any issues? Well, let’s find out!

    Understanding A Portable Air Conditioner

    Understanding A Portable Air Conditioner

    In case you are not very well-versed in air conditioning systems, allow me to give you a brief idea about what a portable AC unit is. Here, I will also discuss what makes it different from a regular mini-split or window unit. Thus, I would strongly suggest reading through this section, for it will help you understand the subsequent discussions better.

    Portable AC units are functionally similar to conventional mini-split or window ACs. They are used to improve indoor air quality by regulating room temperature and humidity levels. But as the name suggests, these air conditioning units are portable, meaning that they can be easily moved around the house. You can’t do the same with conventional mini-split or window units since they are fixed to one place.

    Most portable units have a compact design, and they are placed on the floor. This is unlike window or mini-split ACs, which are typically mounted on windows or walls, respectively. On that note, most of these models are battery-powered, which further contributes to their portability. However, you can find plug-in models as well, which need to be connected to a wall outlet.

    How Long Can You Keep Your Portable Air Conditioner Running Continuously?

    To answer this question simply - there is no fixed time limit for continuously running your portable AC. You can keep your portable AC running for as long as you wish without any serious consequences. So, this information should come as a huge relief for those who prefer to use their ACs throughout the day.

    This is mainly possible because modern portable ACs come with certain design elements that allow continuous operations for extended durations. One of these elements is the automatic cut-off system that is built into many portable ACs today.

    Such a mechanism turns off the heat pumps and condensers automatically when the desired temperature and humidity level have been achieved. Therefore, there is no risk of any immediate technical issues like overheating or fire if the unit is used continuously. Apart from that, the components are made from durable and high-quality materials that can withstand the strains of continuous usage.

    However, this does not mean that you should always use your portable AC in such a manner. There are some limitations to continuous usage that need to be considered here. Because of them, it is a good idea to give your AC a break from time to time. I have discussed these limitations briefly below, so read on if you want to know what they are.

    1. Wear And Tear

    Regardless of how well-built it is, your portable AC is a machine, after all. And just like any other machine, it is subject to regular wear and tear. If you use it continuously for extended periods, the power inverter, compressor, and other similar internal components will inevitably wear out. That, in turn, will reduce the lifespan of your machine.

    2. Energy Usage

    Just like any other electrical home appliance, your portable AC requires electricity to function. So, the more you use it, the higher your energy consumption will be. As a result, your monthly energy bills will shoot up drastically.

    Here, it doesn’t matter if you have a battery-powered unit or a plug-in model. A battery-powered unit (like the Zero Breeze Mark II) needs to be recharged once it runs out of juice. If you use it continuously, you’ll need to recharge it more often, which will indirectly consume more electricity. And as for a plug-in model, it uses energy directly from your main supply.

    3. Maintenance

    This is another reason why you should not use your portable air conditioner continuously. A portable AC unit consists of several parts that need to be regularly maintained. These include the air filter, drainage hose, and the unit’s condensate tank, among others.

    The air filters remove the dust particles so that you can get clean air. If you use your AC continuously, the dust will keep accumulating on the filters, eventually blocking it.

    Likewise, air conditioners produce water via the process of condensation, which cools and dehumidifies the air inside a room. This water is temporarily stored in the condensate tank, which is located below the unit in most cases. The drain hose is attached to this tank, and it helps to clear out the condensate water.

    Warning

    If you use your AC continuously, the inner walls of these components will always remain dank and cold, which will promote the growth of mold and mildew. These growths will eventually clog the system, which will lead to operational issues.

    Tips For Using Your Portable Air Conditioner

    Based on the above discussion, I would recommend that you give your portable AC a break of at least a few hours every day. Of course, that might not always be possible, especially if you live in an area with an unfavorable climate. In that situation, you will have no other choice than to use it continuously for long durations.

    That is why I have mentioned some tips for using portable AC units. If you follow them, you can ensure that the unit performs optimally, even after extensive use.

    1. Use Energy-Efficient Models

    This is the most important tip that will help you reduce your energy bills. There are many energy-efficient portable ACs available today that have excellent SEER ratings. If you purchase these models, your energy usage will remain in check, even if you run the unit continuously.

    With that being said, the initial cost of purchasing these models will naturally be higher. But considering the energy you will save every month, I’d say that this extra cost is quite justified. In any case, you will be able to make up for this higher purchase cost with the money saved on your monthly energy bills.

    2. Set A Periodic Maintenance Schedule

    If you want your AC unit to last for a long time, you cannot ignore its maintenance and upkeep routine. With that in mind, I suggest that you perform full maintenance of your AC at least once a month.

    During the maintenance, make sure to scrub the hose and water tank and clean the dust off your air filter. In this regard, if you have a self-draining unit, you will have an easier time with its maintenance. Apart from that, I suggest keeping a duster handy, which will allow you to wipe the surface of your unit even when it’s running.

    3. Keep The Windows And Doors Closed

    When your portable AC is running, make sure to keep all the doors and windows of the room tightly shut. That way, you can prevent the outside air from entering your room and interfering with the AC’s cooling or heating process.

    4. Place The AC Unit Strategically

    If you place the AC strategically in your room, you will be able to improve its cooling or heating efficiency drastically. For instance, placing your AC near the door or window will help with ventilation. This is applicable even when they are closed since there are small gaps present in them that help to ventilate the air.

    Besides, placing your AC near a window or door will make drainage easier. Also, I advise keeping your AC unit away from sunlight since that can cause it to overheat.

    5. Turn Off The AC When You Leave The House

    This is a pretty basic tip that you should follow for all electrical appliances. There is no point in keeping the unit running in an empty house since all it will do is increase your energy bills. So, if you are planning to go out for a few hours, you should turn your AC off before leaving.

    How Long Can You Run A Portable Air Conditioner Continuously

    Final Words

    HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning) systems like portable ACs can greatly improve the air quality of your living space, regardless of the outside conditions.

    If you live in hot and humid areas, it pumps cool air into the room and keeps the air dry. Conversely, for those living in colder areas, a portable AC can raise the room temperature by circulating warm air.

    That is why many people prefer to run their portable AC units continuously. But as you can see from the above discussion, I do not advise doing that until absolutely necessary. And even if you have to do that, you should keep my tips in mind to avoid issues.

    Anyway, that brings me to the end of this guide. I will be back with more guides in the future, so keep an eye on this space.

    Until then, goodbye!

    As a painter, you have a huge plethora of mediums to paint on for all your artistic endeavors. Many artists have even used unconventional methods like sand and plastic to show off their craft.

    But that’s not what we are going to talk about in this article. Today, we are going to talk about the good ol’ art medium that has been used by thousands of professional artists around the globe and throughout the history of mankind - oil paint.

    From Da Vinci to Magritte and from professional studio artists to outdoor street artists, many creators have chosen this medium as the vessel to portray their creativity.

    And in this article, we are going to discuss why. So, go ahead and give it a read!

    How is Oil Painting Different From Other Mediums

    Objective Reasons

    The following are some features of oil paint that set it apart from other conventional mediums like watercolor and acrylics.

    These features give immense control, freedom, and versatility that stay unrivaled to this day.

    Gorgeous appearance

    Oil paints have a higher pigment count than most other mediums. Because of that, oil paint produces rich and luminous colors that produce amazingly vibrant paintings.

    The artworks made with oil paint have unparalleled beauty, elegance, and life-like resemblance only because the medium gives immense freedom when it comes to saturation and contrast.

    Gradual drying process

    Oil paints dry up significantly slower than any other medium. Many artists consider this as a serious downside even though you can cut down a substantial part of the process if you take some simple measures.

    Anyhow, there are some notable advantages of the slow drying.

    For one, it gives you incredible control over the process. Since you paint in layers with oil colors, you can choose when to apply the next layer depending upon the kind of mix you want.

    Another benefit shows when you commit an error. Because of the time the paint takes to dry up, you can easily scrape off the paint from the area of mistake and redo it again.

    Blending

    The kind of amazing blends you can get with oil paint is simply not possible with any other conventional medium.

    The brush strokes come out perfect with the least amount of effort and the colors mix evenly and seamlessly.

    Because of the excellent blends, oil paint can achieve life-like lighting and texture that is simply not possible with anything else.

    Great flexibility with Medium

    Oil paint can be mixed with many kinds of solvents and mediums which help it to achieve unparalleled versatility.

    You can control every feature of oil paint using some sort of a medium. Crucial factors like texture, saturation, drying-time, flow, blending, etc. can all be manipulated using mediums.

    Even other painting mediums like acrylic can be used alongside oil paint seamlessly to get some interesting results.

    No other medium like watercolors and acrylic can achieve this level of control like oil paints.

    oil painting artist selling art

    No need for framing

    Oil paint artworks are good to go right after finishing. If you use a stretched canvas with a wooden frame, you wouldn’t even need a frame to hang it up.

    Oil paint by nature is very durable and corrosion-resistant after drying up. Dust, light, and water can’t put any kind of blemish on paintings done with oil paints.

    The durability that oil paint has is astounding and that is why most of the classical paintings which seem to immortal have been made using oil paints.

    What benefits do you get from oil painting?

    Till this point, we have discussed that oil paint is better than other mediums of painting. But now, we are going to talk about how Oil Painting can help you grow as a person and can make you happy.

    Creative outlet

    Painting has always been an amazing vessel to store your creativity in. Almost everyone agrees that painting is one of the most, if not the most, incredible ways to give structure to your creative mind.

    But when it comes to oil painting, things are a little different. On average, the artist has to wait for significantly more time to finish the painting. This causes the artist to practice something that we could refer to as “structured creativity”, i.e., creative splurges in a controlled and thoughtful manner.

    This is an important exercise, especially, if you plan on to use your creative side more for professional purposes.

    Concentration

    As we have already mentioned before, oil painting is a time-taking process. And in that kind of an intense creative process, you’ll have to be focused.

    Hence, oil painting is an amazing way of improving your concentration. Even if you are not a professional, you should try oil painting just because of how good it is at improving concentration, while still being an overall enjoyable activity.

    Problem-solving

    When you try to design some artwork of oil paint, you’ll not only have to decide what you want to paint but also decide how to paint it.

    Oil painting is required to be done in layers and these layers have to be planned very carefully to make a compelling piece of art.

    Hence, there’s a hint of problem-solving in this art form that is unique and needs thoughtfulness and patience. Painting with oil colors is, therefore, an interesting problem-solving practice to say the least.

    Not only that, when you make any mistake, you’ll also have to carefully plan how to correct it. How’s that for problem-solving?

    Self-Confidence

    Painting is a work of patience, skill, and wit. Every stroke of the brush, when done correctly, ushers a small wave of confidence in your heart.

    And after hundreds and thousands of such methodical brushstrokes, when you finally finish a work of art, you get a sense of accomplishment that can barely be matched by any other similar hobby.

    Painting with oil colors demands you to spend time with your artwork. Even if you want to rush through it, you can’t. You have to live with it for hours, days, months and even years if you are dedicated to it.

    So, it skyrockets your confidence when you finally make something beautiful with your perseverance.

    Conclusion

    So that’ll be all for this article.

    In this article, we briefly discussed all the various things that make oil painting amazing, as both an artistic medium and as a hobby.

    We hope that this piece was meaningful to you and helped answer your concerns.

    With that, we wish you well and thank you for reading!

    10 Best Canvases for Oil Painting | Beginner & Artist Grades Reviewed

    8 Best Oil Paint Brushes of 2022 Reviewed

    11 Best Oil Paints for Beginners & Professionals Artists Alike

    Learn What is the Best Surface for Oil Painting Right Now

    How Long It Will Take Oil Paint To Dry  & How to Speed It Up

    Oil Painting for Beginners Basics & How to Use Oil Paints

    Learn How To Dry Oil Paint Faster Overnight

    12 Oil Painting Supplies That Every Oil Painter Needs in the Studio

    11 Best Palettes for Oil Painting Reviewed

    5 Things You Should Know Before Painting Oil Paint on Glass

    Learn How to Make Oil Paints Dry Faster

    A character is a tool that helps you tell your story. Character designers work hard to make great characters memorable. A well-designed character makes a lasting impression on the audience, whether it’s a character from television, video game, or a movie.

    The protagonist should have a unique personality that should also be visually stimulating, which makes the audience connect. Character design is a complex process, with ample room for growth. Each piece of art focuses on being prepared with unique technicalities kept in mind, starting from the shape to the character, then emotion, back story, colors, and attitude.

    Illustration Courtesy of Nikita Solovyov

    Every artist has their own style, but being able to make and break different molds of designs reflects the work of a good character designer. It is essential to be adaptable by blending into different styles of work, which helps an artist grow. The essence of the art of character designing is to hone an individual's sense of style, which relies on intrinsic motivation and practice.

    What is Character Design & Creation Process

    Here is a list of 14 tips for creating a character design:

    1. Focus on your subject idea

    You might think that you know enough about your subject, by just reading the description. But that is not correct because serious research is the only way to present your ideas in the original light. If you try and neglect the research aspect of creating the character then it will be reflected in your work.

    The focus should be on learning every aspect of your character, and not just the anatomy. The quality of your design will improve with a higher amount of time that you invest in learning about the subject. Avoid rushing and instead persevere, because as you keep practicing the design, it will get better eventually.

    2. Character

    When we say character, it is not just about the description of the physical aspects such as their age, occupation, gender, and body structure. But the primary focus needs to be on the psychological aspects of your characters such as their mood, personality, and motivation traits. To get the design perfect, you cannot afford to focus only on the physical aspects but instead, look at the situation from the characters point of view.

    Once you have completed your design get someone to give you feedback, and don’t tell them the plot. Instead, you should be asking them to say what are the emotions that the character is reflecting. In this way, you will understand whether you have met the character descriptions of the assignment given to you or not.

    You need to consciously, understand the emotion and the character of each piece that you are trying to create. Instead of just doodling around, you need to focus on the persona of the character. Otherwise, you will be wasting a lot of time, and the character design will not turn out to be perfect.

    Keep challenging yourself to get the emotions right in your character; it helps to conquer your limitations and makes you advanced in your field instead. Focus on the back story to understand how the subject has come to existence, rather than the generic emotion at present.

    When you give priority to understanding where your character has come from, and whether they have faced any life-changing events, it helps to solidify the ground that you’re trying to present. All these factors will help you understand what the attire, the emotions, and the body language should be for the character.

    3. A good silhouette

    A silhouette is a black shape, which is the outline of your character. It is vital to ensure that your silhouette is readable, irrespective of whether it’s a simple and basic design or a highly complex illustration.

    When you’re trying to create a silhouette you need first to understand how their posture can help you emphasize the emotion of the character. Ensure that the limbs are not overlapping, and they are separate. If there is a time when you are not happy with the posture of the character, then your first approach should be to look into your silhouette.

    You should create the design in such a way that it allows you to reflect the characters actions, attire, gender, and age. You need to convey these things in the absence of any color, lighting, details of an individual's features, or a shadow. It might be impossible sometimes to create entirely distinct shapes, but your goal should be to develop key poses that will tell your story.

    By the end, you need to create a design that does not require any explanation as it will get conveyed through your image. You need to be able to feel the pose and accordingly push your creativity to make a design which can tell the story in an effective manner.

    4. Posture

    Getting an attitude in the right place will make the character design stand out. The pose of your character and their expressions play a huge role. Getting active poses is essential to understand how the body is balanced.

    The essence of the character will be clear from their poses, which showcases their personality. To get the poses right, you need to know the nature of the character well. For example, hyperactive characters will have wild, expressive, and bold poses; they might be kicking their legs out and running around with excitement.

    Even when a character is standing still, they have a form of expressing themselves, creating the right posture reflects their personality. While drawing the pose, you need to try out different angles before finalizing on one. Choose the pose, which any person can draw and appears the same from all the different angles.

    5. Line of action

    This aspect helps to understand the direction and force of movement. It is an invisible line, which shows the audience the motion of the body. You can create dynamic and expressive imagery when there is a motion line showing a powerful action.

    When you create an active line of action, then it also complements the character's posture. Even if a character is sitting down, there will be a particular arc which helps to understand their present situation and behavior. Movements should be the primary focus when you start making the design, following which the other details (emotions, color, and attire) will eventually be drawn into place.

    Try practicing different facial expressions in front of the mirror, and watch how each part of the face changes as you evoke mixed emotions. It will help you to a great extent to draw the lines on the face correctly. You need to understand the situation and the plot in detail to be able to present your character distinctly.

    6. Role of color

    Choosing the right color is essential to showcase the personality of the character. For instance, a subject who is adventurous and a risk taker is shown in red, while a character who is calm, empathetic, and caring can be shown in blue. In the movie, Finding Dory the portrayal of colors with their primary characters has been shown correctly, this helps to connect with the audience.

    While selecting a palette, you need to ensure that there is a contrast between the chosen colors. As you start creating a palette, start with the primary colors (blue, yellow, and red), then focus on the secondary and tertiary colors. It is also essential for you to understand the relationship that exists between different colors as it helps to maintain the balance.

    Do not put in too much of color, as it distracts the viewers. Some of the famous characters like Winnie the Pooh, Scooby Doo, Dexter and Donald Duck have very few colors used on them. Each color has a different connotation in character design. In general, dark colors portray the evil characters, while good fellows are associated with light colors.

    7. Attitude and accessories

    It is important to portray the character in the correct frame of attitude. There should always be an element of personal truth to the character so that the audience can relate to the situation.

    The importance of accessories also helps the artist to bring out the attitude of the character. The balance should be done very carefully, as they can complement each other. There should also be a proper focus on the background of the character. If a character belongs to an impoverished environment, then the artist will probably make the character wear shabby clothes. On the other hand, if a character is from a wealthy background, they might be wearing the right amount of jewelry.

    Getting to portray the correct attitude of the character is crucial. The attitude should be shown in such a way that it can convey the character's personality in an expressive and relatable manner. The attire also helps to show their personality and mood, while the characters have also been remembered for their accessories. For instance, the square pants of Spongebob then the long cape of Elsa from Frozen.

    8. Shapes

    The characters should be recognizable, even from the shapes, so it is important to keep them exciting. You can experiment with shapes; artists usually use smooth and round shapes for the friendly characters while sharp angles can be used for the edgy character. The focus should also be in creating simple shapes, and they should be recognizable.

    9. Audience

    As you create a character, you need to think about your audience. If your audience is children, then your designs should focus around primary colors and basic shapes. You need to break down the core features of the characters and their personality, which will further help you make the designs. If your character is big and muscular then highlight their big muscles, it helps the persona of the character to stand out.

    You need to understand how to make your characters unique, to attract your audience to the storyline. If you can relate to your audience than you will be able to create the ideal personality that they will be excited to watch.

    10. Keep it simple

    Even if the entire character design is intricate, but you need to ensure that each you can break down each part of the work efficiently. It is evident that when you are creating this piece of art, there is a ton of trial and error, but once you present it, the design should appear simple for the audience.

    While making the design, you need to keep practicing the same characters several times. If the design is too complicated for you to create than it is a clear rejection, it can appear intricate altogether, but the character needs to be readable and easy to develop for even a toddler. Make sure that you avoid patterns that are too elaborate because it will be difficult to duplicate.

    11. Exaggerate Defining Features

    No matter what the character might portray, but you have to exaggerate the features that define them. The use of this technique in animation does not tend to look absurd, and you have the liberty to push things by showing exaggerated emotions. For instance, the role of Johnny Bravo is shown as a cool and energetic character; hence, he was given those oversized muscles and sunglasses.

    12. Keep the character Unique!

    You need to focus on creating a unique character. With that said, focus on the size of the character's eyes, the shape of their nose, the neck, posture, height, their limbs, and their ears to make a design  that is relatable and unique for the audience.

    We do not advise you to focus on their accessories, hair or attire as such a trend can change with time. But it is the main traits of the character that you should focus on, as this will help you to personalize their body shape.

    13. Research

    It is important for you to research on your subject, to understand the elements of the character's anatomy that needs to be played down and the ones that need exaggeration. Research also helps you to learn about the different ways to give your character more depth. The focus should be on creating a design through which the characters entire personality is reflected.

    If there is any particular design that you are not able to get right, then the internet is your dictionary. Look up online to see the different images that were made before, to find your inspiration. Research not only helps to get your creative thinking fuelled up, but it also shows you how to get designs done correctly.

    Every character has been previously inspired by a single idea, no matter which character we keep in focus. For instance, E.C. Segar, who is the creator of Popeye, has based his character in real life local sailor man from his hometown known as a bruising fighter. Who had once fought with five men and he came out victorious even without a can of spinach. The character resemblance is evident with their bald heads and their strong fondness for the cigar.

    To mold each version of your character, you need to do a significant amount of research. It helps to create a completely authentic design. For instance, if a character belongs from Japan, then an appropriate amount of study needs to be done to understand the environment, and the local culture to be able to portray the character in the right setting.

    14. Feedback

    Get feedback for the design that you are creating; this is not for learning whether the other person likes your designs or not. But this gives you the ability to emphasize the gaps that are present and to understand if the audience can relate to it or not. In the process of creating a great piece, you have to follow the worth of feedback while every criticism should be acted on to make the character evolve.

    Getting constructive feedback helps to remove the guesswork out of your design. However, you also need to analyze your work critically; take a break, and then get back to see the same piece. It is an exhilarating experience as you will be a better judge for the character you are trying to design, and the gaps will be filled in correctly with a fresh mind. It works to your benefit by training you to develop a right eye for design.

    Final Words

    In the end, every story is complete only when its characters are strong and continues to move towards a specific goal. Use this guide to create your exciting new character design. Always remember that great artists are born only when they borrow ideas from different places, but twist it to make it their creation!

    Himalayan Salt Blocks have been making rounds of the news already. They are efficient cooking machines carved out of pure salt which add to the flavors of whatever you cook. There's also this small point of them being very healthy, and doubling as beautiful serving plates for your dinner guests.

    However, like every cooking machinery ever created, Himalayan Salt Blocks come with their problems. The only difference being that if you misuse this, they might explode and cause damage to your oven.

    It's better to know your product before you buy it. So, here are seven things you need to know about Himalayan Salt Blocks.

    Image via heb.com

    1. They need to be heated slowly

    These are solid slabs of salts with cracks and fissures. Now, while, the companies you buy from will ensure that they are not exactly that susceptible to heat that they explode in your face as soon as you put it in the oven, you still need to careful.

    Space out your heating. Most of these blocks cannot take a rapid rise of heat. Anything faster than 100 degrees n 15 minutes is a no-no.

    So, you need to set your oven at a small temperature and gradually increase it over time.

    This is the best way to ensure that your slab will not explode while inside your oven and leave with a mass of pink salt that is very expensive.

    1. Not for greasy food

    Oil and moisture can quickly get into the fissures and cause problems. Especially if some water gets stuck in between your salt block, it could also explode. Remember, water heats up much faster than your salt block ever will, and it can cause accidents.

    This does not mean that you cannot use oil, however. Get yourself a brush and brush your food with oil and cook. This would also mean you will be eating healthy.

    1. The cracks and fissures are normal

    Himalayan Salt Blocks will have a lot of cracks and fissures naturally. This is not a defect. As with anything natural, the cracks and fissures will remain in this block too.

    However, this does not cause the block to explode, unless, as told above, you somehow manage to get water inside the crack. Your cooking would not be disrupted because of the natural cracks that the block has.

    You might also hear a crack or two once you place the block in the oven. This is normal too. Do not open your oven door every two minutes to check on whether the cracks are damaging the salt block. The company you will be buying from will ensure that the salt blocks can be cooked on, so, if you follow the instructions, there's very little chance of damage to the block or yourself.

     

    1. It won't salt your food heavily

    These blocks are some of the least porous, and they also retain very little moisture. So, when you are cooking, your food would not immediately become salty. In fact, people have reported that their food has got a new taste after cooking over a salt block.

    Given that the salt black contains over 80 trace minerals, it is not surprising that the taste differs a lot from simple table salt. You can expect to have your food taste different and be healthier at the same time.

    1. Do not wash

    One of the only difficult things you will experience with Himalayan Salt Blocks is the process of cleaning. If you put it under running water, or in the dishwasher, you would be dissolving the salt in water. So, carefully take a small fabric, and wipe the dirty parts.

    The easy tip is to remember that water is the enemy of salt and work around the entire thing by that. So, don't soak the fabric you are going to use for cleaning entirely with water, and definitely, avoid greasing the surface of the salt block.

    After cleaning, to get rid of the residual moisture, keep it in an airy space for an hour or two before using it again.

     

    Image via m.surlatable.com

    1. Don't touch it immediately after cooking

    Salt blocks retain heat for a long time. This means that if you feel the block immediately after you have finished cooking, you are likely to sustain a nasty burn.

    Pro Tip: Always put a plate under the salt block before putting in the oven. This way you can ensure that you can at least remove the plate from the oven and use it for serving purposes.

    Another critical thing to remember is that salt blocks will keep the heat within for a long time, and this could mean your meat gets overcooked. So, one, your meat is cooked, ensure that you remove it immediately to avoid making the mistake of a "well-done" steak.

     

    1. It wouldn't always be attractive

    One of the downsides of using the Himalayan Salt Block is that it would lose its natural pink-ness over time. The more you cook on the block, the more you are guaranteed to lose the natural shimmer of the block.

    There would also be an accumulation of black spots in the area where you are cooking your food. These spots can be cleaned easily if you remember to wipe it with a rag after every process of cooking.

    However, you can also see it as a natural property of the salt block that it gains character over time. A bloc without the new shimmer simply means that you have used it enough times to make it yours.

    A Himalayan Salt Block is one of the healthiest alternatives to using the normal grill or cooking pan. It maintains the pH of your body, gives you a lot of minerals and also manages to become the most stylish serving plate you will ever have. Remember the tips above before you go for it, and you will be fine.

    If Himalayan Salt Block seem interesting, you might also cast a glance over the best salt lamps out there, all Himalayan salt lamps ofcourse!